introductions3.amazonaws.com/toyota.site.p01/toyota/manuals/om35a92u/...i introduction this manual...
TRANSCRIPT
i
Introduction
This manual is made up of 2 sections. The first describing available functions for models without navigation capabili-ties (WITHOUT NAVIGATION) such as audio and hands-free. The second describing available functions for models with navigation capabili-ties (WITH NAVIGATION) such as navigation, audio, and hands-free. For models that do not have navigation capabilities, refer to the “WITHOUTNAVIGATION” section. For models that have navigation capabilities, refer tothe “WITH NAVIGATION” section.
■EXISTENCE OF NAVIGATION CAPABILITIESExistence of navigation capabilities can be confirmed by performing the following:
The actual design and button position will differ depending on the vehicle. Some but-tons will be in different positions or not shown. For details, refer to vehicle “Owner’sManual”.
CONFIRMING DISPLAY AUDIO MODEL
Navigation capabilities Reference
Not installed WITHOUT NAVIGATION (1ST SECTIONonly)
Installed WITH NAVIGATION (2ND SECTION only)
ii
1 When the ignition switch is turned to the “ACC” or “ON” position, the initialscreen will be displayed and the system will begin operating.
2 Press the “APPS” button.If your system does not have the “APPS” button, the Display Audio system does nothave navigation capabilities, refer to the “WITHOUT NAVIGATION” section.
If this screen is displayed, the Display Audio system has navigation capabilities.
In this manual, illustrations showing the typical Display Audio system layout,USB port and rear view camera location, etc. has been used. The actual designand button position may differ depending on the vehicles. For the correct loca-tion of these items, please refer to vehicle “Owner’s Manual”.
This manual has been written using a vehicle with a gasoline engine vehicle(without a smart entry and start system) as an example. For vehicles with asmart entry and start system and hybrid vehicles, please refer to the followingtable to confirm the engine switch name and mode.
COMMON ILLUSTRATIONS FOR ALL VEHICLE MODELS
ENGINE SWITCH NAMES AND MODES
Vehicle system Switch name and mode
Vehicles without asmart key system Engine switch ACC ON OFF (LOCK)
Vehicles with a smartkey system
“ENGINE START STOP” switch ACCESSORY IGNITION
ON OFF
Hybrid vehicles “POWER” switch ACCESSORY ON OFF
iii
SYMBOLS USED IN ILLUSTRATIONS
Safety symbol
The symbol of a circle with a slash through it means “Do not”, “Do notdo this”, or “Do not let this happen”.
Arrows indicating operations
Indicates the action (pushing, turning, etc.)used to operate switches and otherdevices.
Indicates the outcome of an operation (e.g.a lid opens).
HOW TO READ THIS MANUAL
No. Name Description
Operational Outlines An outline of the operation is explained.
Main Operations The steps of an operation are explained.
Related Operations A main operation’s supplementary operations are described.
Information Useful information for the user is described.
iv
1
Display_audio_U_1st
1 QUICK GUIDE 7
2 AUDIO SYSTEM 13
3 Bluetooth® HANDS-FREE SYSTEM 67
4 VEHICLE INFORMATION 85
5 SETUP 91
6 REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM 119
INDEX 127
TABLE OF CONTENTS
WITHOUT NAVIGATION (1ST SECTION)
2
Display_audio_U_1st
IntroductionThis manual explains the operation of the Display Audio system. Please readthis manual carefully to ensure proper use. Keep this manual in your vehicle atall times.The screen shots in this document and the actual screens of the Display Audiosystem differ depending on whether the functions and/or a contract existed atthe time of producing this document.
3
Display_audio_U_1st
For safety reasons, this manual indicatesitems requiring particular attention with thefollowing marks.
To use this system in the safest possiblemanner, follow all the safety tips shownbelow.Do not use any feature of this system tothe extent it becomes a distraction andprevents safe driving. The first prioritywhile driving should always be the safe op-eration of the vehicle. While driving, besure to observe all traffic regulations.Prior to the actual use of this system, learnhow to use it and become thoroughly famil-iar with it. Read the entire Display Audiosystem Owner’s manual to make sure youunderstand the system. Do not allow otherpeople to use this system until they haveread and understood the instructions inthis manual.For your safety, some functions may be-come inoperable when driving. Unavail-able screen buttons are dimmed.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL
CAUTION
● This is a warning against anything whichmay cause injury to people if the warn-ing is ignored. You are informed aboutwhat you must or must not do in order toreduce the risk of injury to yourself andothers.
NOTICE
● This is a warning against anything whichmay cause damage to the vehicle or itsequipment if the warning is ignored. Youare informed about what you must ormust not do in order to avoid or reducethe risk of damage to your vehicle andits equipment.
SAFETY INSTRUCTION
CAUTION
● For safety, the driver should not operatethe Display Audio system while he/sheis driving. Insufficient attention to theroad and traffic may cause an accident.
4
Display_audio_U_1st
5
1
2
3
4
5
6
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Display_audio_U_1st
1. CONTROLS AND FEATURES.......... 8OVERVIEW BUTTONS ........................... 8SYSTEM FUNCTION INDEX ................ 10TOUCH SCREEN OPERATION............ 11
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION........ 14QUICK REFERENCE ............................ 14SOME BASICS...................................... 16RADIO OPERATION
(WITH Display Audio SYSTEM).......... 20RADIO OPERATION
(WITH Premium Display Audio SYSTEM).................................. 23
RADIO OPERATION (XM® Satellite Radio BROADCAST)..................................... 29
CD PLAYER OPERATION .................... 34iPod OPERATION ................................. 39USB MEMORY OPERATION................ 43AUX DEVICE OPERATION................... 47Bluetooth® AUDIO OPERATION........... 49STEERING SWITCHES ........................ 57AUDIO SYSTEM
OPERATING HINTS ........................... 60
1. Bluetooth® HANDS-FREE SYSTEM OPERATION .................................. 68QUICK REFERENCE ............................ 68HANDS-FREE SYSTEM ....................... 69REGISTER A Bluetooth® PHONE......... 74CALL ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE....... 76RECEIVE ON THE Bluetooth®
PHONE ............................................... 82TALK ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE....... 83
1. VEHICLE INFORMATION............... 86QUICK REFERENCE ............................ 86FUEL CONSUMPTION.......................... 87TIRE PRESSURE WARNING
SYSTEM.............................................. 89
1. SETUP OPERATION ...................... 92QUICK REFERENCE ............................ 92GENERAL SETTINGS........................... 93GUIDANCE SETTINGS ......................... 95DISPLAY SETTINGS............................. 96Bluetooth® SETTINGS........................... 98PHONE SETTINGS ............................. 106AUDIO SETTINGS............................... 116VEHICLE SETTINGS........................... 117
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM ...................................... 120REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
OPERATION ..................................... 120DRIVING PRECAUTIONS ................... 124
ALPHABETICAL INDEX................... 128
1 QUICK GUIDE
2 AUDIO SYSTEM
3 Bluetooth® HANDS-FREE SYSTEM
4 VEHICLE INFORMATION
5 SETUP
6 REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
INDEX
6
Display_audio_U_1st
1
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
Display_audio_U_1st
1. OVERVIEW BUTTONS ................... 8
2. SYSTEM FUNCTION INDEX......... 10
3. TOUCH SCREEN OPERATION.... 11
1 CONTROLS AND FEATURES
QUICK GUIDE
8
Display_audio_U_1st
1. CONTROLS AND FEATURES
1. OVERVIEW BUTTONS
The actual design and button position will differ depending on the vehicle. Some but-tons will be in different positions or not shown. For details, refer to vehicle “Owner’sManual”.
No. Name Function Page
Touch screendisplay
By touching the screen with your finger, you cancontrol the selected functions. 11
Disc slot Insert a disc into this slot. The CD player turns onimmediately. 34
“TUNE/SCROLL”knob
Turn this knob to select radio station bands, tracksand files. Also, the knob can be used for selectionfrom the list display.
16
“AUDIO” button Press this button to access the audio system. Theaudio system turns on in the last mode used. 14, 16, 17
button* Press this button to pause or resume playing themusic. —
button Press this button to access the Bluetooth® hands-free system. 68
“SETUP” button Press this button to customize the function set-tings. 92
“SEEK/TRACK”button
Press the “ ” or “ ” button to seek up or down fora radio station, or to access a desired track or file.
21, 24, 31, 36, 37, 41,
44, 54
9
1. CONTROLS AND FEATURES
1
QU
ICK
GU
IDE
Display_audio_U_1st
*: If equipped
“CAR” button* Press this button to access the vehicle informationsystem. 86
“APPS” button* This button is used for an add-on external naviga-tion system. (If equipped) —
“PWR/VOL” knob Press this knob to turn the audio system on and off,and turn it to adjust the volume. 16
button Press this button to eject a disc. 34
No. Name Function Page
10
1. CONTROLS AND FEATURES
Display_audio_U_1st
2. SYSTEM FUNCTION INDEX
To access the audio system, press the“AUDIO” button. The audio control screenwill be displayed. Audio sources: Radio,CDs, iPod, USB, AUX and Bluetooth® au-dio. For details, see pages 13.
To access the Bluetooth® hands-free sys-tem, press the button. The drivercan make or receive phone calls withouttaking their hands off the steering wheel.For details, see pages 67.
To access the vehicle information system,press the “CAR” button. Fuel consump-tion and tire pressure can be checked. Fordetails, see pages 85.
To customize the function settings, pressthe “SETUP” button. The interface lan-guage can also be changed from the setupmenu. Function not available on all mod-els. For details, see pages 91.
Shifting into the “R” position will automati-cally show the view behind the rear of thevehicle on the display screen. For details,see page 119.
AUDIO SYSTEM
Bluetooth® HANDS-FREE SYSTEM
VEHICLE INFORMATION (IF EQUIPPED)
SETUP
REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
11
1. CONTROLS AND FEATURES
1
QU
ICK
GU
IDE
Display_audio_U_1st
3. TOUCH SCREEN OPERATION
When a screen button is touched, a beepsounds. (To set a beep sound, see page93.)
This system is operated mainly by thescreen buttons.
NOTICE
● To prevent damaging the screen, lightlytouch the screen buttons with your fin-ger.
● Do not use objects other than your fingerto touch the screen.
● Wipe off fingerprints using a glass clean-ing cloth. Do not use chemical cleanersto clean the screen, as they may dam-age the touch screen.
● To prevent the 12-volt battery from beingdischarged, do not leave the system onlonger than necessary when the engineis not running (hybrid vehicles: thehybrid system is off).
INFORMATION
● If the system does not respond to atouch on a screen button, move your fin-ger away from the screen and thentouch it again.
● Dimmed screen buttons cannot be oper-ated.
● The displayed image may becomedarker and moving images may beslightly distorted when the display iscold.
● Under extremely cold conditions, thescreen may not be displayed and thedata input by a user may be deleted.Also, the screen buttons may be harderthan usual to depress.
● When you look at the screen throughpolarized material such as polarizedsunglasses, the screen may be dark andhard to see. If so, look at the screenfrom different angles, adjust the screensettings (See “DISPLAY SETTINGS” onpage 96.), or take off your sunglasses.
12
Display_audio_U_1st
1. QUICK REFERENCE .................... 14
2. SOME BASICS.............................. 16TURNING THE AUDIO SYSTEM
ON OR OFF......................................... 16CONTROLS USING
THE “TUNE/SCROLL” KNOB.............. 16SWITCHING AUDIO SOURCE.............. 17DSP CONTROL ..................................... 17TONE AND BALANCE........................... 18
3. RADIO OPERATION (WITH Display Audio SYSTEM)..................................... 20
SWITCHING TO RADIO MODE............. 20PRESETTING A STATION .................... 20SELECTING A STATION....................... 21RADIO BROADCAST DATA
SYSTEM .............................................. 21TRAFFIC ANNOUNCEMENT ................ 22
4. RADIO OPERATION (WITH Premium Display Audio SYSTEM).......................... 23
SWITCHING TO RADIO MODE............. 23PRESETTING A STATION .................... 23SELECTING A STATION....................... 24RADIO BROADCAST DATA
SYSTEM .............................................. 24TRAFFIC ANNOUNCEMENT ................ 25USING HD Radio™ TECHNOLOGY...... 26
1 AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
2
13
1
2
3
4
5
6
Display_audio_U_1st
5. RADIO OPERATION (XM® Satellite Radio BROADCAST) ............................. 29
HOW TO SUBSCRIBE TO AN XM® Satellite Radio ...................... 29
DISPLAYING THE RADIO ID................ 29SWITCHING TO SATELLITE RADIO
MODE ................................................. 30CHANNEL CATEGORY ........................ 30PRESETTING A CHANNEL .................. 30SELECTING A CHANNEL..................... 31DISPLAYING THE TITLE AND
NAME.................................................. 31IF THE SATELLITE RADIO
TUNER MALFUNCTIONS .................. 32
6. CD PLAYER OPERATION ............ 34INSERTING OR EJECTING A DISC..... 34SWITCHING TO CD MODE .................. 35PLAYING AN AUDIO CD ...................... 35PLAYING A MP3/WMA DISC................ 37
7. iPod OPERATION ......................... 39CONNECTING AN iPod ........................ 39SWITCHING TO iPod MODE ................ 39PLAYING AN iPod................................. 40
8. USB MEMORY OPERATION ........ 43CONNECTING A USB MEMORY ......... 43SWITCHING TO USB MODE................ 43PLAYING A USB MEMORY .................. 44
9. AUX DEVICE OPERATION........... 47CONNECTING A PORTABLE
AUDIO DEVICE................................... 47SWITCHING TO AUX MODE ................ 48PLAYING A PORTABLE AUDIO
DEVICE ............................................... 48
10. Bluetooth® AUDIO OPERATION ............................... 49
SWITCHING TO Bluetooth® AUDIO MODE ..................................... 50
CONNECTING A Bluetooth® AUDIO PLAYER.................................. 51
PLAYING A Bluetooth® AUDIO PLAYER.................................. 53
11. STEERING SWITCHES................. 57STEERING SWITCHES
(WITH TWO DIRECTION STEERING SWITCH).......................... 57
STEERING SWITCHES (WITH FOUR DIRECTION STEERING SWITCH).......................... 58
12. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATING HINTS.......................................... 60
RADIO RECEPTION.............................. 60iPod........................................................ 61USB MEMORY ...................................... 62CARING FOR YOUR CD PLAYER
AND DISCS......................................... 62MP3/WMA FILES................................... 64CD-R AND CD-RW DISCS .................... 65TERMS .................................................. 66
AUDIO SYSTEM
14
Display_audio_U_1st
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
1. QUICK REFERENCE
The actual design and button position will differ depending on the vehicle. Some but-tons will be in different positions or not shown. For details, refer to vehicle “Owner’sManual”.
To access the audio system, press the “AUDIO” button. The audio system turnson in the last mode used.
No. Name Function Page
Audio controlscreen
A selected audio source is displayed, and it can beoperated with the touch screen controls.
Disc slot Insert a disc into this slot. The CD player turns onimmediately. 34
“Source” Touch to select your desired audio sources. Theaudio source selection screen will be displayed. 17
“TUNE/SCROLL”knob
Turn to select radio station bands, tracks and files.Also, the knob can be used for selection from thelist display.
16
“AUDIO” button Press to display the audio control screen. The au-dio system turns on in the last mode used. 16, 17
button* Press to pause or resume playing the music.
“SEEK/TRACK”button
Press the “ ” or “ ” button to seek up or down fora station, or to access a desired track or file.
21, 24, 31, 36, 37, 41,
44, 54
15
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
2
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display_audio_U_1st
*: If equipped
“PWR/VOL” knob Press to turn the audio system on and off, and turnto adjust the volume. 16
button Press to eject a disc. 34
No. Name Function Page
16
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
Display_audio_U_1st
2. SOME BASICS
“AUDIO” button: Press this button to dis-play screen buttons for the audio system.“PWR/VOL” knob: Press this knob to turnthe audio system on and off. Turn thisknob to adjust the volume. The systemturns on in the last mode used.
Radio mode Radio stations can be tuned in manuallyusing this knob.
Modes other than radio Tracks or files can be selected using theknob.
This section describes some of the ba-sic features of the audio system. Someinformation may not pertain to yoursystem.Your audio system works when the en-gine switch is turned to the “ACC” or“ON” position.
CAUTION
● For vehicles sold in U.S.A. and Canada:Part 15 of the FCC RulesFCC Warning: Changes or modificationsin construction not expressly approvedby the party responsible for compliancecould void the user’s authority to operatethe equipment. Radio frequency expo-sure. This device is approved for MobileApplication only and, to comply withapplicable FCC radio frequency expo-sure regulations, must be used with adistance of at least 7.9 in. (20 cm)between the antenna and the body ofany person at all time during use.
● Laser products• Do not take this unit apart or attempt to
make any changes yourself. This is anintricate unit that uses a laser pickup toretrieve information from the surface ofcompact discs. The laser is carefullyshielded so that its rays remain insidethe cabinet. Therefore, never try to dis-assemble the player or alter any of itsparts since you may be exposed tolaser rays and dangerous voltages.
• This product utilizes a laser. Use ofcontrols or adjustments or perfor-mance of procedures other than thosespecified herein may result in hazard-ous radiation exposure.
NOTICE
● To prevent the 12-volt battery from beingdischarged, do not leave the audio sys-tem on longer than necessary when theengine is not running (hybrid vehicles:the hybrid system is off).
TURNING THE AUDIO SYSTEM ON OR OFF
INFORMATION
● If the volume is adjusted while music ispaused or muted, the pause or mute willbe cancelled.
CONTROLS USING THE “TUNE/SCROLL” KNOB
17
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
2
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display_audio_U_1st
When a list is displayed When a list is displayed on the screen,turn the “TUNE/SCROLL” knob tomove the cursor box to select a desireditem from the list, and pressing the knobwill play it. The track that is being playedis highlighted.
1 Press the “AUDIO” button.
The audio system turns on in the lastmode used.
2 Touch “Source” or press “AUDIO”button to display the audio source se-lection screen.
3 Touch a desired audio source.
If a desired source is not displayed on thescreen, touch or to scroll toit.Touching the “ALL” will change the liststyle as follows.
1 Press the “AUDIO” button.
2 Touch .
SWITCHING AUDIO SOURCE
INFORMATION
● You cannot select dimmed screen but-tons. Connect the audio device beforeselecting.
DSP CONTROL
18
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
Display_audio_U_1st
3 Touch the “DSP” tab to display thisscreen.
Without JBL sound system
With JBL sound system
4 Touch the desired screen button.
Without JBL sound system
1 Touch “High”, “Mid” or “Low” of“Automatic Sound Levelizer”.
2 Touch “OK”.
With JBL sound system
1 Touch “On” of “Automatic SoundLevelizer”.
2 Touch “OK”.
1 Touch “On” of “Surround”.
2 Touch “OK”.
1 Press the “AUDIO” button.
2 Touch .
AUTOMATIC SOUND LEVELIZER (ASL)
The system adjusts to the optimum vol-ume and tone quality according to ve-hicle speed to compensate forincreased vehicle noise.
SURROUND FUNCTION (IF EQUIPPED)
TONE AND BALANCE
TONE
How good an audio program sounds islargely determined by the mix of thetreble, mid and bass levels. In fact, dif-ferent kinds of music and vocal pro-grams usually sound better withdifferent mixes of treble, mid and bass.
BALANCE
A good balance of the left and right ste-reo channels and of the front and rearsound levels is also important.Keep in mind that when listening to astereo recording or broadcast, chang-ing the right/left balance will increasethe volume of one group of soundswhile decreasing the volume of anoth-er.
19
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
2
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display_audio_U_1st
3 Touch the “Sound” tab to display thisscreen.
4 Touch the desired screen button.“Treble” “+” or “-”: To adjust high-pitched tones.“Mid” “+” or “-”: To adjust mid-pitchedtones.“Bass” “+” or “-”: To adjust low-pitchedtones.“Front” or “Rear”: To adjust the soundbalance between the front and rear speak-ers.“L” or “R”: To adjust the sound balancebetween the left and right speakers.
5 Touch “OK”.
INFORMATION
● The tone of each mode (such as AM,FM and CD player) can be adjusted.
20
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
Display_audio_U_1st
3. RADIO OPERATION (WITH Display Audio SYSTEM)
1 Press the “AUDIO” button.
The audio system turns on in the lastmode used.
2 Touch “Source” or press “AUDIO”button to display the audio source se-lection screen.
3 Touch “AM” or “FM” on the screen.
If a desired source is not displayed on thescreen, touch or to scroll toit.
1 Tune in the desired station.
2 Touch one of the left side screen but-tons (1-6) and hold it until a beep isheard. This sets the preset frequencyto the screen button. The station’s fre-quency will be displayed in the screenbutton.
To change the preset station to a differentone, follow the same procedure.
Touch or to change the presetpage.
SWITCHING TO RADIO MODE PRESETTING A STATION
21
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
2
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display_audio_U_1st
Preset tuning: Touch one of the presetchannels on the left side of the screen toselect the desired station. The screen but-ton is highlighted and the station frequencyappears on the screen.Manual tuning: Search for a desired radiostation by turning the “TUNE/SCROLL”knob.Seek tuning: Press the “ ” or “ ” buttonof “SEEK/TRACK”. The radio will beginseeking up or down for a station of thenearest frequency and will stop when astation is found. Each time the button ispressed, the stations will be searched au-tomatically one after another.To scan all the frequencies: Touch“SCAN”. “SCAN” will appear on thescreen. The radio will find the next stationand stay there for a few seconds, and thenscan again. To stay tuned to a station andstop the scanning, touch “SCAN” again.
1 Touch “Options”.
SELECTING A STATION
Tune in the desired station using one ofthe following methods.
RADIO BROADCAST DATA SYSTEM
This audio system is equipped with Ra-dio Broadcast Data Systems (RBDS).RBDS mode allows text messages tobe received from radio stations that uti-lize RBDS transmitters.When RBDS is on, the radio can— only select stations of a particularprogram type,— display messages from radio sta-tions,— search for a stronger signal station.RBDS features are available onlywhen listening to an FM station thatbroadcasts RBDS information and the“FM info” indicator is on.
SELECTING A DESIRED TYPE
22
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
Display_audio_U_1st
2 Touch “TYPE >” or “< TYPE” to moveforward and backward through the pro-gram list.
Once a program type has been set,“TYPE SEEK” will appear on the screen.The program list is in the following order:• Classical• Country• EasyLis (Easy Listening)• Inform (Information)• Jazz• News• Oldies• Other• Pop Music• Religion• Rock• R&B (Rhythm and Blues)• Sports• Talk• Alert (Emergency Alert)
3 Touch “TYPE SEEK” and the systemwill start to seek for stations in the rele-vant program type.
“Traffic”: Touch to seek a traffic programstation. “TRAF SEEK” will appear on thescreen.
INFORMATION
● If no relevant program can be found, “notype” will appear on the screen.
TRAFFIC ANNOUNCEMENT
A station that regularly broadcasts traf-fic information is automatically located.
INFORMATION
● If no traffic program station is found, “NoTraffic” will appear on the screen.
● If a traffic program station is found, thename of the traffic program station willbe displayed for a while.
23
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
2
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display_audio_U_1st
4. RADIO OPERATION (WITH Premium Display Audio SYSTEM)
1 Press the “AUDIO” button.
The audio system turns on in the lastmode used.
2 Touch “Source” or press “AUDIO”button to display the audio source se-lection screen.
3 Touch “AM” or “FM” on the screen.
If a desired source is not displayed on thescreen, touch or to scroll toit.
1 Tune in the desired station.
2 Touch one of the left side screen but-tons (1-6) and hold it until a beep isheard. This sets the frequency to thescreen button. The station’s frequencywill be displayed in the screen button.
To change the preset station to a differentone, follow the same procedure.
Touch or to change the presetpage.
SWITCHING TO RADIO MODE PRESETTING A STATION
Radio mode has a mix preset function,which can store up to 36 stations (6station per page × 6 page) from any ofthe AM, FM or SAT bands.
24
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
Display_audio_U_1st
Preset tuning: Touch one of the mix pre-set channels on the left side of the screento select the desired station. The screenbutton is highlighted and the station fre-quency appears on the screen.Manual tuning: Search for a desired radiostation by turning the “TUNE/SCROLL”knob.Seek tuning: Press the “ ” or “ ” buttonof “SEEK/TRACK”. The radio will beginseeking up or down for a station of thenearest frequency and will stop when astation is found. Each time the button ispressed, the stations will be searched au-tomatically one after another.To scan all the frequencies: Touch“SCAN”. “SCAN” will appear on thescreen. The radio will find the next stationand stay there for 10 seconds if “All” or“HD Only” is selected, or 5 seconds if“Analog” is selected, and then scanagain. To stay tuned to a station and stopthe scanning, touch “SCAN” again. (Toset the HD Radio™ system, see page116.)
1 Touch “Options”.
SELECTING A STATION
Tune in the desired station using one ofthe following methods.
RADIO BROADCAST DATA SYSTEM
This audio system is equipped with Ra-dio Broadcast Data Systems (RBDS).RBDS mode allows text messages tobe received from radio stations that uti-lize RBDS transmitters.When RBDS is on, the radio can— only select stations of a particularprogram type,— display messages from radio sta-tions,— search for a stronger signal station.RBDS features are available onlywhen listening to an FM station thatbroadcasts RBDS information and the“FM info” indicator is on.
SELECTING A DESIRED TYPE
25
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
2
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display_audio_U_1st
2 Touch “TYPE >” or “< TYPE” to moveforward and backward through the pro-gram list.
Once a program type has been set,“TYPE SEEK” will appear on the screen.The program list is in the following order:• Classical• Country• EasyLis (Easy Listening)• Inform (Information)• Jazz• News• Oldies• Other• Pop Music• Religion• Rock• R&B (Rhythm and Blues)• Sports• Talk• Traffic (Not available when “HD Radio™
Settings” are set to analog)• Alert (Emergency Alert)
3 Touch “TYPE SEEK” and the systemwill start to seek for stations in the rele-vant program type.
“Traffic”: Touch to seek a traffic programstation. “TRAF SEEK” will appear on thescreen.
INFORMATION
● If no relevant program can be found, “notype” will appear on the screen.
TRAFFIC ANNOUNCEMENT
A station that regularly broadcasts traf-fic information is automatically located.
INFORMATION
● If no traffic program station is found, “NoTraffic” will appear on the screen.
● If a traffic program station is found, thename of the traffic program station willbe displayed for a while.
26
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
Display_audio_U_1st
1 Touch “HD Radio” to turn the indica-tor on.
As a user works through the analog radiostations, (where applicable) the radioreceiver will automatically tune from ananalog signal to a digital signal within 5seconds.An orange “HD)” logo indicator will be dis-played on the screen when in digital. The“HD)” logo will first appear in a gray colorindicating the station is indeed (an analogand) a digital station. Once the digital sig-nal is acquired, the logo will change to abright orange color.
1 Touch “Text”.
2 Information such as the artist name,song title, album title and music genrebeing listened to are displayed on thetext screen.
To display messages from the station,touch “Additional Information”.
1 Touch “Multicast”.
Each time “Multicast” is touched, thesupplemental program changes.If “Multicast” is touched when tuned tothe last of the supplemental programs, themain program will be returned to.
USING HD Radio™ TECHNOLOGY
HD Radio™ Technology is the digitalevolution of analog AM/FM radio. Yourradio product has a special receiverwhich allows it to receive digitalbroadcasts (where available) inaddition to the analog broadcasts italready receives. Digital broadcastshave better sound quality than analogbroadcasts as digital broadcastsprovide free, crystal clear audio with nostatic or distortion. For moreinformation, and a guide to availableradio stations and programming, referto www.hdradio.com.
INFORMATION
MULTICAST
On the FM radio frequency most digitalstations have “multiple” or supplemen-tal programs on the FM station.
27
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
2
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display_audio_U_1st
1 Touch “Tag” to bookmark the musicinformation.
2 Open the cover and connect iPod us-ing an iPod cable.
The USB/AUX port is located on theinstrument panel, or in the console box orglove box etc. The actual design and but-ton position will differ depending on thevehicle. For details, refer to vehicle“Owner’s Manual”.Turn on the power of the iPod if it is notturned on.Once an iPod is connected, the music tagmoves from the radio into the iPod.When the iPod is connected to iTunes, the“tagged” information of the songs whichwere tagged while listening to the radiocan be viewed. Then a user may decide topurchase the song or CD/Album whichhas been listened to on their radio.
TAG INFORMATION
● If tagging the music information fails,“Saving the HD Radio tag failed.” will bedisplayed on the screen. If this occurs,tag the information again.
● HD Radio™ stations can be preset.
28
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
Display_audio_U_1st
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Experience Cause Action
Mismatch of time alignmenta users may hear a shortperiod of programming re-played or an echo, stutteror skip.
The radio stations analogand digital volume is notproperly aligned or the sta-tion is in ballgame mode.
None, radio broadcast issue. Auser can contact the radio station.
Sound fades, blending inand out.
Radio is shifting betweenanalog and digital audio.
Reception issue, may clear-up asthe vehicle continues to be driven.Touching “HD Radio” with the in-dicator off can force radio in an an-alog audio.
Audio mute condition whenan HD2/HD3 multicastchannel has been playing.
The radio does not haveaccess to digital signals atthe moment.
This is normal behavior, wait untilthe digital signal returns. If out ofthe coverage area, seek a newstation.
Audio mute delay when se-lecting an HD2/HD3 multi-cast channel preset.
The digital multicast con-tent is not available untilHD Radio™ broadcast canbe decoded and make theaudio available. This takesup to 7 seconds.
This is normal behavior, wait forthe audio to become available.
Text information does notmatch the present song au-dio.
Data service issue by theradio broadcaster.
Broadcaster should be notified.Complete the form;www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences.
No text information shownfor the present selected fre-quency.
Data service issue by theradio broadcaster.
Broadcaster should be notified.Complete the form;www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences.
HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corpora-tion. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD, HD Radio, and “Arc” logosare proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.
29
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
2
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display_audio_U_1st
5. RADIO OPERATION (XM® Satellite Radio BROADCAST)*
If “CH 000” is selected using the“TUNE/SCROLL” knob, the ID code,which is 8 alphanumeric characters, willbe displayed. If another channel isselected, the ID code will no longer be dis-played. The channel (000) displays theradio ID and the specific radio code.
HOW TO SUBSCRIBE TO AN XM® Satellite Radio
To listen to a satellite radio broadcastin the vehicle, a subscription to theXM® Satellite Radio service is neces-sary.
An XM® Satellite Radio is a tuner de-signed exclusively to receive broad-casts provided under a separatesubscription. Availability is limited tothe 48 contiguous U.S. states andsome Canadian provinces.
HOW TO SUBSCRIBE
It is necessary to enter into a separateservice agreement with XM® SatelliteRadio in order to receive satellitebroadcast programming in the vehicle.Additional activation and service sub-scription fees apply that are not includ-ed in the purchase price of the vehicleand digital satellite tuner.
For complete information on subscrip-tion rates and terms, or to subscribe toXM® Satellite Radio:U.S.A.Refer to www.siriusxm.com or call 1-800-967-2346.
CanadaRefer to www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-209-0079.
*: If equipped
INFORMATION
● XM® Satellite Radio is solely responsi-ble for the quality, availability and con-tent of the satellite radio servicesprovided, which are subject to the termsand conditions of the XM® SatelliteRadio customer service agreement.
● Customers should have their radio IDready; the radio ID can be found by tun-ing to “channel 000” on the radio. Fordetails, see “DISPLAYING THE RADIOID” below.
● All fees and programming are theresponsibility of XM® Satellite Radio andare subject to change.
SATELLITE TUNER TECHNOLOGY NOTICE
Toyota’s satellite radio tuners areawarded Type Approval Certificatesfrom XM® Satellite Radio Inc. as proofof compatibility with the services of-fered by XM® Satellite Radio.
DISPLAYING THE RADIO ID
Each XM® tuner is identified with aunique radio ID. The radio ID is re-quired when activating an XM® serviceor when reporting a problem.
30
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
Display_audio_U_1st
1 Press the “AUDIO” button.
The audio system turns on in the lastmode used.
2 Touch “Source” or press “AUDIO”button to display the audio source se-lection screen.
3 Touch “SAT” on the screen.
If a desired source is not displayed on thescreen, touch or to scroll toit.
1 Touch “Options”.
2 Touch either “TYPE >” or “< TYPE” togo to the next or previous category.
1 Tune in the desired channel.
2 Touch one of the left side screen but-tons (1-6) and hold it until a beep isheard. This sets the preset frequencyto the screen button. The Channelnumber will be displayed in the screenbutton.
To change the preset channel to a differ-ent one, follow the same procedure.
SWITCHING TO SATELLITE RADIO MODE
CHANNEL CATEGORY
PRESETTING A CHANNEL
31
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
2
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display_audio_U_1st
Preset tuning: Touch the channel selectorscreen button (1-6) to listen to the desiredchannel. The selected screen button (1-6)is highlighted and its related informationappears on the right side of the screen.Manual tuning: Turn the“TUNE/SCROLL” knob to select the nextor previous channel. Turning the knobquickly allows rapid scrolling through thechannel list.To select a channel within the currentcategory: Press the “ ” or “ ” button of“SEEK/TRACK”. The radio will change upor down to a channel within the currentchannel category.
To scan the currently selected channelcategory: Touch “SCAN”. “SCAN” ap-pears on the screen. The radio will find thenext channel in the same channel catego-ry, stay there for a few seconds, and thenscan again. To select a channel, touch“SCAN” again.
1 Touching “Text” displays the artistname and song title you are currentlylistening to.
SELECTING A CHANNEL
Tune in the desired channel using oneof the following methods.
DISPLAYING THE TITLE AND NAME
INFORMATION
● Up to 64 alphanumeric characters canbe displayed. (Some information will notbe fully displayed.)
32
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
Display_audio_U_1st
IF THE SATELLITE RADIO TUNER MALFUNCTIONS
When problems occur with the XM® tuner, a message will appear on the screen.Referring to the table below to identify the problem, take the suggested correctiveaction.
Message Explanation
Check Antenna
The XM® antenna is not connected. Check whether the XM® an-tenna cable is attached securely.
A short circuit occurs in the antenna or the surrounding antennacable. See a Toyota certified dealer for assistance.
Ch Unauthorized
You have not subscribed to XM® Satellite Radio. The radio is be-ing updated with the latest encryption code. Contact XM® Satel-lite Radio for subscription information. When a contract iscanceled, you can choose “CH000” and all free-to-air channels.
The premium channel you selected is not authorized. Wait forabout 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or“CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select anotherchannel. To listen to the premium channel, contact XM® SatelliteRadio.
No Signal The XM® signal is too weak at the current location. Wait until yourvehicle reaches a location with a stronger signal.
Loading The unit is acquiring audio or program information. Wait until theunit has received the information.
Channel Off Air The channel you selected is not broadcasting any programming.Select another channel.
----- There is no song/program title or artist name/feature associatedwith the channel at that time. No action is required.
Chan Unavailable
The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait for about 2seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or“CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select anotherchannel.
INFORMATION
● Contact the XM® Listener Care Center at 1-800-967-2346 (U.S.A.) or 1-877-209-0079(Canada).
33
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
2
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display_audio_U_1st
NOTICE
● This equipment has been tested andfound to comply with the limits for aclass B digital device, pursuant to Part15 of the FCC Rules. These limits aredesigned to provide reasonable protec-tion against harmful interference in aresidential installation. This equipmentgenerates, uses and can radiate radiofrequency energy and, if not installedand used in accordance with the instruc-tions, may cause harmful interference toradio communications. However, thereis no guarantee that interference will notoccur in a particular installation.
● If this equipment does cause harmfulinterference to radio or television recep-tion, which can be determined by turningthe equipment off and on, the user isencouraged to try to correct the interfer-ence by one or more of the followingmeasures:• Reorient or relocate the receiving
antenna.• Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.• Connect the equipment into an outlet
on a circuit different from that towhich the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experiencedradio/TV technician for help.
● Information to user• Alternation or modifications carried
out without appropriate authorizationmay invalidate the user’s right tooperate the equipment.
INFORMATION
● This XM® tuner supports “AudioServices” (Music and Talk) of only XM®
Satellite Radio and “Text Information*”linked to the respective “AudioServices”.*: Text Information includes, StationName, (Artist) Name, (Song) Title andCategory Name.
34
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
Display_audio_U_1st
6. CD PLAYER OPERATION
1 Insert a disc with the label side up.
When a disc is correctly inserted into theslot, the CD player will automatically startplaying from the first track or the first file ofthe first folder on a disc.
1 Press the button.
The disc will be ejected.
The CD player can play audio CDs, CDtext and MP3/WMA discs.(a)Audio CD, CD text (See page 35.)(b)MP3/WMA disc (See page 37.)For appropriate discs for this player,see “AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATINGHINTS” on page 60.
INSERTING OR EJECTING A DISC
INSERTING A DISC
INFORMATION
● If the label is facing down, “Check DISC”will appear on the screen.
● The player is intended for use with 4.7in. (12 cm) discs only. To play 3 in. (8cm) discs, use an adaptor.
NOTICE
● Do not stack up two discs for insertion,or it will cause damage to the CD player.Insert only one disc into the slot at atime.
● Never try to disassemble or oil any partof the CD player. Do not insert anythingother than a disc into the slot.
EJECTING A DISC
35
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
2
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display_audio_U_1st
1 Press the “AUDIO” button.
The audio system turns on in the lastmode used.
2 Touch “Source” or press “AUDIO”button to display the audio source se-lection screen.
3 Touch “CD” on the screen.
If a desired source is not displayed on thescreen, touch or to scroll toit.
If a CD-TEXT disc is inserted, the title ofthe track and disc currently being playedwill be displayed.
: Touch to pause the track.
: Touch to resume playing the track.Fast forward and Reverse: Press andhold the “ ” or “ ” of “SEEK/TRACK” but-ton to fast forward or reverse. When yourelease the button, the player will startplaying from that position.
SWITCHING TO CD MODE
INFORMATION
● If no disc is in the slot, “CD” cannot beselected. Insert a disc into the slot.
PLAYING AN AUDIO CD
INFORMATION
● The progress bar indicator does notalways correspond to the actual elapsedplayback position.
36
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
Display_audio_U_1st
“SEEK/TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or“ ” of “SEEK/TRACK” button to select adesired track.“TUNE/SCROLL” knob: Turn this knob toselect a desired track. Also, the knob canbe used for selection from the list display.Track list: A desired track can be selectedfrom a list.
Touch “Tracks” on the screen. The listwill be displayed.
Touch a desired track. The player will startplaying the selected track from the begin-ning.
Touch or to scroll the list.
If appears to the right of titles, thecomplete titles are too long for the display.Touch this screen button to scroll to titles.
(Repeat mode): Use it to automat-ically repeat the track you are currently lis-tening to.
The repeat mode changes as follows eachtime the screen button is touched.
(Random mode): Use it for auto-matic random selection of the track.
The random mode changes as followseach time the screen button is touched.
SELECTING A DESIRED TRACK
Select a desired track using one of thefollowing methods.
PLAYING REPEAT AND RANDOM ORDER
: Repeating the track
: OFF
:Playing the tracks in ran-dom order
:OFF
37
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
2
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display_audio_U_1st
The title of the file and folder currentlybeing played will be displayed.
: Touch to pause the file.
: Touch to resume playing the file.Fast forward and Reverse: Press andhold the “ ” or “ ” of “SEEK/TRACK” but-ton to fast forward or reverse. When yourelease the button, the player will startplaying from that position.
“SEEK/TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or“ ” of “SEEK/TRACK” button to select adesired file.“TUNE/SCROLL” knob: Turn this knob toselect a desired file. Also, the knob can beused for selection from the list display.File list: A desired file can be selectedfrom a list.
Touch “Files” on the screen. The list willbe displayed.
Touch a desired file. The player will startplaying the selected file from the begin-ning.
Touch or to scroll the list.
If appears to the right of titles, thecomplete titles are too long for the display.Touch this screen button to scroll to titles.
PLAYING A MP3/WMA DISC
INFORMATION
● The progress bar indicator does notalways correspond to the actual elapsedplayback position.
SELECTING A DESIRED FILE
Select a desired file using one of thefollowing methods.
38
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
Display_audio_U_1st
1 Touch “Folders” on the screen. Thefolder list will be displayed.
2 Touch a desired folder from the list.The file list for the folder will be dis-played.
When a desired file is touched, the playerwill start playing the file.
Touch or to scroll the list.
If appears to the right of titles, thecomplete titles are too long for the display.Touch this screen button to scroll to titles.
(Repeat mode): Use it to automat-ically repeat the file or folder you are cur-rently listening to.
The repeat mode changes as follows eachtime the screen button is touched.
(Random mode): Use it for auto-matic random selection of the file.
The random mode changes as followseach time the screen button is touched.
SELECTING A DESIRED FOLDER
PLAYING REPEAT AND RANDOM ORDER
:Repeating the file
:Repeating the folder
:OFF
:Playing the files on the fold-er in random order
:Playing the files in all thefolders in random order
:OFF
39
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
2
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display_audio_U_1st
7. iPod OPERATION
1 Open the cover of the USB/AUX portand connect an iPod.
The USB/AUX port is located on theinstrument panel, or in the console box orglove box etc. The actual design and but-ton position will differ depending on thevehicle. For details, refer to vehicle“Owner’s Manual”.Turn on the power of the iPod if it is notturned on.
1 Press the “AUDIO” button.
The audio system turns on in the lastmode used.
Connecting an iPod with the USB portenables users to enjoy music via thevehicle speakers.
CAUTION
● Do not connect an iPod or operate thedevice controls while driving.
NOTICE
● Do not leave the iPod in the car. In par-ticular, high temperatures inside thevehicle may damage the iPod.
● Do not push down on or apply unneces-sary pressure to the iPod while it is con-nected as this may damage the iPod orits terminal.
● Do not insert foreign objects into theUSB port as this may damage the iPodor its terminal.
INFORMATION
● This system has a charging function foriPods.
● When the battery level of an iPod is verylow, the iPod may not operate. If so,charge the iPod before use.
● Depending on the iPod that is connectedto the system, certain functions may notbe available. If a function is unavailabledue to a malfunction, disconnecting theiPod and reconnecting it may resolvethe problem.
CONNECTING AN iPod
SWITCHING TO iPod MODE
40
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
Display_audio_U_1st
2 Touch “Source” or press “AUDIO”button to display the audio source se-lection screen.
3 Touch “iPod” on the screen.
If a desired source is not displayed on thescreen, touch or to scroll toit.
The title of the album and song will be dis-played you are currently listening to.
: Touch to pause the song.
: Touch to resume playing the song.
Fast forward and Reverse: Press andhold the “ ” or “ ” of “SEEK/TRACK” but-ton to fast forward or reverse. When yourelease the button, the player will startplaying from that position.
INFORMATION
● If no iPod is connected, the “iPod” can-not be selected. Connect the iPod to theUSB port.
PLAYING AN iPod
INFORMATION
● The progress bar indicator does notalways correspond to the actual elapsedplayback position.
iPod COVER ART
Depending on the iPod and songs inthe iPod, iPod cover art may be dis-played.
This function can be changed to “On” or“Off”. See “GENERAL SETTINGS” onpage 93.
INFORMATION
● It may take time to display iPod coverart, and the iPod may not be operatedwhile the cover art display is in process.
● Only the iPod cover art that is saved in aJPEG format can be displayed.
41
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
2
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display_audio_U_1st
“SEEK/TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or“ ” of “SEEK/TRACK” button to select adesired song.“TUNE/SCROLL” knob: Turn this controlknob to select a desired song. Also, theknob can be used for selection from the listdisplay.Song list: A desired song can be selectedfrom a list.
Touch “Songs” on the screen. The list willbe displayed.
Touch a desired song. The player will startplaying the selected song from the begin-ning.
Touch or to scroll the list.
If appears to the right of titles, thecomplete titles are too long for the display.Touch this screen button to scroll to titles.
1 Touch “Browse” on the screen.
2 Touch a desired play mode tab button,such as playlists, artists, albums,songs, podcasts or audio book. Andthen select the song on each playmode.
To scroll the tabs, touch or .
Touch or to scroll the list.
If appears to the right of titles, thecomplete titles are too long for the display.Touch this screen button to scroll to titles.
SELECTING A DESIRED SONG
Select a desired song using one of thefollowing methods.
SELECTING A PLAY MODE
42
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
Display_audio_U_1st
(Repeat mode): Use it to automat-ically repeat the song you are currently lis-tening to.
The repeat mode changes as follows eachtime the screen button is touched.
(Shuffle mode): Use it for auto-matic shuffling of the songs or albums inan iPod.
The shuffle mode changes as followseach time the screen button is touched.
PLAYING REPEAT AND SHUFFLE
INFORMATION
● When a large number of songs arestored in an iPod, shuffle selection maytake time.
:Repeating the song
:OFF
:Playing the songs in shuffle
:Playing the albums in theiPod in shuffle
:OFF
43
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
2
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display_audio_U_1st
8. USB MEMORY OPERATION
1 Open the cover of the USB/AUX portand connect a USB memory.
The USB/AUX port is located on theinstrument panel, or in the console box orglove box etc. The actual design and but-ton position will differ depending on thevehicle. For details, refer to vehicle“Owner’s Manual”.Turn on the power of the USB memory if itis not turned on.
1 Press the “AUDIO” button.
The audio system turns on in the lastmode used.
Connecting a USB memory with theUSB port enables users to enjoy musicvia the vehicle speakers.
CAUTION
● Do not connect a USB memory or oper-ate the device controls while driving.
NOTICE
● Do not leave the USB memory in thecar. In particular, high temperaturesinside the vehicle may damage the USBmemory.
● Do not push down on or apply unneces-sary pressure to the USB memory whileit is connected as this may damage theUSB memory or its terminal.
● Do not insert foreign objects into theUSB port as this may damage the USBmemory or its terminal.
INFORMATION
● When USB memory is connected andthe audio source is changed to USBmode, the USB memory resumes play-back from the position that was lastplayed. However, if files have beenmoved or deleted from the USB mem-ory, the resume play will not operate.
CONNECTING A USB MEMORY
SWITCHING TO USB MODE
44
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
Display_audio_U_1st
2 Touch “Source” or press “AUDIO”button to display the audio source se-lection screen.
3 Touch “USB” on the screen.
If a desired source is not displayed on thescreen, touch or to scroll toit.
The title of the file and folder currentlybeing played will be displayed.
: Touch to pause the file.
: Touch to resume playing the file.
Fast forward and Reverse: Press andhold the “ ” or “ ” of “SEEK/TRACK” but-ton to fast forward or reverse. When yourelease the button, the player will startplaying from that position.
“SEEK/TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or“ ” of “SEEK/TRACK” button to select adesired file.“TUNE/SCROLL” knob: Turn this controlknob to select a desired file. Also, the knobcan be used for selection from the list dis-play.
INFORMATION
● If no USB memory is connected, the“USB” cannot be selected. Connect theUSB memory to the USB port.
PLAYING A USB MEMORY
INFORMATION
● The progress bar indicator does notalways correspond to the actual elapsedplayback position.
SELECTING A DESIRED FILE
Select a desired file using one of thefollowing methods.
45
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
2
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display_audio_U_1st
File list: A desired file can be selectedfrom a list.
Touch “Files” on the screen. The list willbe displayed.
Touch a desired file. The player will startplaying the selected file from the begin-ning.
Touch or to scroll the list.
If appears to the right of titles, thecomplete titles are too long for the display.Touch this screen button to scroll to titles.
1 Touch “Folders” on the screen. Thefolder list will be displayed.
2 Touch a desired folder from the list.The file list for the folder will be dis-played.
When a desired file is touched, the playerwill start playing the file.
Touch or to scroll the list.
If appears to the right of titles, thecomplete titles are too long for the display.Touch this screen button to scroll to titles.
(Repeat mode): Use it to automat-ically repeat the file or folder you are cur-rently listening to.
The repeat mode changes as follows eachtime the screen button is touched.
SELECTING A DESIRED FOLDER
PLAYING REPEAT AND RANDOM ORDER
:Repeating the file
:Repeating the folder
:OFF
46
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
Display_audio_U_1st
(Random mode): Use it for auto-matic random selection of the file.
The random mode changes as followseach time the screen button is touched.
:Playing the files on the fold-er in random order
:Playing the files in all thefolders in random order
:OFF
47
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
2
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display_audio_U_1st
9. AUX DEVICE OPERATION
1 Open the cover of the USB/AUX portand connect a portable audio device.
The USB/AUX port is located on theinstrument panel, or in the console box orglove box etc. The actual design and but-ton position will differ depending on thevehicle. For details, refer to vehicle“Owner’s Manual”.
Connecting a portable audio devicewith the AUX port enables users to en-joy music via the vehicle speakers.
CAUTION
● Do not connect a portable audio deviceor operate the device controls while driv-ing.
NOTICE
● Do not leave the portable audio devicein the car. In particular, high tempera-tures inside the vehicle may damage thedevice.
● Do not push down on or apply unneces-sary pressure to the portable audiodevice while it is connected as this maydamage the device or its terminal.
● Do not insert foreign objects into theAUX port as this may damage the porta-ble audio device or its terminal.
CONNECTING A PORTABLE AUDIO DEVICE
48
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
Display_audio_U_1st
1 Press the “AUDIO” button.
The audio system turns on in the lastmode used.
2 Touch “Source” or press “AUDIO”button to display the audio source se-lection screen.
3 Touch “AUX” on the screen.
If a desired source is not displayed on thescreen, touch or to scroll toit.
Only the volume can be adjusted usingthe audio system controls. The remainingcontrols need to be operated on the porta-ble audio device itself.
SWITCHING TO AUX MODE
INFORMATION
● If no portable audio device is connected,“AUX” cannot be selected. Connect theportable audio device to the AUX port.
PLAYING A PORTABLE AUDIO DEVICE
49
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
2
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display_audio_U_1st
10. Bluetooth® AUDIO OPERATION
The Bluetooth® audio system enablesusers to enjoy music played on a por-table player from the vehicle speakervia wireless communication.This audio system supportsBluetooth®, a wireless data systemcapable of playing portable audiomusic without cables. If your portableplayer does not support Bluetooth®,the Bluetooth® audio system will notfunction.
CAUTION
● Do not operate the player’s controls orconnect to the Bluetooth® audio systemwhile driving.
● Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth®
antennas. People with implanted pace-makers or cardiac defibrillators shouldmaintain a reasonable distance betweenthemselves and the Bluetooth® anten-nas. The radio waves may affect theoperation of such devices.
● Before using Bluetooth® devices, usersof any electrical medical device otherthan implanted pacemakers andimplanted cardiac defibrillators shouldconsult the manufacturer of the devicefor information about its operation underthe influence of radio waves. Radiowaves could have unexpected effects onthe operation of such medical devices.
NOTICE
● Do not leave your portable audio playerin the car. In particular, high tempera-tures inside the vehicle may damage theportable audio player.
INFORMATION
● In the following conditions, the systemmay not function.• The portable audio player is turned
off.• The portable audio player is not con-
nected.• The portable audio player has a low
battery.● Depending on the portable audio player
that is connected to the system, certainfunctions may not be available.
● It may take time, the phone connectionis carried out during Bluetooth® audioplay.
50
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
Display_audio_U_1st
Bluetooth is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG, Inc.
1 Press the “AUDIO” button.
The audio system turns on in the lastmode used.
INFORMATION
● Portable audio players must correspondto the following specifications in order tobe connected to the Bluetooth® audiosystem. However, please note that somefunctions may be limited depending onthe type of portable audio player.• Bluetooth® Specification
Ver.1.1 or higher(Recommended: Ver.2.1+EDR orhigher)
• ProfileA2DP (Advanced Audio DistributionProfile)Ver.1.0 or higher(Recommended: Ver.1.2 or higher)This is a profile to transmit stereoaudio or high quality sounds to theheadphone.AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Con-trol Profile)Ver.1.0 or higher(Recommended: Ver.1.4 or higher)This is a profile to remote control theA/V equipments.
● Refer to http://www.toyota.com/Bluetooth/ to find approved Bluetooth®
devices for this system.
CAUTION
● FCC WARNING: Changes or modifica-tions not expressly approved by theparty responsible for compliance couldvoid the user’s authority to operate theequipment.
● CAUTION: Radio Frequency RadiationExposureThis equipment complies with FCC radi-ation exposure limits set forth for uncon-trolled equipment and meets the FCCradio frequency (RF) Exposure Guide-lines in Supplement C to OET65 andRSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF)Exposure rules. This equipment hasvery low levels of RF energy that itdeemed to comply without maximumpermissive exposure evaluation (MPE).But it is desirable that it should beinstalled and operated with at least 20cm and more between the radiator andperson’s body (excluding extremities:hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
● Co-location: This transmitter must not beco-located or operated in conjunctionwith any other antenna or transmitter.
SWITCHING TO Bluetooth® AUDIO MODE
51
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
2
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display_audio_U_1st
2 Touch “Source” or press “AUDIO”button to display the audio source se-lection screen.
3 Touch “BT” on the screen.
If a desired source is not displayed on thescreen, touch or to scroll toit.
1 Touch “Connect” on the screen.
2 Touch “Yes” to connect your portableplayer.
3 When this screen is displayed, performa device discovery from your portableaudio player.
4 Input the passcode displayed on thescreen into your portable audio player.
A passcode is not required for SSP(Secure Simple Pairing) compatibleBluetooth® phones. Depending on thetype of Bluetooth® phone beingconnected, a message confirmingregistration may be displayed on theBluetooth® phone’s screen. Respond andoperate the Bluetooth® phone accordingto the confirmation message.If you want to cancel it, touch “Cancel”.
CONNECTING A Bluetooth® AUDIO PLAYER
To use the Bluetooth® audio system,you need to register your portable au-dio player into the system. Once youhave registered it, you can enjoy yourmusic on the vehicle’s audio system.
WHEN A Bluetooth® DEVICE IS NOT REGISTERED
If you have not yet registered anyBluetooth® device, you must firstregister it according to the followingprocedure.
52
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
Display_audio_U_1st
5 When the connection is completed,this screen is displayed.
Once you have registered it, the systemautomatically connects to your portableaudio player device every time you startyour vehicle.
1 Touch “Connect” on the screen.
2 Touch the portable audio device nameto connect.
If you want to add a new device, touch“Add New”. You can register up to 5devices.
“Bluetooth* Power”: When “Bluetooth*Power” is “On”, the Bluetooth® device isautomatically connected every time youstart your vehicle.
However, depending on the type of porta-ble audio players or the selected connec-tion method, the device may not beautomatically connected.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG, Inc.
The portable audio player information isregistered when the Bluetooth® audiosystem is connected. When you releasepossession of your vehicle, remove yourportable audio player. (See “REMOV-ING A Bluetooth® DEVICE” on page99.)
INFORMATION
● For details on device discovery for yourportable audio player, refer to the porta-ble audio player’s user’s guide.
WHEN A Bluetooth® DEVICE IS REGISTERED
If you have registered someBluetooth® devices, you can changethe device connected and add a newdevice.
Bluetooth® AUDIO SETTINGS
You can change the Bluetooth® set-tings. See “Bluetooth® SETTINGS” onpage 98.
This function can be changed to “On” or“Off”. See “DETAILED Bluetooth® SET-TINGS” on page 102.
53
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
2
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display_audio_U_1st
“Connection Method” “From Vehicle”:Connect the audio system to the portableaudio player.
However, depending on the type of porta-ble audio player, the device may not beautomatically connected.
“Connection Method” “From AudioPlayer”: Connect the portable audio play-er to the audio system.
The title of the track and album currentlybeing played will be displayed.
Some titles and controls may not bedisplayed depending on the type ofBluetooth® portable audio player.
: Touch to pause the track.
: Touch to resume playing track.Fast forward and Reverse: Press andhold the “ ” or “ ” of “SEEK/TRACK” but-ton to fast forward or reverse. When yourelease the button, the player will startplaying from that position.
This function can be changed to “FromVehicle” or “From Audio Player”. See“DISPLAYING DEVICE DETAILS” onpage 100.
PLAYING A Bluetooth® AUDIO PLAYER
INFORMATION
● The progress bar indicator does notalways correspond to the actual elapsedplayback position.
● Depending on the portable audio playerthat is connected to the system, certainfunctions may not be available.
54
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
Display_audio_U_1st
Indicates the condition of the Bluetooth®
connection.
Indicates the amount of battery chargeleft.
“SEEK/TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or“ ” of “SEEK/TRACK” button to select adesired track.“TUNE/SCROLL” knob: Turn this knob toselect a desired track. Also, the knob canbe used for selection from the list display.
STATUS DISPLAY
INFORMATION
● An antenna for the Bluetooth® connec-tion is built into in the display. The condi-tion of the Bluetooth® connection maynot be good and the system may notfunction when you use the portableaudio player in the following conditions.• Your portable audio player is hidden
from display (behind the seat or in theglove box and console box).
• Your portable audio player touches oris covered with metal materials.
No connection Good
INFORMATION
● Depending on the type of portable audioplayers, remaining battery charge is notdisplayed.
● The amount left does not always corre-spond to that of the portable audio play-ers.
● This system does not have a chargingfunction.
SELECTING A DESIRED TRACK
Select a desired track using one of thefollowing methods.
Empty Full
55
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
2
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display_audio_U_1st
Track list: A desired track can be selectedfrom a list.
Touch “Tracks” on the screen. The listwill be displayed.
Touch a desired track. The player will startplaying the selected track from the begin-ning.
Touch or to scroll the list.
If appears to the right of titles, thecomplete titles are too long for the display.Touch this screen button to scroll to titles.
1 Touch “Browse” on the screen. Thealbum list will be displayed.
2 Touch a desired album from the list.The track list for the album will be dis-played.
When a desired track is touched, theplayer will start playing the track.
Touch or to scroll the list.
If appears to the right of titles, thecomplete titles are too long for the display.Touch this screen button to scroll to titles.
(Repeat mode): Use it to automat-ically repeat the track or album you arecurrently listening to.
The repeat mode changes as follows eachtime the screen button is touched.
SELECTING A DESIRED ALBUM
PLAYING REPEAT AND RANDOM ORDER
:Repeating the track
:Repeating the album
:OFF
56
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
Display_audio_U_1st
(Random mode): Use it for auto-matic random selection of the track.
The random mode changes as followseach time the screen button is touched.
:Playing the tracks on thealbum in random order
:Playing the tracks on all thealbums in random order
:OFF
57
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
2
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display_audio_U_1st
11. STEERING SWITCHES
The actual design and button position willdiffer depending on the vehicle. Fordetails, refer to vehicle “Owner’s Manual”.Details of the specific switches, controls,and features are described below.
Volume control switchPress the “+” side to increase the volume.The volume continues to increase whilethe switch is being pressed.Press the “-” side to decrease the vol-ume. The volume continues to decreasewhile the switch is being pressed.
“ ” “ ” switch
RadioTo select a preset station: Press the “ ”or “ ” switch.To seek a radio station: Press and holdthe “ ” or “ ” switch until you hear a beep.If you press either the “ ” or “ ” switch inseek mode, the seek mode will be can-celled.
CD playerTo select a desired track or file: Pressthe “ ” or “ ” switch.To select a desired folder (MP3/WMA):Press and hold the “ ” or “ ” switch untilyou hear a beep.
iPodTo select a desired song: Press the “ ”or “ ” switch.
USB memoryTo select a desired file: Press the “ ” or“ ” switch.To select a desired folder: Press andhold the “ ” or “ ” switch until you hear abeep.
Bluetooth® audio playerTo select a desired track: Press the “ ”or “ ” switch.To select a desired album: Press andhold the “ ” or “ ” switch until you hear abeep.
“MODE” switchPress the “MODE” switch to select anaudio mode. Each press changes themode sequentially if the desired mode isready to use.To turn the audio system on, press the“MODE” switch.Press and hold the “MODE” switch untilyou hear a beep and the music will pauseor be muted. By the same operation, it isreleased.
Some parts of the audio system can beadjusted with the switches on thesteering wheel.
STEERING SWITCHES (WITH TWO DIRECTION STEERING SWITCH)
No. Switch
Volume control switch
“ ” “ ” switch
“MODE” switch
58
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
Display_audio_U_1st
The actual design and button position willdiffer depending on the vehicle. Fordetails, refer to vehicle “Owner’s Manual”.Details of the specific switches, controls,and features are described below.
Volume control switchPress the “+” side to increase the volume.The volume continues to increase whilethe switch is being pressed.Press the “-” side to decrease the vol-ume. The volume continues to decreasewhile the switch is being pressed.
“ ” switch
RadioTo select a preset station: Press the “ ”or “ ” side of the switch. Repeat this to se-lect the next preset station.
To seek a station: Press and hold the “ ”or “ ” side of the switch until a beep isheard. Repeat this to find the next station.If either side of the switch is pressed dur-ing seek mode, seeking will be canceled.To change the preset page: The radio’spreset page can be changed by pressingthe “ ” or “ ” side of the switch.
CD playerTo select a desired track or file: Pressthe “ ” or “ ” side of the switch until thedesired track or file to play is selected. Toreturn to the beginning of the current trackor file, press the “ ” side of the switch oncequickly.To select a desired folder (MP3/WMA):Press the “ ” or “ ” switch to change tothe next or the previous folder.
Bluetooth® audio playerTo select a desired track: Press the “ ”or “ ” side of the switch until the desiredtrack is selected. To return to the begin-ning of the current track, press the “ ” sideof the switch once quickly.To select a desired album: Press the “ ”or “ ” switch to change to the next or theprevious album.
USB memory/iPodTo select a desired file or song: Pressthe “ ” or “ ” switch until the desired file orsong is selected. To return to the begin-ning of the current file or song, press the“ ” switch once quickly.To select a desired play mode tab (iP-od): Press “ ” or “ ” to select the desiredplay mode tab. If there are no tabs on thescreen, this function is not available.To select a desired folder (USB memo-ry): Press the “ ” or “ ” switch to changeto the next or the previous folder.
STEERING SWITCHES (WITH FOUR DIRECTION STEERING SWITCH)
No. Switch
Volume control switch
“ ” switch
“MODE/HOLD” switch
Back switch
Enter switch
59
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
2
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display_audio_U_1st
“MODE/HOLD” switchPress the “MODE/HOLD” switch to selectan audio mode. Each press changes themode sequentially if the desired mode isready to use.To turn the audio system on, press the“MODE/HOLD” switch.Press and hold the “MODE/HOLD” switchuntil you hear a beep and the music willpause or be muted. By the same opera-tion, it is released.
Back switchPress the back switch to return to the pre-vious screen.
Enter switchWhen in radio mode, pressing the enterswitch returns to the preset screen.When in media mode, pressing the enterswitch returns to the list screen.
60
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
Display_audio_U_1st
12. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATING HINTS
Fading and drifting stations: Generally,the effective range of FM is about 25 miles(40 km). Once outside this range, you maynotice fading and drifting, which increasewith the distance from the radio transmit-ter. They are often accompanied by distor-tion.Multi-path: FM signals are reflective, mak-ing it possible for two signals to reach yourantenna at the same time. If this happens,the signals will cancel each other out,causing a momentary flutter or loss of re-ception.Static and fluttering: These occur whensignals are blocked by buildings, trees, orother large objects. Increasing the basslevel may reduce static and fluttering.Station swapping: If the FM signal youare listening to is interrupted or weakened,and there is another strong station nearbyon the FM band, your radio may tune in thesecond station until the original signal canbe picked up again.
Fading: AM broadcasts are reflected bythe upper atmosphere especially atnight. These reflected signals can interferewith those received directly from the radiostation, causing the radio station to soundalternately strong and weak.Station interference: When a reflectedsignal and a signal received directly from aradio station are very nearly the same fre-quency, they can interfere with each other,making it difficult to hear the broadcast.Static: AM is easily affected by externalsources of electrical noise, such as hightension power lines, lightening, or electri-cal motors. This results in static.
NOTICE
● To avoid damaging the audio system:• Be careful not to spill beverages over
the audio system.• Do not put anything other than on
appropriate discs into the CD playerslot.
INFORMATION
● The use of a cellular phone inside ornear the vehicle may cause a noise fromthe speakers of the audio system whichyou are listening to. However, this doesnot indicate a malfunction.
RADIO RECEPTION
Usually, a problem with radio receptiondoes not mean there is a problem withyour radio it is just the normal resultof conditions outside the vehicle.For example, nearby buildings and ter-rain can interfere with FM reception.Power lines or telephone wires can in-terfere with AM signals. And of course,radio signals have a limited range, andthe farther you are from a station, theweaker its signal will be. In addition, re-ception conditions change constantlyas your vehicle moves.Here are some common receptionproblems that probably do not indicatea problem with your radio.
FM
AM
61
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
2
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display_audio_U_1st
Cargo loaded on the roof luggage carrier,especially metal objects, may adverselyaffect the reception of XM® SatelliteRadio.Alternation or modifications carried outwithout appropriate authorization mayinvalidate the user’s right to operate theequipment.
“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone”mean that an electronic accessory hasbeen designed to connect specifically toiPod, or iPhone, respectively, and hasbeen certified by the developer to meetApple performance standards.Apple is not responsible for the operationof this device or its compliance with safetyand regulatory standards. Please notethat the use of this accessory with iPod oriPhone may affect wireless performance.iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano andiPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc.,registered in the U.S. and other countries.
The following iPod, iPod nano, iPodclassic, iPod touch and iPhone devic-es can be used with this system.Made for
• iPod touch (4th generation)• iPod touch (3rd generation)• iPod touch (2nd generation)• iPod touch (1st generation)• iPod classic• iPod with video• iPod nano (6th generation)• iPod nano (5th generation)• iPod nano (4th generation)• iPod nano (3rd generation)• iPod nano (2nd generation)• iPod nano (1st generation)• iPhone 4• iPhone 3GS• iPhone 3G• iPhone
Depending on differences between mod-els or software versions etc., some modelsmight be incompatible with this system.
XM®
iPod
COMPATIBLE MODELS
62
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
Display_audio_U_1st
USB memory that can be used for MP3and WMA playback.• USB communication formats: USB 2.0
FS (12 Mbps)• File formats: FAT 16/32 (Windows®)• Correspondence class: Mass storage
class
Your CD player is intended for use with4.7 in. (12 cm) discs only. To play 3 in. (8cm) discs, use an adaptor.Extremely high temperatures can keepyour CD player from working. On hotdays, use air conditioning to cool the vehi-cle interior before you listen to a disc.Bumpy roads or other vibrations maymake your CD player skip.If moisture gets into your CD player, youmay not hear any sound even though yourCD player appears to be working. Removethe discs from the CD player and wait untilit dries.
Use only discs marked as shown above.The following products may not be play-able on your CD player.• SACDs• dts CDs• Copy-protected CDs• Video CDsSpecial shaped discs
Transparent/translucent discs
USB MEMORY
CARING FOR YOUR CD PLAYER AND DISCS
Audio CDs
63
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
2
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display_audio_U_1st
Low quality discs
Labeled discsHandle discs carefully, especially whenyou are inserting them. Hold them on theedge and do not bend them. Avoid gettingfingerprints on them, particularly on theshiny side.Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes, orother disc damage could cause the CDplayer to skip or to repeat a section of atrack. (To see a pin hole, hold the disc upto the light.)Remove discs from the CD player whenyou are not using them. Store them in theirplastic cases away from moisture, heat,and direct sunlight.
To clean a disc: Wipe it with a soft, lint-free cloth that has been dampened withwater. Wipe in a straight line from the cen-tre to the edge of the disc (not in a circle).Do not use a conventional record cleaneror anti-static device.
NOTICE
● Do not use special shaped, transparent/translucent, low quality or labeled discssuch as those shown in the illustrations.The use of such discs may damage theplayer, or it may be impossible to ejectthe disc.
● This system is not designed for use ofDual Disc. Do not use Dual Discbecause it may cause damage to theplayer.
Correct Wrong
64
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
Display_audio_U_1st
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3) and WMA(Windows Media Audio) are audio com-pression standards.The MP3/WMA player can play MP3 andWMA files on CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW discs.The unit can play disc recordings compati-ble with ISO 9660 level 1,2 (Romeo Joliet)and UDF (2.01 or lower) file system.When naming an MP3 or WMA file, addthe appropriate file extension (.mp3 or.wma).The MP3/WMA player plays back fileswith .mp3 or .wma file extensions as MP3or WMA files. To prevent noise and play-back errors, use the appropriate file exten-sions.The player can play only the first sessionusing multi-session compatible CDs.MP3 files are compatible with the ID3 TagVer. 1.0, Ver. 1.1, Ver. 2.2, and Ver. 2.3formats. The unit cannot display disc title,track title and artist name in other formats.USB memory: MP3 files are compatiblewith the ID3 Tag Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1, Ver.2.2, Ver. 2.3 and Ver. 2.4 formats. The unitcannot display track title and artist namein other formats.WMA files can contain a WMA tag that isused in the same way as an ID3 tag. WMAtags carry information such as track title,artist name.The sound quality of MP3/WMA files gen-erally improves with higher bit rates. Inorder to achieve a reasonable level ofsound quality, files recorded with a bit rateof at least 128 kbps are recommended.
MP3 files:MPEG 1 AUDIO LAYER 3 32, 44.1, 48kHzMPEG2 AUDIO LAYER3 16, 22.05, 24kHzWMA files for WMA player:Ver. 7, 8, 9 CBR 32, 44.1, 48 kHzWMA files for USB memory:Ver. 7, 8, 9 HIGH PROFILE 32, 44.1, 48kHz
MP3 files for MP3 player:MPEG1 LAYER3 32 to 320 kbpsMPEG2 LSF LAYER3 8 to 160 kbpsMP3 files for USB memory:MPEG 1 AUDIO LAYER 2, 3 32 to 320kbpsMPEG 2 AUDIO LAYER 2, 3 8 to 160kbpsWMA files for WMA player:Ver. 7, 8 CBR 48 to 192 kbpsVer. 9 CBR 48 to 320 kbpsWMA files for USB memory:Ver. 7, 8, 9 CBR 48 to 320 kbps
M3u playlists are not compatible with theaudio player.MP3i (MP3 interactive) and MP3PRO for-mats are not compatible with the audioplayer.The player is compatible with VBR (Vari-able Bit Rate).When playing back files recorded as VBR(Variable Bit Rate) files, the play time willnot be correctly displayed if fast-forward orreverse operations are used.It is not possible to check folders that donot include MP3/WMA files.
MP3/WMA FILES SAMPLING FREQUENCY
PLAYABLE BIT RATES
65
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
2
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display_audio_U_1st
MP3/WMA files in folders up to 8 levelsdeep can be played. However, the start ofplayback may be delayed when usingdiscs containing numerous levels of fold-ers. For this reason, we recommend creat-ing discs with no more than two levels offolders.WMA files Ver. 9 depends on “WindowsMedia® Audio Standard”.
The play order of the compact disc withthe structure shown on the left is as fol-lows:
MP3/WMA player: It is possible to play upto 192 folders or 255 files on one disc.USB memory:Maximum number of folder in device:3000Maximum number of files in one folder:255Maximum number of files in device: 9999The order changes depending on the PCand MP3/WMA encoding software youuse.
CD-R/CD-RW discs that have not beensubject to the “finalizing process” (a pro-cess that allows discs to be played on aconventional CD player) cannot beplayed.It may not be possible to play CD-R/CD-RW discs recorded on a music CDrecorder or a personal computer becauseof disc characteristics, scratches or dirt onthe disc, or dirt, condensation, etc. on thelens of the unit.It may not be possible to play discsrecorded on a personal computer depend-ing on the application settings and theenvironment. Record with the correct for-mat. (For details, contact the appropriateapplication manufacturers of the applica-tions.)CD-R/CD-RW discs may be damaged bydirect exposure to sunlight, high tempera-tures or other storage conditions. The unitmay be unable to play some damageddiscs.If you insert a CD-RW disc into the MP3/WMA player, playback will begin moreslowly than with a conventional CD or CD-R disc.Recordings on CD-R/CD-RW cannot beplayed using the DDCD (Double DensityCD) system.
001.mp3 002.wma
Folder 1003.mp3Folder 2004.mp3005.wma
Folder 3006.mp3
001. mp3 002. wma. . . 006. mp3
CD-R AND CD-RW DISCS
66
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
Display_audio_U_1st
This is a general term that describes theprocess of writing data on-demand to CD-R, etc., in the same way that data is writ-ten to floppy or hard discs.
This is a method of embedding track-related information in an MP3 file. Thisembedded information can include thetrack title, the artist’s name, the albumtitle, the music genre, the year of produc-tion, comments and other data. The con-tents can be freely edited using softwarewith ID3 tag editing functions. Althoughthe tags are restricted to the number ofcharacters, the information can be viewedwhen the track is played back.
WMA files can contain a WMA tag that isused in the same way as an ID3 tag. WMAtags carry information such as track title,artist name.
This is the international standard for theformatting of CD-ROM folders and files.For the ISO 9660 format, there are twolevels of regulations.Level 1: The file name is in 8.3 format (8character file names, with a 3 characterfile extension. File names must be com-posed of one-byte capital letters and num-bers. The “_” symbol may also beincluded.)Level 2: The file name can have up to 31characters (including the separation mark“.” and file extension). Each folder mustcontain fewer than 8 hierarchies.
Playlists created using “WINAMP” soft-ware have a playlist file extension (.m3u).
MP3 is an audio compression standarddetermined by a working group (MPEG) ofthe ISO (International Standard Organiza-tion). MP3 compresses audio data toabout 1/10 the size of that on conventionaldiscs.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is an audiocompression format developed byMicrosoft®. It compresses files into a sizesmaller than that of MP3 files. The decod-ing formats for WMA files are Ver. 7, 8,and 9.
TERMS
PACKET WRITE
ID3 TAG
WMA TAG
ISO 9660 FORMAT
m3u
MP3
WMA
3
67
1
2
3
4
5
6
Display_audio_U_1st
1. QUICK REFERENCE .................... 68
2. HANDS-FREE SYSTEM................ 69USING THE PHONE SWITCH AND
MICROPHONE.................................... 70ABOUT THE PHONEBOOK IN
THIS SYSTEM .................................... 71WHEN YOU RELEASE
YOUR CAR ......................................... 71PHONE STATUS DISPLAY................... 72
3. REGISTER A Bluetooth® PHONE........................................ 74
SELECTING AND ADDING A Bluetooth® PHONE .......................... 75
4. CALL ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE........................................ 76
BY DIAL ................................................. 76BY PHONEBOOK .................................. 76BY SPEED DIAL .................................... 77BY CALL HISTORY ............................... 78BY VOICE RECOGNITION.................... 79
5. RECEIVE ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE........................................ 82
6. TALK ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE........................................ 83
INTERRUPT CALL ................................ 84
1 Bluetooth® HANDS-FREE SYSTEM OPERATION
Bluetooth® HANDS-FREE SYSTEM
68
Display_audio_U_1st
1. Bluetooth® HANDS-FREE SYSTEM OPERATION
1. QUICK REFERENCE
The actual design and button position will differ depending on the vehicle. Some but-tons will be in different positions or not shown. For details, refer to vehicle “Owner’sManual”.
This screen can be used to make a phone call. To display the “Phone” screen,press the switch on the steering wheel or the button.
No. Name Function Page
“PWR/VOL” knob Turn this knob to adjust the volume. 82, 83
“Connect Phone” You can connect a Bluetooth® device to the sys-tem. 75
Number keys Used for inputting a phone number. 76
“Contacts” Displays “Contacts” screen to make a call using thephonebook. 76
button Displays “Phone” screen. 74, 76
“Speed Dials” Displays “Speed Dial” screen to make a call usingthe speed dial. 77
“Call History” Displays “Call History” screen to make a call usingthe call history. 78
Used for making a phone call. 76, 82
69
1. Bluetooth® HANDS-FREE SYSTEM OPERATION
3
Bluetooth
® HA
ND
S-FREE SYSTEM
Display_audio_U_1st
2. HANDS-FREE SYSTEM
Bluetooth® hands-free system allowsyou to make or receive a call withouttaking your hands off the steeringwheel by connecting your cellularphone.
This system supports Bluetooth®.Bluetooth® is a wireless data systemby which you can call without yourcellular phone being connected with acable or placed on a cradle.The operating procedure of the systemis explained in this section.
For registering and setting of the phone,see “PHONE SETTINGS” on page 106.
CAUTION
● Use a cellular phone or connect theBluetooth® phone only when safe andlegal to do so.
● Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth®
antennas. People with implanted pace-makers or cardiac defibrillators shouldmaintain a reasonable distance betweenthemselves and the Bluetooth® anten-nas. The radio waves may affect theoperation of such devices.
● Before using Bluetooth® devices, usersof any electrical medical device otherthan implanted pacemakers andimplanted cardiac defibrillators shouldconsult the manufacturer of the devicefor information about its operation underthe influence of radio waves. Radiowaves could have unexpected effects onthe operation of such medical devices.
NOTICE
● Do not leave your cellular phone in thecar. The temperature inside may be highand damage the phone.
● If the Bluetooth® phone is too close tothe system, quality of the sound maydeteriorate and connecting conditionmay go down.
INFORMATION
● If your cellular phone does not supportBluetooth®, this system will not function.
● Depending on the cellular phone mod-els, some functions may be restricted.
● In the following conditions, the systemmay not function.• The cellular phone is turned off.• The current position is outside the
communication area.• The cellular phone is not connected.• The cellular phone has a low battery.• When outgoing is controlled, due to
heavy traffic on telephone lines, etc.• When the cellular phone itself cannot
be used• When transferring the phonebook
data from the cellular phone● Even if your cellular phone supports
both hands-free and audio Bluetooth®
connections, it may not be able to con-nect to the hands-free connection at thesame time.
● When using Bluetooth® audio andhands-free at the same time, the follow-ing problems may occur.• The Bluetooth® connection may be
cut.• Noise may be heard on the
Bluetooth® audio playback.● The Bluetooth® phone battery will be
depleted quickly when it is connected toBluetooth®.
70
1. Bluetooth® HANDS-FREE SYSTEM OPERATION
Display_audio_U_1st
Bluetooth is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG, Inc.
By pressing the phone switch, you canreceive a call or hang up without takingyour hands off the steering wheel.
By pressing the volume switch, you canadjust the volume.
You can use the microphone when talkingon the phone.
INFORMATION
● This system supports the following ser-vice.
● Bluetooth® SpecificationVer.1.1 or higher(Recommended: Ver.2.1+EDR orhigher)
● Profile• HFP (Hands Free Profile)
Ver.1.0 or higher(Recommended: Ver.1.5 or higher)This is a profile to allow hands-freephone call using the cellular phone orhead sets. It has an outgoing andincoming call function.
• OPP (Object Push Profile)Ver.1.1 or higherThis is a profile to exchange phone-book data. When the Bluetooth®
phone has PBAP and OPP, OPPcannot be used.
• PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile)Ver.1.0 or higherThis is a profile to transfer phone-book data.
● If your cellular phone does not supportHFP, you cannot register the Bluetooth®
phone, and take OPP or PBAP serviceindividually.
● Refer to http://www.toyota.com/Bluetooth/ to find approved Bluetooth®
devices for this system.
USING THE PHONE SWITCH AND MICROPHONE
The actual design and button positionwill differ depending on the vehicle. Fordetails, refer to vehicle “Owner’sManual”.
71
1. Bluetooth® HANDS-FREE SYSTEM OPERATION
3
Bluetooth
® HA
ND
S-FREE SYSTEM
Display_audio_U_1st
The following data is stored for every reg-istered phone. When another phone isconnecting, you cannot read the regis-tered data.• Phonebook data• Call history data• Speed dial data
You can initialize the following data in thesystem.• Phonebook data• Call history data• Speed dial data• Bluetooth® phone data• Volume setting• Details setting
INFORMATION
● The other party’s voice will be heardfrom the front speakers. The audio sys-tem will be muted during phone calls orwhen hands-free voice commands areused.
● Talk alternately with the other party onthe phone. If you talk at the same time,your voices may not reach each other. (Itis not a malfunction.)
● Keep the volume of receiving voicedown. Otherwise, an echo will be heardand receiving voice can be heard out-side of the vehicle. When you talk on thephone, speak clearly towards the micro-phone.
● In the following situations, your voicemay not reach the other party.• Driving on an unpaved road. (Due to
traffic noise.)• Driving at high speed.• A window is open.• Turning the air-conditioning vents
towards the microphone.• The sound of the air-conditioning fan
is loud.• There is an effect from the cellular
phone network.
ABOUT THE PHONEBOOK IN THIS SYSTEM
INFORMATION
● When you delete the phone, the above-mentioned data is also deleted.
WHEN YOU RELEASE YOUR CAR
A lot of personal data is registeredwhen you use the Hands-free system.When you release your car, initializeyour data. (See “DELETE PERSONALDATA” on page 94.)
INFORMATION
● If you initialize it, the former state willnever come back again. Pay attentionwhen initializing the data.
72
1. Bluetooth® HANDS-FREE SYSTEM OPERATION
Display_audio_U_1st
Indicates the condition of the Bluetooth®
connection.
Indicates the amount of battery chargeleft.
This is not displayed when the Bluetooth®
phone is not connected.Depending on the type of Bluetooth®
phone, remaining battery charge may notbe displayed.The amount left may not always corre-spond to that of the Bluetooth® phone.This system does not have a chargingfunction.
CAUTION
● FCC WARNING: Changes or modifica-tions not expressly approved by theparty responsible for compliance couldvoid the user’s authority to operate theequipment.
● CAUTION: Radio Frequency RadiationExposureThis equipment complies with FCC radi-ation exposure limits set forth for uncon-trolled equipment and meets the FCCradio frequency (RF) Exposure Guide-lines in Supplement C to OET65 andRSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF)Exposure rules. This equipment hasvery low levels of RF energy that itdeemed to comply without maximumpermissive exposure evaluation (MPE).But it is desirable that it should beinstalled and operated with at least 20cm and more between the radiator andperson’s body (excluding extremities:hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
● Co-location: This transmitter must not beco-located or operated in conjunctionwith any other antenna or transmitter.
PHONE STATUS DISPLAY
Noconnection Good
Empty Full
73
1. Bluetooth® HANDS-FREE SYSTEM OPERATION
3
Bluetooth
® HA
ND
S-FREE SYSTEM
Display_audio_U_1st
Indicates the receiving area.“Rm” is displayed when receiving inRoaming area.
The receiving area may not be displayeddepending on the phone you have.
Indicates the level of reception.
The level of reception does not alwayscorrespond with the one of your cellularphone.The level of reception may not be dis-played depending on the phone you have.When you are out of the service area or ina place inaccessible by radio waves, “NoService” is displayed.
INFORMATION
● An antenna for the Bluetooth® connec-tion is built into the display.
● The condition of the Bluetooth®
connection may not be good and thesystem may not function when you usethe Bluetooth® phone in the followingconditions.• Your Bluetooth® phone is hidden
from the display (behind the seat or inthe glove box or console box).
• Your Bluetooth® phone touches or iscovered with metal materials.
● Leave the Bluetooth® phone in the placewhere the Bluetooth® sensitivity is good.
Poor Excellent
74
1. Bluetooth® HANDS-FREE SYSTEM OPERATION
Display_audio_U_1st
3. REGISTER A Bluetooth® PHONE
1 Press the button or the switch on the steering wheel.
2 Touch “Yes” to register yourBluetooth® phone.
3 When this screen is displayed, performa device discovery from yourBluetooth® phone.
4 Input the passcode displayed on thescreen into the phone.
A passcode is not required for SSP(Secure Simple Pairing) compatibleBluetooth® phones. Depending on thetype of Bluetooth® phone beingconnected, a message confirmingregistration may be displayed on theBluetooth® phone’s screen. Respond andoperate the Bluetooth® phone accordingto the confirmation message.If you want to cancel it, touch “Cancel”.If the Bluetooth® phone to be registeredhas a Bluetooth® audio function, this canbe registered at the same time.
To use the Bluetooth® hands-freesystem, you need to register yourphone into the system. Once you haveregistered it, you can make hands-freecalls.If you have not yet registered anyBluetooth® phones, you must firstregister it according to the followingprocedure.
Please see “REGISTERED DEVICES”on page 98 of additional registrationwhen registering.
75
1. Bluetooth® HANDS-FREE SYSTEM OPERATION
3
Bluetooth
® HA
ND
S-FREE SYSTEM
Display_audio_U_1st
5 When the connection is completed,this screen is displayed.
Once you have registered it, the systemautomatically connects to your Bluetooth®
device every time you start your vehicle.(For automatic connection, see “CHANG-ING THE Bluetooth® POWER” on page103.)If the Bluetooth® is disconnected on pur-pose such as you turned your Bluetooth®
phone off, this does not happen. Recon-nect the Bluetooth® phone manually.
1 Touch “Connect Phone”.
2 Touch the Bluetooth® devices name toconnect.
The selection indicator is displayed on leftside of the selected device name.The Bluetooth® mark is displayed whenyou connected the device.
INFORMATION
● For details on device discovery for yourBluetooth® phone, refer to theBluetooth® phone’s user’s guide.
SELECTING AND ADDING A Bluetooth® PHONE
If you have registered someBluetooth® devices, you can changethe device connected and add a newdevice.
If you want to add a new device, touch“Add New”. You can register up to 5devices.
INFORMATION
● When you connect the phone whileBluetooth® audio is playing, theBluetooth® audio will stop temporarily. Itmay take time, the phone connection iscarried out during Bluetooth® audio play.The audio may be skipped.
76
1. Bluetooth® HANDS-FREE SYSTEM OPERATION
Display_audio_U_1st
4. CALL ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE
1 Press the switch on the steering
wheel or the button to displaythe “Phone” screen.
2 Enter a phone number by touchingnumber keys (0 - 9, ∗, #, +).
Each time you touch , an inputteddigit is deleted.For the first digit, you can enter “+” bytouching “∗” for a while.
3 Touch or press the switchon the steering wheel.
1 Press the switch on the steering
wheel or the button to displaythe “Phone” screen.
2 Touch “Contacts”.
3 Touch the desired data from the list.
4 Touch the desired number from the list.
5 Touch or press the switchon the steering wheel.
After you register the Bluetooth®
phone, you can call by usingBluetooth® hands-free system.
BY DIAL
You can call by inputting the phonenumber.
BY PHONEBOOK
You can make a call using thephonebook data which is transferredfrom your cellular phone.The system has one phonebook foreach phone. You can register up to1000 contacts in each phonebook.
77
1. Bluetooth® HANDS-FREE SYSTEM OPERATION
3
Bluetooth
® HA
ND
S-FREE SYSTEM
Display_audio_U_1st
1 Touch “Contacts”.
If your phone does not support eitherPBAP or OPP service, you cannot transfercontacts.PBAP compatible models
2 Touch “Yes” if you want to transfernew contacts from a cellular phone.
Touch “No” if you want to cancel transfer-ring the contacts.PBAP incompatible but OPP compatiblemodels
2 Touch “Transfer” if you want to trans-fer new contacts from a cellular phone.
You need to operate your phone to trans-fer new contacts.Touch “Cancel” if you want to canceltransferring the contacts.
1 Press the switch on the steering
wheel or the button to displaythe “Phone” screen.
2 Touch “Speed Dials”.
3 Touch the desired number to call.
You can change the page by touching“Speed Dial 2” or “Speed Dial 3” tab.
WHEN THE PHONEBOOK IS EMPTY
BY SPEED DIAL
You can call using registered phonenumbers which can be selected from aphonebook. (See “SPEED DIALSSETTING” on page 111 for registeringthe speed dial.)
78
1. Bluetooth® HANDS-FREE SYSTEM OPERATION
Display_audio_U_1st
1 Press the switch on the steering
wheel or the button to displaythe “Phone” screen.
2 Touch “Call History”.
3 Touch the desired data from the list.
When the list is switched, touch “All”,“Missed”, “Incoming” or “Outgoing”tab.
4 Touch or press the switchon the steering wheel.
1 Press the switch on the steeringwheel to display the “Phone” screen.
2 Press the switch on the steeringwheel to display the “Call History”screen.
3 Press the switch on the steeringwheel to select the latest history item.
4 Press the switch on the steering
wheel or touch to call the latesthistory item.
When you call using the phonebook, thename (if registered) is displayed.When you call the same number continu-ously, only the newest number is regis-tered.When a phone number registered in thephonebook is received, the name and thenumber are displayed.
BY CALL HISTORY
You can make a call using the callhistory which has 4 functions below.All: all the calls (missed, incoming or out-going)Missed: calls which you missedIncoming: calls which you receivedOutgoing: calls which you made
You can make a call using the latestcall history item.
INFORMATION
● Number-withheld calls are also memo-rized in the system.
● A international phone call may not bemade depending on the cellular phonewhich you have.
79
1. Bluetooth® HANDS-FREE SYSTEM OPERATION
3
Bluetooth
® HA
ND
S-FREE SYSTEM
Display_audio_U_1st
1 Press the talk switch.
The actual design and button position willdiffer depending on the vehicle. Fordetails, refer to vehicle “Owner’s Manual”.
2 After a beep sounds, say the commandof your choice.
Voice commands are marked with .
3 Say the command displayed on thescreen.
If a desired outcome is not shown, or if noselections are available, perform one ofthe following to return to the previousscreen:• Say “Go back”• Touch “Go Back”To cancel voice recognition, touch“Cancel”, or press and hold the talkswitch.
BY VOICE RECOGNITION (IF EQUIPPED)
Calls can be made by giving a voicecommand.This can be operated while driving.
INFORMATION
● Voice guidance for the voice recognitionsystem can be skipped by pressing thetalk switch.
● The voice recognition prompt can be setto on or off when “Voice Prompts(on/off)” is touched. This setting canalso be changed on the “GuidanceSettings” screen. (See page 95.)
● When “Voice Prompts (on/off)” istouched, voice recognition will be tem-porarily suspended. Press the talkswitch again.
● Voice guidance can be canceled by set-ting voice prompts to off. Use this settingwhen it is desirable to say a commandimmediately after pressing the talkswitch.
80
1. Bluetooth® HANDS-FREE SYSTEM OPERATION
Display_audio_U_1st
1 Press the talk switch.
2 Say the name, or the name and type ofphone, of a registered contact.
In the same manner as it is displayed onthe screen, “Call <name>” or “Call<name> at <type>,” after saying “Call”say the name, or the name and type ofphone, of a contact. For example: “Call”, “John Smith” or“Call”, “Mary Davis”, “at”, “Mobile”There are 4 types of phones: Home,Mobile, Work and Other.Short or abbreviated names in the phone-book may not be recognized. Changenames in the phonebook to full names.Sometimes a voice recognition result con-firmation screen will be displayed. Afterconfirming the result, say “Yes” or “No”.When the system recognizes multiplenames from the phonebook, a name can-didate list will be displayed on the screen.If the desired name is not displayed on thetop of the screen, say the number of thename from the candidate list (number 1 ornumber 2) to select a name from the can-didate list.When a contact has multiple phone num-bers registered in the phonebook, a candi-date list will be displayed. If the desiredphone number is not displayed on the topof the screen, say the number of thedesired phone number from the candidatelist (number 1 or number 2) to select aphone number from the candidate list.
3 Say “Dial” to call the phone number.
1 Press the talk switch.
2 Say the phone number.
In the same manner as it is displayed onthe screen, “Dial <number>”, after saying“Dial” say the phone number.Say the phone number one digit at a time.For example, if the phone number is2345678: Say “two three four five six seveneight” Do not say “twenty three forty five sixtyseven eight”The system can recognize the followingtypes of the phone numbers: 3 digit numbers (911, 411, 611) 7 digit numbers (Local phone numbers) 10 digit numbers (Area code + Localphone number) 11 digit phone numbers (1 + Area code +Local phone number)
VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE: CALL NAME
VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE: DIAL NUMBER
81
1. Bluetooth® HANDS-FREE SYSTEM OPERATION
3
Bluetooth
® HA
ND
S-FREE SYSTEM
Display_audio_U_1st
As the system cannot recognize additionalnumbers, say the complete number with-out stopping.When the system recognizes multiplephone numbers, a phone number candi-date list will be displayed on the screen. Ifthe desired phone number is not displayedon the top of the screen, say the numberof the desired phone number from thecandidate list (number 1 or number 2) toselect a phone number from the candidatelist.
3 Say “Dial” to call the phone number.
1 Press the talk switch.
2 Say “International call”.Up to 20 digits can be recognized whenusing the international call function. Thenumber can also be divided into multiplegroups and recognized.
INTERNATIONAL CALL
To dial a phone number that is not a 3,7, 10 or 11 digit number, for examplean international number, use“International Call”.
Calling without the voice recognition: After the desired phone number is dis-played, a call can also made by pressing
the switch on the steering wheel.Canceling the voice recognition: Thevoice recognition will be canceled wheneither of the following is preformed.
• Press and hold the talk switch.• Touch “Cancel”.
82
1. Bluetooth® HANDS-FREE SYSTEM OPERATION
Display_audio_U_1st
5. RECEIVE ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE
To answer the phone:
Press the switch on the steering
wheel or touch .To refuse to receive the call:
Press the switch on the steering
wheel or touch .To adjust the volume of received call:Touch “-” or “+”, turn the “PWR/VOL”knob, or use the volume switch on thesteering wheel.
When a call is received, this screen isdisplayed with a sound.
INFORMATION
● On the international phone call, theother party’s name may not be displayedcorrectly depending on the cellularphone which you have.
83
1. Bluetooth® HANDS-FREE SYSTEM OPERATION
3
Bluetooth
® HA
ND
S-FREE SYSTEM
Display_audio_U_1st
6. TALK ON THE Bluetooth® PHONE
To adjust the volume of the other par-ty’s voice: Touch “-” or “+”, turn the“PWR/VOL” knob, or use the volumeswitch on the steering wheel.
To hang up the phone: Press the switch on the steering wheel or touch
.To mute your voice: Touch “Mute”.To input a Key: Touch “0-9”.To transfer the call: Touch “HandsfreeMode” or “Handset Mode”.
1 Enter a number by touching the num-ber keys.
To hang up the phone: Press the switch on the steering wheel or touch
.
If the continuous tone signal is registeredin a phonebook, this screen appears. (Ifnot registered, “Send” and “Exit” are notdisplayed.)Confirm the number displayed on thescreen and touch “Send”. The numberbefore marked sign will be sent.When you touch “Exit”, this function willbe finished and normal tone screenappears.
To hang up the phone: Press the switch on the steering wheel or touch
.
While you are talking on the phone,this screen is displayed. You can dothe operation below on the screen.
INFORMATION
● When you change from cellular phonecall to Hands-free call, the Hands-freescreen will be displayed and you canoperate it on the screen.
WHEN YOU TOUCH “0-9”
84
1. Bluetooth® HANDS-FREE SYSTEM OPERATION
Display_audio_U_1st
To answer the phone:
Press the switch on the steering
wheel or touch .To refuse to receive the call:
Press the switch on the steering
wheel or touch .
Everytime you press the switch on
the steering wheel or touch whileinterrupt call, the other party will beswitched.
INFORMATION
● The continuous tone signal is themarked sign (p or w) and the number fol-lowing phone number. (ex.056133w0123p#1∗)
● You can do this operation when youwant to operate an answering machineor use a telephone service in bank forexample. You can register the phonenumber and the code number in thephonebook.
INTERRUPT CALL
When the call is interrupted by the thirdparty while talking, this screen isdisplayed.
INFORMATION
● Interrupt call operation may differdepending on your phone company andcellular phone.
● Interrupt call is unavailable dependingon the contract detail with the phonecompany.
4
85
1
2
3
4
5
6
Display_audio_U_1st
1. QUICK REFERENCE .................... 86
2. FUEL CONSUMPTION.................. 87FUEL CONSUMPTION
(VEHICLES WITH HYBRID SYSTEM) ............................................ 87
FUEL CONSUMPTION (VEHICLES WITH GASOLINE ENGINE) ............................................. 87
3. TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM...................................... 89
SHOWING THE TIRE PRESSURE SCREEN ............................................. 89
1 VEHICLE INFORMATION
VEHICLE INFORMATION
86
Display_audio_U_1st
1. VEHICLE INFORMATION
1. QUICK REFERENCE
The actual design and button position will differ depending on the vehicle. Some but-tons will be in different positions or not shown. For details, refer to vehicle “Owner’sManual”.The “Information” screen shown above is displayed if the vehicle is equipped withboth a fuel consumption and a tire pressure warning system.
*: If equipped
Fuel consumption information and tire pressure value can be displayed. To accessthe vehicle information system, press the “CAR” button.
No. Name Function Page
“Fuel Consumption”* Displays the “Trip Information”, “History” and“Energy Monitor” screen. 87
“Tire Pressure”* Displays the “Tire Pressure” screen. 89
“CAR” button* Press the “CAR” button to access the vehicle infor-mation system. Functions vary by vehicle. 87, 89
87
1. VEHICLE INFORMATION
4
VEHIC
LE INFO
RM
ATIO
N
Display_audio_U_1st
2. FUEL CONSUMPTION*
Energy monitorTrip consumptionHistory
1 Press the “CAR” button.
2 Touch “Fuel Consumption”.
The “Trip Information” or “History” screenwill be displayed.The “Information” screen is not displayedif the vehicles not equipped with a tirepressure warning system.
If the “Trip Information” screen is not dis-played, touch “Trip Information”.
“Clear”: Trip information data can be de-leted by touching this screen button.“History”: The “History” screen can bedisplayed by touching this screen button.
FUEL CONSUMPTION (VEHICLES WITH HYBRID SYSTEM)
Fuel consumption such as shown be-low can be displayed on the screen.For details, refer to vehicle “Owner’sManual”.
FUEL CONSUMPTION (VEHICLES WITH GASOLINE ENGINE)
*: If equipped
TRIP INFORMATION
No. Name
Average speed
Elapsed time
Cruising range
Previous fuel consumption perminute
Current fuel consumption perminute
INFORMATION
● The trip information display indicatesgeneral driving conditions. Accuracyvaries with driving habits and road con-ditions.
88
1. VEHICLE INFORMATION
Display_audio_U_1st
If the “History” screen is not displayed,touch “History”.
The average fuel consumption history isdivided by color into past averages andthe average fuel consumption since thelast reset.
“Clear”: Past record data can be deletedby touching this screen button.“Update”: Reset the average fuel con-sumption to measure the current fuel con-sumption again.
Vehicles with multi-information displayWhen you touch “Update”, the averagefuel consumption displayed in the multi-in-formation display will be reset at the sametime.“Trip Information”: “Trip Information”screen can be displayed by touching thisscreen button.
HISTORY
No. Name
Previous fuel economy record
Current fuel economy
Best recorded fuel economy
89
1. VEHICLE INFORMATION
4
VEHIC
LE INFO
RM
ATIO
N
Display_audio_U_1st
3. TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM*
To confirm tire pressure values,touch “Yes”. To cancel and returnto the previous screen, touch“No”. (This screen will not beshown if the tire pressure screenis already being displayed.)
1 Press the “CAR” button.
2 Touch “Tire Pressure”.
3 The tire pressure value of eachtire will be displayed.
Type A
Type B
Low tire pressure values will bedisplayed in orange.The display pattern variesdepending on the vehicle. Somevehicles do not show the sparetire pressure.
Vehicles equipped with a tire pres-sure warning system will display awarning screen in addition to awarning indication on the meter iftire pressure becomes low. For in-formation on the tire pressurewarning system, refer to vehicle“Owner’s Manual”.
SHOWING THE TIRE PRESSURE SCREEN
The tire pressure value of each tirecan be confirmed using the tirepressure screen.
*: If equipped
90
1. VEHICLE INFORMATION
Display_audio_U_1st
5
91
1
2
3
4
5
6
Display_audio_U_1st
1. QUICK REFERENCE .................... 92
2. GENERAL SETTINGS .................. 93SCREENS FOR GENERAL
SETTINGS .......................................... 93
3. GUIDANCE SETTINGS................. 95SCREEN FOR VOICE GUIDANCE
SETTINGS .......................................... 95
4. DISPLAY SETTINGS .................... 96TURN OFF DISPLAY............................. 96CHANGING BETWEEN DAY AND
NIGHT MODE ..................................... 97ADJUST
CONTRAST/BRIGHTNESS ................ 97
5. Bluetooth® SETTINGS ................. 98REGISTERED DEVICES....................... 98CONNECT PHONE ............................. 101CONNECT AUDIO PLAYER................ 101DETAILED Bluetooth® SETTINGS ...... 102
6. PHONE SETTINGS ..................... 106PHONE SOUND SETTINGS ............... 106PHONEBOOK...................................... 107
7. AUDIO SETTINGS ...................... 116
8. VEHICLE SETTINGS .................. 117
1 SETUP OPERATION
SETUP
92
Display_audio_U_1st
1. SETUP OPERATION
1. QUICK REFERENCE
The actual design and button position will differ depending on the vehicle. Some but-tons will be in different positions or not shown. For details, refer to vehicle “Owner’sManual”.
*1: Vehicles with Premium Display Audio system *2: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.*3: If equipped
To customize the function settings, press the “SETUP” button.
No. Name Function Page
“General” Settings are available for language selection, op-eration sounds, screen animation, etc. 93
“Guidance”*1 Touch to set the voice guidance settings. 95
“Display” Settings are available for contrast and brightnessof the screen. 96
“Bluetooth*2”Registering, removing, connecting and discon-necting Bluetooth® devices and settings areavailable for Bluetooth®.
98
“SETUP” button Press this button to display the “Setup” screen. 93, 95, 96, 98, 106, 116, 117
“Vehicle”*3 Settings are available for vehicle customization. 117
“Audio”*1 Settings are available for HD Radio™ system. 116
“Phone” Settings are available for phone sound, phone-book, etc. 106
93
1. SETUP OPERATION
5
SETUP
Display_audio_U_1st
2. GENERAL SETTINGS
1 Press the “SETUP” button.
2 Touch “General”.
3 Touch the items to be set.
4 Touch “Save”.
On this screen, the following functions areoperational.
Settings are available for language se-lection, operation sounds, screen ani-mation, etc.
SCREENS FOR GENERAL SETTINGS
No. Function
You can change the language.(See “SELECTING A LAN-GUAGE” on page 94.)
“On” or “Off” can be selected tosound beeps.
“On” or “Off” can be selected todisplay capture image/iPod cov-er art in the screen.
The animation effect for audiosource selection screen can beset to “On” or “Off”.
The personal data can be delet-ed. (See “DELETE PERSONALDATA” on page 94.)
94
1. SETUP OPERATION
Display_audio_U_1st
1 Press the “SETUP” button.
2 Touch “General” on the “Setup”screen.
3 Touch “Language”.
4 Touch the desired screen button.
The previous screen will be displayed.The selectable languages may differdepending on the model or region.
5 Touch “Save”.
1 Press the “SETUP” button.
2 Touch “General” on the “Setup”screen.
3 Touch “Delete Personal Data”.
4 Touch “Delete”.
SELECTING A LANGUAGE
The desired language can be selected.
DELETE PERSONAL DATA
INFORMATION
● The following personal data can bedeleted or returned to their default set-tings:• Phone book data• Call history data• Speed dial data• Bluetooth® devices data• Phone sound settings• Detailed Bluetooth® settings• Sound settings
95
1. SETUP OPERATION
5
SETUP
Display_audio_U_1st
3. GUIDANCE SETTINGS (WITH Premium Display Audio SYSTEM)
1 Press the “SETUP” button.
2 Touch “Guidance”.
3 Touch the items to be set.
4 Touch “OK”.
On this screen, the following functions canbe performed.
Voice recognition guidance forBluetooth® hands-free systems can beset.
SCREEN FOR VOICE GUIDANCE SETTINGS
No. Function
The voice guidance volume canbe adjusted.
Voice recognition guidance canbe set to “On” or “Off”.
96
1. SETUP OPERATION
Display_audio_U_1st
4. DISPLAY SETTINGS
1 Press the “SETUP” button.
2 Touch “Display”.
3 Touch the items to be set.
Please refer to the following pages foreach setting.
1 Press the “SETUP” button.
2 Touch “Display” on the “Setup”screen.
3 Touch “Screen Off”.
The display screen will be turned off. Toturn it on, press the “AUDIO”, “CAR” or“SETUP” button.The rear view monitor system may not beavailable on all models.
You can adjust the contrast and bright-ness of the screen. You can also turnthe display off.
TURN OFF DISPLAY
97
1. SETUP OPERATION
5
SETUP
Display_audio_U_1st
1 To display the screen in day modeeven with the headlight switch on,touch “Day Mode” on the adjustmentscreen.
1 Press the “SETUP” button.
2 Touch “Display” on the “Setup”screen.
3 Touch “General” or “Camera”, inwhich you want to make an adjust-ment.
4 Select “Contrast” or “Brightness”
using the or .
5 Adjust the contrast or brightness usingthe “+” or “-”.
6 After adjusting the screen, touch“OK”.
CHANGING BETWEEN DAY AND NIGHT MODE
Depending on the position of the head-light switch, the screen changes to dayor night mode.
INFORMATION
● If the screen is set in day mode with theheadlight switch turned on, this conditionis memorized even with the engineswitch turned off.
ADJUST CONTRAST/BRIGHTNESS
Screen button Function
“Contrast” “+” Strengthens the contrastof the screen
“Contrast” “-” Weakens the contrast ofthe screen
“Brightness” “+” Brightens the screen
“Brightness” “-” Darkens the screen
98
1. SETUP OPERATION
Display_audio_U_1st
5. Bluetooth® SETTINGS
1 Press the “SETUP” button.
2 Touch “Bluetooth*”.
3 Touch the items to be set.
Please refer to the following pages foreach setting.
1 Press the “SETUP” button.
2 Touch “Bluetooth*” on the “Setup”screen.
3 Touch “Registered Devices”.
4 This screen is displayed.
1 Touch “Add New” to register yourBluetooth® device to the system.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG, Inc.
You can confirm and change theBluetooth® settings.
REGISTERED DEVICES
ADDING A NEW DEVICE
99
1. SETUP OPERATION
5
SETUP
Display_audio_U_1st
2 When this screen is displayed, performa device discovery from yourBluetooth® device.
3 Input the passcode displayed on thescreen into your Bluetooth® device.
A passcode is not required for SSP(Secure Simple Pairing) compatibleBluetooth® phones. Depending on thetype of Bluetooth® phone beingconnected, a message confirmingregistration may be displayed on theBluetooth® phone’s screen. Respond andoperate the Bluetooth® phone accordingto the confirmation message.If you want to cancel it, touch “Cancel”.If the Bluetooth® phone to be registeredhas a Bluetooth® audio function, this canbe registered at the same time.
4 When the connection is completed,this screen is displayed.
Once you have registered it, the systemautomatically connects to your Bluetooth®
device every time you start your vehicle.
1 Touch “Remove” to remove yourBluetooth® device from the system.
2 Select the device to remove.
INFORMATION
● For details on device discovery for yourBluetooth® phone, refer to theBluetooth® phone’s user’s guide.
● When you register your phone,Bluetooth® audio will disconnect.
● If the Bluetooth® device has Bluetooth®
phone and Bluetooth® audio functions, itwill register phone and audio simulta-neously. If an on-screen messageappears, follow the message and regis-ter either or both Bluetooth® phone and/or Bluetooth® audio functions.
REMOVING A Bluetooth® DEVICE
INFORMATION
● When you delete a Bluetooth® phone,the phonebook data will be deleted atthe same time.
100
1. SETUP OPERATION
Display_audio_U_1st
1 Touch “Details” to display a devicedetail.
2 Select the device to display.
3 This screen is displayed.
Touch or to scroll the list.The information displays the followingitems.
■CHANGING THE CONNECTIONMETHOD
1 Touch “Connection Method” and se-lect “From Vehicle” or “From AudioPlayer”.
DISPLAYING DEVICE DETAILS Name Function
“Device Name” The name in theBluetooth® network.
“Device Address”
The address peculiar tothe system. You cannotchange it. If the samedevice name is dis-played on the screen ofyour device, refer to it.
“My Phone Number”
Phone number of yourphone. The number maynot be displayed de-pending on the phones.
“Profiles”
The profiles which sup-port your Bluetooth® de-vice. (For details of eachprofile, see pages 50and 70.)
“Connection Method”
The connection methodcan be switched be-tween “From Vehicle”and “From Audio Play-er”.
The connection method can be select-ed.
101
1. SETUP OPERATION
5
SETUP
Display_audio_U_1st
2 Touch “OK”.“From Vehicle”: Connect the audio sys-tem to the portable audio player.“From Audio Player”: Connect the porta-ble audio player to the audio system.
■INITIALIZING THE Bluetooth®
SETTINGS
1 Touch “Default”.
1 Press the “SETUP” button.
2 Touch “Bluetooth*” on the “Setup”screen.
3 Touch “Connect Phone”.
4 Select the device to connect.
The Bluetooth® mark is displayed whenyou connect the device.When you touch the device name with theselection indicator and the Bluetooth®
mark, the device will be disconnected.
5 When the connection is completed,this screen is displayed.
1 Press the “SETUP” button.
2 Touch “Bluetooth*” on the “Setup”screen.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG, Inc.
You can initialize the settings.
CONNECT PHONE
In case you register more than oneBluetooth® device, you need to choosea favorite one.
You can select the Bluetooth® devicefrom a maximum of 5 numbers.
CONNECT AUDIO PLAYER
In case you register more than oneBluetooth® device, you need to choosea favorite one.
You can select the Bluetooth® devicefrom a maximum of 5 numbers.
102
1. SETUP OPERATION
Display_audio_U_1st
3 Touch “Connect Audio Player”.
4 Select the device to connect.
The Bluetooth® mark is displayed whenyou connect the device.When you touch the device name with theselection indicator and the Bluetooth®
mark, the device will be disconnected.
5 When the connection is completed,this screen is displayed.
1 Press the “SETUP” button.
2 Touch “Bluetooth*” on the “Setup”screen.
3 Touch “Detailed Bluetooth*Settings”.
4 This screen is displayed.
Touch or to scroll the list.*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
DETAILED Bluetooth® SETTINGS
103
1. SETUP OPERATION
5
SETUP
Display_audio_U_1st
The information displays the followingitems.
1 Touch “Bluetooth* Power”.
2 Touch “On” or “Off”.
3 Touch “Save”.In case that the state of “Bluetooth*Power” is changed from “Off” into “On”,Bluetooth® connection will begin.The “Bluetooth* Power” display showsthe following state.
When “Bluetooth* Power” is “On”: TheBluetooth® device is automatically con-nected when you start your vehicle.When “Bluetooth* Power” is “Off”: TheBluetooth® device is disconnected, andthe system will not connect to it next time.
You can select the state of “Bluetooth*Power”.
On: The automatic connection is turnedon.Off: The automatic connection is turnedoff.*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
Name Function
“Bluetooth* Power”
It is available to set wheth-er registered devices willbe connected automatical-ly or not.
“Device Name”
The name in theBluetooth® network. Youcannot change it.
“Passcode”
The password when youregister your Bluetooth®
device in the system. Youcan change it.
“Device Address”
The address peculiar tothe system. You can notchange it.
“Profiles”
The name of the profilewhich your Bluetooth® de-vice corresponds to. (Fordetails of each profile, seepages 50 and 70.)
“Display Phone Status”
The Bluetooth® phoneconnection status. Youcan turn it on and off.
“Display Audio Player
Status”
The portable audio playerconnection status. Youcan turn it on and off.
If you want to change the settings, referto the following pages.When you change the settings, touch“Save” after changing them.
CHANGING THE Bluetooth® POWER
104
1. SETUP OPERATION
Display_audio_U_1st
1 Touch “Passcode”.
2 Input a passcode and touch “OK”.
1 Touch “Display Phone Status”.
2 Touch “On” or “Off”.
3 Touch “Save”.When you start your vehicle and theBluetooth® phone is automaticallyconnected, the connection check isdisplayed.
You can select the state of “DisplayPhone Status”.
On: The status is displayed.Off: The status is not displayed.
1 Touch “Display Audio PlayerStatus”.
2 Touch “On” or “Off”.
3 Touch “Save”.
EDITING THE PASSCODE
CHANGING THE DISPLAY PHONE STATUS
CHANGING THE DISPLAY AUDIO PLAYER STATUS
105
1. SETUP OPERATION
5
SETUP
Display_audio_U_1st
When you start your vehicle and theBluetooth® portable audio player isautomatically connected, the connectioncheck is displayed.
You can select the state of “DisplayAudio Player Status”.
On: The status is displayed.Off: The status is not displayed.
1 Touch “Default”.
If the state of “Bluetooth* Power” ischanged from “Off” into “On”, Bluetooth®
connection will begin.*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
INITIALIZING THE Bluetooth® SETTINGS
You can initialize the settings.
106
1. SETUP OPERATION
Display_audio_U_1st
6. PHONE SETTINGS
1 Press the “SETUP” button.
2 Touch “Phone”.
3 Touch the items to be set.
Please refer to the following pages foreach setting.
1 Touch “Phone Sound Settings”.
2 Change each setting according to thefollowing procedures.
3 When you complete all settings, touch“Save”.
1 Touch “Call Volume”.
2 Touch “-” or “+” to adjust the call vol-ume.
3 Touch “OK”.
Phone settings can be changed. PHONE SOUND SETTINGS
CALL VOLUME SETTING
107
1. SETUP OPERATION
5
SETUP
Display_audio_U_1st
1 Touch “Ring Tone Volume”.
2 Touch “-” or “+” to adjust the ring vol-ume.
3 Touch “OK”.
1 Touch “Ring Tone”.
2 Touch “Tone 1”, “Tone 2” or “Tone3”.
3 Touch “OK”.
1 Touch “Default”.
1 Press the “SETUP” button.
2 Touch “Phone”.
3 Touch “Phonebook”.
4 Touch the items to be set.
Please refer to the following pages foreach setting.
RING TONE VOLUME SETTING
RING TONE SELECTING
INITIALIZING THE SETTINGS
You can initialize the settings.
PHONEBOOK
INFORMATION
● Phonebook data is managed for everyregistered phone. When another phoneis connecting, you cannot read the regis-tered data.
108
1. SETUP OPERATION
Display_audio_U_1st
1 Touch “Manage Contacts”.
2 Touch the items to be set.
Please refer to the following pages foreach setting.
1 Touch “Transfer Contacts”.
PBAP compatible models
2 This screen is displayed. (See page109.)
PBAP incompatible but OPP compatiblemodels
2 This screen is displayed. (See page110.)
To verify which profile the cellular phonehas, confirm the “Detailed Bluetooth*Settings” screen. (See “DETAILEDBluetooth® SETTINGS” on page 102.)
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG, Inc.
PHONEBOOK SETTINGS
TRANSFERRING A PHONE NUMBER
You can transfer the phone numbers inyour Bluetooth® phone to the system.The phonebook manages a maximumof 5 phonebooks each. Up to 1000 per-son’s data (up to 3 numbers a person)can be registered in each phonebook.Operation methods differ betweenPBAP compatible and PBAP incom-patible but OPP compatible Bluetooth®
phones.If your cellular phone is neither PBAPnor OPP compatible, the phonebookcannot be transferred.
109
1. SETUP OPERATION
5
SETUP
Display_audio_U_1st
1 Press the switch on the steering
wheel or the button.
2 Touch “Contacts”.
3 Touch “Transfer”.
■AUTOMATIC PHONEBOOK DOWN-LOAD SETTING (PBAP COMPATI-BLE MODELS)
1 Touch “Automatically DownloadContacts” and select “On” or “Off”.
2 Touch “Save”.When the automatic transferring fails, on-screen message will be displayed. Oper-ate by following the display.
■UPDATE CONTACTS (PBAP COM-PATIBLE MODELS)
1 Touch “Update Contacts”.
INFORMATION
● Transfer it while the engine is running.(hybrid vehicles: the hybrid system ison).
● Depending on the cellular phone, callhistory will be also transferred.
● When transferring the phonebook datato the cellular phone, the hands-freemay be unavailable.
You can also display the “TransferContacts” screen in the following way.
The first time when the Bluetooth®
phone is connected when you startyour vehicle, phonebook data is auto-matically transferred to the system.The phonebook data will also be trans-ferred automatically when the phone isswitched over.
INFORMATION
● If you try to manually transfer whentransferring automatically, progressiondisplay on automatic transfer will be dis-played.
● The old phonebook data is availableduring the transfer on new phonebookdata.
You can update contacts.
110
1. SETUP OPERATION
Display_audio_U_1st
2 Transfer the phonebook data to thesystem using the Bluetooth® phone.
Depending on the type of cellular phone,OBEX authentication may be requiredwhen transferring phonebook data. Enter“1234” into the Bluetooth® phone.
This screen appears while transferring. Tocancel it, touch “Cancel”. If the transfer-ring is interrupted on the way, the phone-book data transferred will be deleted.
■REPLACE OR ADD CONTACTS(PBAP INCOMPATIBLE BUT OPPCOMPATIBLE MODEL)
1 Touch “Replace Contacts” when youwant to replace contacts, or touch“Add Contacts” when you want toadd contacts.
2 Transfer the phonebook data to thesystem using the Bluetooth® phone.
Depending on the type of cellular phone,OBEX authentication may be requiredwhen transferring phonebook data. Enter“1234” into the Bluetooth® phone.
This screen appears while transferring. Tocancel it, touch “Cancel”. If the transfer-ring is interrupted on the way, when thephone supports OPP service, the phone-book data transferred until then can bememorized in the system.
INFORMATION
● Bluetooth® audio may be disconnectedduring transfer on phonebook data.
DELETING THE PHONEBOOK DATA
You can delete the data. When you release your car, delete allyour data on the system.For PBAP compatible phone, deletethe phonebook data after setting “Au-tomatically Download Contact” to “Off”.(See “AUTOMATIC PHONEBOOKDOWNLOAD SETTING” on page109.)
111
1. SETUP OPERATION
5
SETUP
Display_audio_U_1st
1 Touch “Delete Contacts”.
2 Select the name you want to delete ortouch “All Delete”.
1 Press the switch on the steering
wheel or the button.
2 Touch “Contacts”.
3 Select the name from the list.
4 Touch “Options”.
5 Touch “Delete”.
1 Press the “SETUP” button.
2 Touch “Phone”.
3 Touch “Phonebook”.
4 Touch “Manage Speed Dials”.
5 Touch the items to be set.
Please refer to the following pages foreach setting.
You can also delete it in the followingway.
INFORMATION
● When you delete a Bluetooth® phone,the phonebook data will be deleted atthe same time.
SPEED DIALS SETTING
Speed dials setting is accessed fromthe “Speed Dials” screen.
112
1. SETUP OPERATION
Display_audio_U_1st
From “Speed Dial” screen
1 Press the switch on the steering
wheel or the button.
2 Touch “Speed Dials”.
3 Touch “Options”.
From “Contacts” screen
1 Press the switch on the steering
wheel or the button.
2 Touch “Contacts”.
3 Touch “Options”.
4 Touch “Manage Speed Dials”.
■REGISTERING THE SPEED DIALFROM CONTACTS
1 Touch “New Speed Dial fromContacts”.
2 Select the data you want to register.
3 Touch the desired phone number.
You can also display the “Speed Dials”screen in the following way.
You can register the phone numberfrom phonebook. Up to 18 numbersper phone can be registered.
113
1. SETUP OPERATION
5
SETUP
Display_audio_U_1st
4 Touch the screen button you want toregister in.
■REGISTERING THE SPEED DIALFROM CALL HISTORY
1 Touch “New Speed Dial from CallHistory”.
2 Select the data you want to register.
3 Touch the screen button you want toregister in.
From “Speed Dial” screen
1 Press the switch on the steering
wheel or the button.
2 Touch “Speed Dials”.
3 Touch “(add new)”.
4 Touch any screen button you want toregister from.
5 Select the data you want to register.
You can also register the speed dial inthe following ways.
114
1. SETUP OPERATION
Display_audio_U_1st
6 Touch the desired phone number.
From “Contact” screen
1 Press the switch on the steering
wheel or the button.
2 Touch “Contacts”.
3 Select the data from the list.
4 Touch “Options”.
5 Touch “Set Speed Dial”.
6 Touch the desired phone number.
From “Call History” screen
1 Press the switch on the steering
wheel or the button.
2 Touch “Call History”.
3 Touch the desired phone number.
4 Touch “Add Speed Dial”.
■DELETING THE SPEED DIAL
1 Touch “Delete Speed Dials”.
2 Select the data you want to delete ortouch “All Delete”.
You can delete the speed dial.
115
1. SETUP OPERATION
5
SETUP
Display_audio_U_1st
1 Touch “Delete Call History”.
2 Select the desired history to delete.
3 Select the data you want to delete ortouch “All Delete”.
1 Press the switch on the steering
wheel or the button.
2 Touch “Call History”.
3 Touch “Delete”.
4 Select the data you want to delete ortouch “All Delete”.
DELETING CALL HISTORY
You can delete the call history.For PBAP compatible phone, deletethe phonebook data after setting “Au-tomatically Download Contact” to “Off”.(See “AUTOMATIC PHONEBOOKDOWNLOAD SETTING” on page109.)
You can also delete the call history inthe following way.
116
1. SETUP OPERATION
Display_audio_U_1st
7. AUDIO SETTINGS (WITH Premium Display Audio SYSTEM)
1 Press the “SETUP” button.
2 Touch “Audio”.
3 Touch “HD Radio Settings”.
4 Select the desired setting from “HDRadio/Analog Setting”.
5 Touch “Save”.
HD Radio™ system can be set usingthe following procedure:
Screen button Function
“All”Touch to receive both an-alog and digital broad-casts.
“HD Only” Touch to receive only digi-tal broadcasts.
“Analog” Touch to receive only ana-log broadcasts.
117
1. SETUP OPERATION
5
SETUP
Display_audio_U_1st
8. VEHICLE SETTINGS*
1 Press the “SETUP” button.
2 Touch “Vehicle”.
3 Touch the desired items to be set.
For a list of the settings that can bechanged, refer to vehicle “Owner’sManual”.
4 After changing the settings, touch“Save”.
A message indicating that the settings arebeing saved will appear. Do not performany other operations while this message isdisplayed.
Vehicle customization settings can bechanged.
*: If equipped
118
1. SETUP OPERATION
Display_audio_U_1st
6
119
1
2
3
4
5
6
Display_audio_U_1st
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM OPERATION.............. 120
REAR VIEW MONITOR GUIDE LINES ................................................ 121
AREA DISPLAYED ON SCREEN........ 122THE REAR VIEW MONITOR
SYSTEM CAMERA ........................... 122
2. DRIVING PRECAUTIONS........... 124
1 REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
120
Display_audio_U_1st
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM OPERATION
1 To display the rear view image on thescreen, the shift lever is in the “R” posi-tion when the engine switch is in the“ON” position.
If you move the shift lever out of the “R”position, the screen returns to the previ-ous screen.If you select another function the camerawill turn off.
The rear view monitor system assiststhe driver by displaying an image of theview behind the vehicle while backingup.The image is displayed in reverse onthe screen. This allows the image toappear in the same manner as that ofthe rear view mirror.
CAUTION
● Never depend on the rear view monitorsystem entirely when backing up.Always make sure your intended path isclear.Use caution, just as you would whenbacking up any vehicle.
● Never back up while looking only at thescreen. The image on the screen is dif-ferent from actual conditions. Depicteddistances between objects and flat sur-faces will differ from the actual dis-tances. If you back up while looking onlyat the screen, you may hit a vehicle, aperson or an object. When backing up,be sure to check behind and all aroundthe vehicle visually and with mirrorsbefore proceeding.
● Do not use the system when the backdoor, trunk or tailgate is not completelyclosed.
● Use your own eyes to confirm the vehi-cle’s surroundings, as the displayedimage may become faint or dark, andmoving images will be distorted, or notentirely visible when the outside temper-ature is low. When backing up, be sureto check behind and all around the vehi-cle visually and with mirror before pro-ceeding.
● Do not use the system in the followingcases:• On icy or slick road surfaces, or in
snow.• When using tire chains or emergency
tires.• On an uneven road, such as a slope.With rear view monitor guide lines (ifequipped)
● Always check the vehicle surroundingarea, because the guide lines are ancil-lary lines.
● The guide lines are ancillary lines anddo not change even if the steering wheelis turned.
121
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
6
REA
R VIEW
MO
NITO
R SYSTEM
Display_audio_U_1st
Guidelines shown differ from those shownon the actual screen.
Vehicle width extension guide lines(blue)
These lines indicate the estimated vehiclewidth extension.
Distance guide line (blue)This line indicates a position on theground about 3 ft. (1 m) behind on theground of the rear bumper of the vehicle.
Distance guide line (red)This line indicates a position on theground about 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) behind on theground of the rear bumper of the vehicle.
Vehicle center guide lines (blue)These lines indicate the estimated vehiclecenter on the ground.
NOTICE
● If the back of the vehicle is hit, the posi-tion and mounting angle of the cameramay change. Be sure to have the cam-era’s position and mounting anglechecked at your Toyota dealer.
● As the camera has a water proof con-struction, do not detach, disassemble ormodify it. This may cause incorrect oper-ation.
● If the temperature changes rapidly, suchas when hot water is poured on the vehi-cle in cold weather, the system may notoperate normally.
● Do not strongly rub the camera lens. Ifthe camera lens is scratched, it can nottransmit a clear image.
● Do not allow organic solvent, car wax,window cleaner or glass coat to adhereto the camera. If this happens, wipe it offas soon as possible.
● If the tire size is changed, the area dis-played on the screen may change.
● When washing the vehicle, do not applyintensive bursts of water to the cameraor camera area. Doing so may result inthe camera malfunctioning.
INFORMATION
● If the camera lens becomes dirty, it can-not transmit a clear image. If water drop-lets, snow, or mud adhere to the lens,rinse with water and wipe with a softcloth. If the lens is extremely dirty, washit with a mild cleanser and rinse.
REAR VIEW MONITOR GUIDE LINES (IF EQUIPPED)
Guide lines are displayed on thescreen.
122
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
Display_audio_U_1st
The actual camera location may differdepending on the vehicle. For details,refer to vehicle “Owner’s Manual”.
AREA DISPLAYED ON SCREEN
Image is displayed approximately levelon screen.
INFORMATION
● The area detected by the camera is lim-ited. The camera does not detectobjects which are close to either cornerof the bumper or under the bumper.
Corners of bumper
INFORMATION
● The area displayed on the screen mayvary according to vehicle orientation orroad conditions.
THE REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM CAMERA
The rear view monitor system camerais located as shown in the illustration.
123
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
6
REA
R VIEW
MO
NITO
R SYSTEM
Display_audio_U_1st
On some models
If a bright light (for example, sunlight re-flected off the vehicle body) is picked up bythe camera, the smear effect* peculiar tothe camera may occur.*: Smear effect A phenomenon that oc-curs when a bright light (for example, sun-light reflected off the vehicle body) ispicked up by the camera; when transmit-ted by the camera, the light source ap-pears to have a vertical streak above andbelow it.
INFORMATION
● The camera uses a special lens. Thedistance of the image that appears onthe screen differs from the actual dis-tance.
● In the following cases, it may becomedifficult to see the images on the screen,even when the system is functioning.• In the dark (for example, at night)• When the temperature near the lens
is high or low• When water droplets are adhering to
the camera, or when humidity is high(for example, when it rains)
• When foreign matter (for example,snow or mud) is adhering to the cam-era
• When the camera has scratches ordirt on it
• When the sun or the beam of head-lights is shining directly into the cam-era lens
● When the camera is used under fluores-cent lights, sodium lights, or mercurylights etc., the lights and the illuminatedareas may appear to flicker.
124
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
Display_audio_U_1st
2. DRIVING PRECAUTIONS (WITH REAR VIEW MONITOR GUIDE LINES)
When the grade behind the vehicle slopesup sharply, objects appear to be fartheraway than they actually are.
When the grade behind the vehicle slopesdown sharply, objects appear to be closerthan they actually are.
When any part of the vehicle sags due tothe number of passengers or the distribu-tion of the load, there is a margin of errorbetween the guide lines on the screen andthe actual distance/course on the road.
In any of the following situations, thereis a margin of error between the guidelines on the screen and the actual dis-tance/course on the road.
125
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
6
REA
R VIEW
MO
NITO
R SYSTEM
Display_audio_U_1st
Approx. 1.5 ft. (0.5 m)The distance that appears on the screenbetween three-dimensional objects (suchas vehicles) and flat surfaces (such as theroad) and the actual distance differ as fol-lows.
• In reality, = < ( and areequally far away; is farther than and ). However, on the screen, thesituation appears to be < < .
• On the screen, it appears that a truck isparking approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m)away. However, in reality if you back upto point , you will hit the truck.
126
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
Display_audio_U_1st
127
1
2
3
4
5
6
Display_audio_U_1st
INDEX
128
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Display_audio_U_1st
AAdjust contrast/brightness.........................97AM.......................................................20, 23APPS button ...............................................8AUDIO button........................................8, 14Audio settings .........................................116Audio system ............................................13Audio system operating hints....................60
Caring for your CD player and discs .....62CD-R and CD-RW discs........................65iPod .......................................................61MP3/WMA files......................................64Radio reception .....................................60Terms ....................................................66USB memory .........................................62
Automatic Sound Levelizer (ASL) .............18AUX device ...............................................47
Connecting a portable audio device ......47Playing a portable audio device ............48Switching to AUX mode.........................48
BBalance .....................................................18Bluetooth® audio .......................................49
Connecting a Bluetooth® audio player .................................................51
Playing a Bluetooth® audio player.........53Switching to Bluetooth® audio mode .....50
Bluetooth® hands-free system ..................67Bluetooth® phone......................................69Bluetooth® settings ...................................98
Connect audio player...........................101Connect phone ....................................101Detailed Bluetooth® settings................102Registered devices................................98
Brightness .................................................97
129
Display_audio_U_1st
CCall history ................................................ 78Call on the Bluetooth® phone ................... 76
By call history ........................................ 78By dial ................................................... 76By phonebook ....................................... 76By speed dial......................................... 77By voice recognition .............................. 79
Call volume adjustment .......................... 106CAR button ........................................... 8, 86CD player.................................................. 34
Inserting or ejecting a disc .................... 34Playing a MP3/WMA disc...................... 37Playing an audio CD ............................. 35Switching to CD mode........................... 35
Cellular phone........................................... 69Contrast .................................................... 97
DDay mode..................................................97Delete personal data.................................94Dial............................................................76Disc slot ....................................................34Display settings.........................................96Driving precautions .................................124DSP control...............................................17
EEject button ...............................................34
FFast forward ......................35, 37, 40, 44, 53FM.......................................................20, 23Fuel consumption......................................87
GGeneral settings........................................93Guidance settings .....................................95
130
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Display_audio_U_1st
HHands-free system....................................69
About the phonebook in this system .....71Phone status display .............................72Using the phone switch and
microphone........................................70When you release your car ...................71
HD radio™ ................................................26HD radio™ settings.................................116History.......................................................88
IiPod...........................................................39
Connecting an iPod ...............................39Playing an iPod .....................................40Switching to iPod mode.........................39
iPod cover art............................................40
LLanguage ..................................................94
MMP3...........................................................37Multicast ....................................................26
OOverview buttons ........................................8
PPersonal data ............................................71Phone button.........................................8, 68Phone settings ........................................106
Phone sound settings..........................106Phonebook ..........................................107
Phonebook................................................76Play/Pause button .................................8, 14Portable audio device................................47PWR/VOL knob.....................................8, 16Preset stations ....................................20, 23Profile ..................................................50, 70
QQuick guide .................................................7
131
Display_audio_U_1st
RRadio (with Display Audio system) ........... 20
Presetting a station ............................... 20RBDS (Radio Broadcast Data
Systems)............................................ 21Selecting a station................................. 21Switching to radio mode........................ 20Traffic announcement ........................... 22
Radio (with Premium Display Audio system).................................................. 23Presetting a station ............................... 23Radio broadcast data system................ 24Selecting a station................................. 24Switching to radio mode........................ 23Traffic announcement ........................... 25Using HD Radio™ technology .............. 26
Radio (XM® satellite radio broadcast) ...... 29Channel category .................................. 30Displaying the radio ID .......................... 29Displaying the title and name................ 31How to subscribe to
an XM® satellite radio........................ 29If the satellite radio tuner
malfunctions ...................................... 32Presetting a channel ............................. 30Selecting a channel............................... 31Switching to satellite radio mode........... 30
Radio broadcast data system ................... 21Random mode ........................ 36, 38, 45, 55Rear view monitor system ...................... 119Receive on the Bluetooth® phone ............ 82Register a Bluetooth® phone .................... 74
Selecting and adding a Bluetooth® phone ........................... 75
Repeat mode .................... 36, 38, 42, 45, 55Reverse ............................ 35, 37, 40, 44, 53Ring tone volume.................................... 107
SSEEK/TRACK button ............................8, 14Selecting a language ................................94Setup.........................................................91SETUP button .......................................8, 92Shuffle mode.............................................42Sound settings ..........................................18Source.................................................14, 17Speed dials ...............................................77Steering switches......................................57Switching audio source .............................17System function index...............................10
TTag............................................................27Talk on the Bluetooth® phone...................83
Interrupt call...........................................84Tone..........................................................18Touch screen operation ............................11Traffic announcement ...............................25Transferring a phone number ...................76Trip information .........................................87TUNE/SCROLL knob ......................8, 14, 16Turn off display .........................................96Turning the audio system on or off ...........16Tire pressure warning system...................89
132
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Display_audio_U_1st
UUSB memory.............................................43
Connecting a USB memory...................43Playing a USB memory .........................44Switching to USB mode.........................43
VVehicle information ...................................85Vehicle settings.......................................117Volume adjustment .........................8, 14, 68
WWMA .........................................................37
XXM® satellite radio ....................................29
1
Display audio_U_2nd
1 QUICK GUIDE 9
2 APPLICATION-“Map” 19
3 APPLICATION-THE OTHERS 71
4 AUDIO SYSTEM 95
5 Bluetooth® HANDS-FREE SYSTEM 151
6 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM 183
7 VEHICLE INFORMATION 189
8 SETUP 195
9 REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM 217
INDEX 225
WITH NAVIGATION (2ND SECTION)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
2
Display audio_U_2nd
Introduction
This manual explains the operation of the Display Audio system. Please readthis manual carefully to ensure proper use. Keep this manual in your vehicle atall times.The screen shots in this document and the actual screens of the Display Audiosystem differ depending on whether the functions and/or a contract existed andthe map data available at the time of producing this document.
The Navigation System is one of the most technologically advanced vehicle ac-cessories ever developed. The system receives satellite signals from the GlobalPositioning System (GPS) operated by the U.S. Department of Defense. Usingthese signals and other vehicle sensors, the system indicates your present po-sition and assists in locating a desired destination.The navigation system is designed to select efficient routes from your presentstarting location to your destination. The system is also designed to direct youto a destination that is unfamiliar to you in an efficient manner. The system isdeveloped by “Harman International” using “Navteq” maps. The calculatedroutes may not be the shortest nor the least traffic congested. Your own person-al local knowledge or “short cut” may at times be faster than the calculatedroutes.The navigation system’s database includes Point of Interest categories to allowyou to easily select destinations such as restaurants and hotels. If a destinationis not in the database, you can enter the street address or a major intersectionclose to it and the system will guide you there.The system will provide both a visual map and audio instructions. The audio in-structions will announce the distance remaining and the direction to turn in ap-proaching an intersection. These voice instructions will help you keep your eyeson the road and are timed to provide enough time to allow you to maneuver,change lanes or slow down.Please be aware that all current vehicle navigation systems have certain limita-tions that may affect their ability to perform properly. The accuracy of the vehi-cle’s position depends on the satellite condition, road configuration, vehiclecondition or other circumstances. For more information on the limitations of thesystem, refer to page 66.
DISPLAY AUDIO SYSTEM OWNER’S MANUAL
NAVIGATION SYSTEM
3
Display audio_U_2nd
For safety reasons, this manual indicates items requiring particular attentionwith the following marks.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION ABOUT THIS MANUAL
CAUTION
● This is a warning against anything which may cause injury to people if the warning isignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do in order to reduce the riskof injury to yourself and others.
NOTICE
● This is a warning against anything which may cause damage to the vehicle or its equip-ment if the warning is ignored. You are informed about what you must or must not do inorder to avoid or reduce the risk of damage to your vehicle and its equipment.
4
Display audio_U_2nd
To use this system in the safest possiblemanner, follow all the safety tips shownbelow.This system is intended to assist in reach-ing the destination and, if used properly,can do so. The driver is solely responsiblefor the safe operation of your vehicle andthe safety of your passengers.Do not use any feature of this system tothe extent it becomes a distraction andprevents safe driving. The first prioritywhile driving should always be the safe op-eration of the vehicle. While driving, besure to observe all traffic regulations. Prior to the actual use of this system, learnhow to use it and become thoroughly famil-iar with it. Read the entire Display Audiosystem Owner’s manual to make sure youunderstand the system. Do not allow otherpeople to use this system until they haveread and understood the instructions inthis manual.
For your safety, some functions may be-come inoperable when driving. Unavail-able screen buttons are dimmed. Onlywhen the vehicle is not moving, can thedestination and route selection be doneusing a keyboard.
Navigation lockout message screenwhen vehicle is in motion
Apps lockout message when vehicle isin motion
SAFETY INSTRUCTION
CAUTION
● For safety, the driver should not operatethe Display Audio system while he/sheis driving. Insufficient attention to theroad and traffic may cause an accident.
● While driving, be sure to obey the trafficregulations and maintain awareness ofthe road conditions. If a traffic sign onthe road has been changed, route guid-ance may not have the updated informa-tion such as the direction of a one waystreet.
5
Display audio_U_2nd
While driving, listen to the voice instruc-tions as much as possible and glance atthe screen briefly and only when it is safe.However, do not totally rely on voice guid-ance. Use it just for reference. If the sys-tem cannot determine the current vehicleposition correctly, there is a possibility ofincorrect, late, or non-voice guidance.The data in the system may occasionallybe incomplete. Road conditions, includingdriving restrictions (no left turns, street clo-sures, etc.) frequently change. Therefore,before following any instruction from thesystem, look to see whether the instructioncan be done safely and legally.This system cannot warn about suchthings as the safety of an area, condition ofstreets, and availability of emergency ser-vices. If unsure about the safety of an ar-ea, do not drive into it. Under nocircumstances is this system a substitutefor the driver’s personal judgement.Use this system only in locations where itis legal to do so. Some states/provincesmay have laws prohibiting the use of videoand navigation screens next to the driver.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
6
Display audio_U_2nd
1. CONTROLS AND FEATURES ........ 10OVERVIEW BUTTONS ......................... 10SYSTEM FUNCTION INDEX................. 12TOUCH SCREEN OPERATION ............ 14
1. NAVIGATION OPERATION ............ 20QUICK REFERENCE ............................ 20NAVIGATION SYSTEM
FUNCTION INDEX.............................. 23MAP SCREEN OPERATION ................. 25MAP ICONS........................................... 29
2. DESTINATION SEARCH................. 33DESTINATION SEARCH....................... 33
3. ROUTE GUIDANCE......................... 42STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE ........... 42ROUTE GUIDANCE .............................. 44SETTING AND DELETING
THE ROUTE........................................ 46
4. MY DESTINATIONS ........................ 52REGISTERING AN ENTRY................... 52DISPLAYING AND EDITING
THE ENTRY INFORMATION.............. 56SENDING/RESTORING STORED
CONTACTS USING A USB MEMORY ................................ 58
5. NAVIGATION SETTING .................. 61MAP SETTINGS .................................... 61ROUTE SETTINGS ............................... 64
6. NAVIGATION SYSTEM INFORMATION .............................. 66LIMITATIONS OF THE NAVIGATION
SYSTEM.............................................. 66MAP INFORMATION ............................. 68
1. APPLICATIONS OPERATION........ 72QUICK REFERENCE............................. 72PICTURE SLIDESHOW......................... 73EMAIL..................................................... 75CALENDAR............................................ 77
2. ENTUNE SERVICE ......................... 78ENTUNE SERVICE................................ 78OPERATING NAVIGATION
FUNCTION USING ENTUNE SERVICE............................................. 81
OPERATING AN APPLICATION USING ENTUNE SERVICE................. 91
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION ....... 96QUICK REFERENCE............................. 96SOME BASICS....................................... 98RADIO OPERATION............................ 102RADIO OPERATION (XM® Satellite
Radio BROADCAST)......................... 108CD PLAYER OPERATION................... 113USB MEMORY/iPod OPERATION ...... 119AUX DEVICE OPERATION ................. 126Bluetooth® AUDIO OPERATION ......... 128STEERING SWITCHES....................... 138AUDIO SYSTEM
OPERATING HINTS.......................... 141
1 QUICK GUIDE
2 APPLICATION-“Map”
3 APPLICATION-THE OTHERS
4 AUDIO SYSTEM
7
1
2
3
4
5
6
Display audio_U_2nd
7
8
9
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION ................ 152QUICK REFERENCE .......................... 152HANDS-FREE SYSTEM ..................... 155CONNECTING A Bluetooth®
PHONE ............................................. 159REGISTERING AN ENTRY................. 163
2. TELEPHONE OPERATION........... 168CALLING ON A Bluetooth® PHONE ... 168RECEIVING CALLS ON A Bluetooth®
PHONE ............................................. 173TALKING ON A Bluetooth® PHONE ... 174
3. SHORT MESSAGE FUNCTION .... 177SHORT MESSAGE FUNCTION.......... 177
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION ................................ 184VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM FOR
NAVIGATION, AUDIO, HANDS-FREE................................... 184
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM FOR APPS........................................ 187
1. VEHICLE INFORMATION ............. 190QUICK REFERENCE .......................... 190FUEL CONSUMPTION ....................... 191TIRE PRESSURE WARNING
SYSTEM ........................................... 193
1. SETUP OPERATION .................... 196QUICK REFERENCE .......................... 196GENERAL SETTINGS......................... 197DISPLAY SETTINGS........................... 200Bluetooth® SETTINGS......................... 202PHONE SETTINGS ............................. 213AUDIO SETTINGS............................... 214VEHICLE SETTINGS........................... 215
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM ...................................... 218REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
OPERATION ..................................... 218DRIVING PRECAUTIONS ................... 222
ALPHABETICAL INDEX................... 226
5 Bluetooth® HANDS-FREE SYSTEM
6 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
7 VEHICLE INFORMATION
8 SETUP
9 REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
INDEX
8
Display audio_U_2nd
1
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
Display audio_U_2nd
7
8
9
1. OVERVIEW BUTTONS ................. 10
2. SYSTEM FUNCTION INDEX......... 12
3. TOUCH SCREEN OPERATION.... 14INPUT SCREEN OPERATION .............. 14LIST SCREEN OPERATION ................. 17
1 CONTROLS AND FEATURES
QUICK GUIDE
10
Display audio_U_2nd
1. CONTROLS AND FEATURES
1. OVERVIEW BUTTONS
The actual design and button position will differ depending on the vehicle. Some but-tons will be in different positions or not shown. For details, refer to vehicle “Owner’sManual”.
No. Name Function Page
Touch screendisplay
By touching the screen with your finger, you cancontrol the selected functions. 14
Disc slot Insert a disc into this slot. The CD player turns onimmediately. 113
“TUNE SCROLL”knob
Turn this knob to select radio station bands,tracks and files. Also, the knob can be used forselection from the list display.
99
“AUDIO” button Press this button to access the audio system. Theaudio system turns on in the last mode used. 96, 98, 99
button* Press this button to pause or resume playing themusic. —
button Press this button to access the Bluetooth®
hands-free system. 152
“SETUP” button Press this button to customize the function set-tings. 196
11
1. CONTROLS AND FEATURES
1
QU
ICK
GU
IDE
Display audio_U_2nd
*: If equipped
“SEEK/TRACK”button
Press the “ ” or “ ” button to seek up or down fora radio station, or to access a desired track or file.
103, 110, 115, 117, 120, 134
“CAR” button* Press this button to access the vehicle informa-tion system. 190
“APPS” button Press to display a list of applications. 20, 72
“PWR VOL” knob Press this knob to turn the audio system on andoff, and turn it to adjust the volume. 98
button Press this button to eject a disc. 113
No. Name Function Page
12
Display audio_U_2nd
1. CONTROLS AND FEATURES
2. SYSTEM FUNCTION INDEX
To access the application system, pressthe “APPS” button. The “Applications”menu screen will be displayed. The drivercan use the navigation system and the oth-er applications. For details, see pages 19and 71.
To access the audio system, press the“AUDIO” button. The audio control screenwill be displayed. Audio sources: Radio,CDs, iPod, USB, AUX and Bluetooth® au-dio. For details, see page 95.
To access the Bluetooth® hands-free sys-tem, press the button. The drivercan make or receive phone calls withouttaking their hands off the steering wheel.For details, see page 151.
To access the voice command system,
press the switch on the steeringwheel. Some apps require that voice com-mands be started from the specific screen.
will be present when voice com-mands are available. For details, see pag-es 183 and 187.
APPLICATION SYSTEM
AUDIO SYSTEM
Bluetooth® HANDS-FREE SYSTEM
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
13
1. CONTROLS AND FEATURES
1
QU
ICK
GU
IDE
Display audio_U_2nd
To access the vehicle information system,press the “CAR” button. Fuel consump-tion and tire pressure can be checked. Fordetails, see page 189.
To customize the function settings, pressthe “SETUP” button. The interface lan-guage can also be changed from the setupmenu. Functions are not available on allmodels. For details, see page 195.
Shifting into the “R” position will automati-cally show the view behind the rear of thevehicle on the display screen. For details,see page 217.
VEHICLE INFORMATION (IF EQUIPPED)
SETUP
REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM (IF EQUIPPED)
14
Display audio_U_2nd
1. CONTROLS AND FEATURES
3. TOUCH SCREEN OPERATION
When a screen button on the screen istouched, a beep sounds. (To set a beepsound, see page 197.)
1 Touch the keys directly to input lettersor numbers.
: Touch to delete one letter. Touchand hold to continue deleting letters.
2 Touch “OK”.
This system is operated mainly by thescreen buttons on the screen.
NOTICE
● To prevent damaging the screen, lightlytouch the screen buttons with your fin-ger.
● Do not use objects other than your fingerto touch the screen.
● Wipe off fingerprints using a glass clean-ing cloth. Do not use chemical cleanersto clean the screen, as they may dam-age the touch screen.
● To prevent the 12-volt battery from beingdischarged, do not leave the system onlonger than necessary when the engineis not running (hybrid vehicles: thehybrid system is off).
INFORMATION
● If the system does not respond to atouch on a screen button, move the fin-ger away from the screen and thentouch it again.
● Dimmed screen buttons cannot be oper-ated.
● The displayed image may becomedarker and moving images may beslightly distorted when the display iscold.
● Under extremely cold conditions, thescreen may not be displayed and thedata input by a user may be deleted.Also, the screen buttons may be harderthan usual to depress.
● When you look at the screen throughpolarized material such as polarizedsunglasses, the screen may be dark andhard to see. If so, look at the screenfrom different angles, adjust the screensettings (See “DISPLAY SETTINGS” onpage 200.), or take off your sunglasses.
INPUT SCREEN OPERATION
When searching for an address or aname, letters and numbers can be in-put via the screen.
INFORMATION
● Letters cannot be input while driving.Commands can be entered via voicerecognition when available. (See page184.)
INPUTTING LETTERS AND NUMBERS
15
1. CONTROLS AND FEATURES
1
QU
ICK
GU
IDE
Display audio_U_2nd
■CHANGING BETWEEN LOWERCASE AND UPPER CASE
1 Touch or .
: Touch to enter in lower case.
: Touch to enter in upper case.
Each time or is touched,input will change between upper case andlower case input.
INFORMATION
● When a character is input, a hint willappear displaying a possible match forthe word to be searched.
● Currently unavailable screen buttons willbe dimmed.
● When an entry is too long to be dis-played in the input field, the last sectionof the input text will be displayed withthe initial section displayed as “...”.
● If the vehicle starts moving while lettersare being input, a warning message willbe displayed and letters cannot be input.Touch “Previous” to return to the previ-ous screen.
INFORMATION
● In the following situations, the inputmode will automatically change betweenupper and lower case.• When the keyboard layout is
changed to upper case input, the lay-out will automatically change back tolower case input after one letter hasbeen entered.
• When “/”, “&”, “.” or “(” is input, thekeyboard layout will automatically bechanged to upper case input.
• When all characters are deleted, thekeyboard layout will automaticallychange to upper case input.
16
1. CONTROLS AND FEATURES
Display audio_U_2nd
■INPUTTING SYMBOLS
1 Touch .
2 Touch ( ) or .
( ) keyboard layout
keyboard layout
3 Touch the symbol keys directly to inputsymbols.
1 Enter letters.
If a candidate entry text displayed in theinput field is what is desired, touch “OK”.
Touching displays the candi-date entry text list. The number of match-ing items is shown. Up to 300 items aredisplayed.The list will be displayed automatically, ifthe number of matching entries is 5 orless.
2 Touch desired item.
ENTERING FROM THE LIST OF MATCHING ENTRIES
On certain screens, a candidate entrytext or word prediction list based on theinput letters will be displayed. The de-sired item can be selected and en-tered.
17
1. CONTROLS AND FEATURES
1
QU
ICK
GU
IDE
Display audio_U_2nd
or : Touch to shift to the next orprevious page.
By touching and holding this screen but-ton, the screen can be scrolled up ordown. Scrolling will automatically stopwhen the top/bottom of the list is reached.
:Touch to have entries that are toolong to fit in the current field scrolledautomatically from right to left.
1 Touch one of the character screen but-tons.
LIST SCREEN OPERATION
When a list is displayed, use the appro-priate screen button to scroll throughthe list.
INFORMATION
● While driving, changing pages will belimited.
:This indicates the displayed screen’sposition.
CHARACTER JUMP BUTTONS IN LISTS
Some lists contain character screenbuttons, “ABC”, “DEF” etc., which al-low a direct jump to list entries that be-gin with the same letter as thecharacter screen button.
INFORMATION
● Every time the same character screenbutton is touched, the list starting withthe subsequent character is displayed.
18
Display audio_U_2nd
1. QUICK REFERENCE .................... 20
2. NAVIGATION SYSTEM FUNCTION INDEX ...................... 23
3. MAP SCREEN OPERATION......... 25TO DISPLAY MAP SCREEN ................. 25MAP SCREEN OPERATION ................. 25
4. MAP ICONS................................... 29POI* ICONS ........................................... 29
1. DESTINATION SEARCH............... 33DESTINATION SEARCH ON THE
“My Destinations” SCREEN................. 33DESTINATION SEARCH ON THE
“Enter Destination” SCREEN............... 35
1 NAVIGATION OPERATION
2 DESTINATION SEARCH
*: Point of Interest
2
19
1
2
3
4
5
7
8
9
6
Display audio_U_2nd
1. STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE .................................. 42
STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE SCREEN ............................................. 42
SETTING THE ROUTE ......................... 43
2. ROUTE GUIDANCE....................... 44ROUTE GUIDANCE SCREEN .............. 44VOICE GUIDANCE ............................... 45
3. SETTING AND DELETING THE ROUTE................................. 46
SETTING FROM THE “Options” SCREEN ............................................. 46
ADDING DESTINATIONS ..................... 49DETOURING A SEGMENT ON
THE ROUTE ....................................... 51
1. REGISTERING AN ENTRY ........... 52REGISTERING A NEW ENTRY............ 52
2. DISPLAYING AND EDITING THE ENTRY INFORMATION............................ 56
DISPLAYING AND EDITING THE ENTRY INFORMATION.............. 56
3. SENDING/RESTORING STORED CONTACTS USING A USB MEMORY..................................... 58
SENDING STORED CONTACTS TO A USB MEMORY........................... 58
RESTORING STORED CONTACTS FROM A USB MEMORY ................................ 59
1. MAP SETTINGS ............................ 61SETTING THE MAP .............................. 61
2. ROUTE SETTINGS ....................... 64SETTING THE ROUTE OPTIONS ........ 64
1. LIMITATIONS OF THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM .............. 66
2. MAP INFORMATION..................... 68
3 ROUTE GUIDANCE
4 MY DESTINATIONS
5 NAVIGATION SETTING
6 NAVIGATION SYSTEM INFORMATION
APPLICATION-“Map”
20
Display audio_U_2nd
1. NAVIGATION OPERATION
1. QUICK REFERENCE
“Applications” menu screen
The actual design and button position will differ depending on the vehicle and avail-ability of Entune. Some buttons will be in different positions or not shown. For details,refer to vehicle “Owner’s Manual”.
The navigation application and several other applications can be accessed bypressing the “APPS” button.When the “APPS” button is pressed, the “Applications” menu screen that was last
displayed is returned to. Touch to display the “Applications” menu screen.
No. Function Page
Press to display a list of applications.
“Map” provides the user with navigation, route calculation, destinationentry (manually or via voice recognition), turn by turn directions, andreal-time traffic.
25
Touch to access the applications. 81, 83, 91
Touch to close the applications. 91
Touch to shift to the next or previous page.
21
1. NAVIGATION OPERATION
2
APPLIC
ATIO
N-“M
ap”
Display audio_U_2nd
“Navigation” menu screen
To display the “Navigation” menu screen, touch “Dest” on the map. (See page 22.)From this screen, destinations can be entered and route-related settings can bechanged.
No. Function Page
Touch to display the “My Destinations” screen.A destination can be entered by selecting an item from the list of storeddestinations, previous destinations or the addresses from the connect-ed phone’s phone book.
33
Touch to display the “Enter Destination” screen.A destination can be entered by address, POI or using advanced op-tions. It can also be added as a waypoint to a destination.
35, 49
Touch to display the “Traffic Messages” screen.Traffic messages function is using Entune service.It contains a list of traffic messages relating to the set route, all trafficmessages and warnings.
84
Touch to display the “Route Options” screen.The route preferences, avoidance criteria and traffic messages func-tion can be adjusted.
64
Touch the corresponding icon to change to the “My Destinations”, “En-ter Destination”, “Traffic Messages” or “Route Options” screen.
33, 35, 49, 64, 84
22
1. NAVIGATION OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
Overview guidance screen
No. Function Page
This symbol indicates a map layout. Touching this symbol changes themap layout. 28
Displays the distance, the estimated travel time to the destination, orthe estimated arrival time at the destination. 44
Displays traffic information on the route. 84
Displays the distance to the next turn with the arrow indicating the turndirection. 44
Touch to display the “Options” screen. 46
Touch to display the “Navigation” menu screen. 21
Displays the current street name or next turn (during route guidance). 44
Touch to display the “Applications” menu screen. 20, 72
Touch to hear voice guidance and/or adjust the volume of voice guid-ance. 45
Touch to change the map scale. 27
23
2
APPLIC
ATIO
N-“M
ap”1. NAVIGATION OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
2. NAVIGATION SYSTEM FUNCTION INDEX
Map
Route guidance
Displaying maps Page
Viewing the map screen 25
Displaying the current vehicle position 25
Viewing the current vehicle position vicinity map 27
Changing the scale 27
Changing the map layout 27
Displaying Point of Interest Icons 29
Viewing traffic messages 84
Searching destination Page
Searching the destination 33
Setting the entry registered with the system as the destination 33
Before starting route guidance Page
Recalculating the route 43
Viewing alternative routes 42
Starting route guidance 42
Before starting or during route guidance Page
Viewing the route 46
Adding destinations 49
Recalculating the route 47
Changing the estimated travel/arrival time display 63
24
1. NAVIGATION OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
Memory point
During route guidance Page
Stopping route guidance 46
Adjusting route guidance volume 45
Displaying the entire route map 46
Memory point Page
Registering the entry 52
Editing the entry 56
Loading the entry from external devices 59
25
2
APPLIC
ATIO
N-“M
ap”1. NAVIGATION OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
3. MAP SCREEN OPERATION
1 Press the “APPS” button.
When the “APPS” button is pressed, the“Applications” menu screen that was lastdisplayed will be returned to. Touch
until the “Applications” menuscreen is displayed.
2 Touch “Map”.
3 Touch “Confirm”.
After about a few seconds, the “CAU-TION” screen automatically switches tothe map screen.
The current vehicle position mark appears in the center of the map screen.
TO DISPLAY MAP SCREEN INFORMATION
● The “CAUTION” screen will be displayedwhen the screen is changed to the mapscreen for the first time after the engineswitch has been in the “ACC” or “ON”position.
● If “Map” is touched while the map isloading or an application is in use, apop-up window will be displayed. Whenthe loading process is complete, themap screen will be displayed.
MAP SCREEN OPERATION
CURRENT VEHICLE POSITION DISPLAY
When starting the navigation system,the current position is displayed first.This screen displays the current vehi-cle position and a map of the surround-ing area.
26
1. NAVIGATION OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
■CURRENT LOCATION AND GPS IN-FORMATION
1 Touch “Options” on the map.
2 Touch “Location & GPS Informa-tion”.
3 An information screen will be dis-played.
On this screen, the following information isdisplayed.
INFORMATION
● The vehicle icon can be changed. (Seepage 61.)
● While driving, the current vehicle posi-tion mark is fixed on the screen and themap moves.
● The current position is automatically setas the vehicle receives signals from theGPS (Global Positioning System). If thecurrent position is not correct, it is auto-matically corrected after the vehiclereceives signals from the GPS.
● After 12-volt battery disconnection, or ona new vehicle, the current position maynot be correct. As soon as the systemreceives signals from the GPS, the cor-rect current position is displayed.
Current location, geo-coordinates andGPS information are displayed.
No. Information
The information provided varies,depending whether the road cur-rently being travelled on is a free-way or a street.
Latitude and Longitude
Amount of available satellitesand the altitude.
27
1. NAVIGATION OPERATION
2
APPLIC
ATIO
N-“M
ap”
Display audio_U_2nd
If a finger is continuously held on thescreen, the map will continue scrolling inthat direction until the finger is removed.A street name or geo-coordinates of thetouched point will be shown, dependingon the scale of the map.After the screen is scrolled, the mapremains centered at the selected locationuntil another function is activated. The cur-rent vehicle position mark will continue tomove along your actual route and may
move off the screen. When istouched, the current vehicle position markreturns to the center of the screen and themap moves as the vehicle proceeds alongthe designated route.When the scroll feature is used, the cur-rent vehicle position mark may disappear
from the screen. Touch to displaythe current vehicle position on the mapscreen.
■MAP SCALE
1 Touch “+” or “-” to change the scale ofthe map screen.
SCREEN SCROLL OPERATION
When any point on the map is touched,that point moves to the center of thescreen and is shown by the cursor
mark .
When “Calculate” is touched, the start-ing route guidance screen is displayed.(See page 42.)When “Save” is touched, the point isregistered in the “Stored” list on the “MyDestinations” screen. (See page 54.)
MAP CONFIGURATIONS
Any of the following map configura-tions can be selected.
INFORMATION
● The scale range is from 150 feet to 250miles.
● After the scale has been changed, thenew scale indicator will be displayed inthe upper left area of the screen for awhile.
28
1. NAVIGATION OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
■MAP LAYOUT
1 Touch or .
2 Touch the desired map layout.
“3D Heading”: Touch to display 3D map.The direction of vehicle travel is always up.“2D Heading”: Touch to display 2D map.The direction of vehicle travel is always up.“2D North”: Touch to display 2D map. Re-gardless of the direction of vehicle travel,north is always up.
3D Heading
2D Heading
2D North
The map layout can be changed from“3D Heading”, “2D Heading” or “2DNorth”.
Map layout can be also changed bytouching “Options” and then “MapSettings”. (See page 61.)
29
2
APPLIC
ATIO
N-“M
ap”1. NAVIGATION OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
4. MAP ICONS
POI icons are displayed on the map.
■LIST OF POI ICONSPublic
POI ICONS
DISPLAY POI ICONS
Points of Interest such as gas stationsand restaurants can be displayed onthe map screen. Their location canalso be set as a destination.
You can select a particular type of Pointof Interest displayed on the screen.(See page 61.)
Icon Name
Library
College/University
School
Tourist office
Cemetery, funeral director
Government Office, Institution,City hall, Community gen.
Community
Court house
Place of worship
Accommodation, Hotel/Motel
Pharmacy
Convention Center, ExhibitionCenter
Finance, Bank
Cash Dispenser
Post Office
Business, B. General, B. facility
Medical, Doctor, Health & Care
Ambulance, Hospital/Polyclinic
Fire Station
Police Station
Phone Box, Communication
Dentist
Veterinarian
Icon Name
30
1. NAVIGATION OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
Traffic
Clubbing
Sport
Icon Name
Car Dealer/Repairer, Repair Fa-cility, Repair General, Car Wash,Tire Repair
Car Dealer
Highway Exit
Airport, Dep. /Arrival, Ground, In-ternational, Domestic
Bus Terminal, Bus Stop, Trans-portation, Public Transp. Stop,Transport general
Railway Station
Metropolitan Train
Gas Station
Rent-a-Car,-Facility, -Parking
Ferry Terminal
Parking, Open Parking Area, P.Area general
Parking Garage
Open P.A. P+R
Rest Area
Motoring Organization, Automo-bile Club
Mover, Moving Company
Motorcycle Dealer
Icon Name
Multiple POI
Bar, Nightlife
Leisure, Cultural Center, The-ater, Music Center, Concert Hall
Cinema
Casino
Cafe/Bar, Cafe
Restaurant, French, Belgian,Chinese, German, Greek, Vege-tarian, Fast Food, Grill, SeaFood, Sandwich, Steak...
Icon Name
Sport, Sport General, sport activ-ities
Golf Course
Race Track
Stadium, Sports Center, Hippo-drome
Water Sports
Bowling
Icon Name
31
1. NAVIGATION OPERATION
2
APPLIC
ATIO
N-“M
ap”
Display audio_U_2nd
Leisure
Icon Name
Amusement Park
Winery
Museum
Shopping, Market Place, Shop-ping Center, Factory Outlet
Shop, Department Store, Drive-through-bottle-shop
Tourist Attractions, ImportantTourist Attractions
Park/Recreational Area
Yacht Basin, Harbour
Camping Ground
Grocery Store
Historical Monument
RV Park, Camping
Bookstore
Hair & Beauty
Photography
Shoestore
Wine & Liquor
Clothing
Cleaning & Laundry
Icon Name
32
1. NAVIGATION OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
1 Touch the desired POI icon on themap.
2 Touch .
One POI
Multiple POI
3 POI information will be displayed.
DISPLAYING POI INFORMATION
When “Calculate” is touched, the start-ing route guidance screen is displayed.(See page 42.)When “Save” is touched, the point isregistered in the “Stored” list on the “MyDestinations” screen. (See page 54.)
When is touched, the registeredtelephone number is called.
33
2
APPLIC
ATIO
N-“M
ap”
Display audio_U_2nd
2. DESTINATION SEARCH
1. DESTINATION SEARCH
1 Touch “Dest” on the map.
2 Touch “My Destinations”.
The “My Destinations” screen can be dis-
played by touching on any of the“Navigation” screens.
3 Touch the tab for the desired method.
Please refer to the following pages for adescription of each operation.
1 Touch “Stored” on the “My Destina-tions” screen.
2 Touch the desired entry.
3 The starting route guidance screen willbe displayed. (See page 42.)
DESTINATION SEARCH ON THE “My Destinations” SCREEN
There are several ways to search adestination.(a)Destination search by stored desti-
nations(b)Destination search by previous des-
tinations(c)Destination search by the connect-
ed phone’s phone book
DESTINATION SEARCH BY “Stored”
Destinations can be selected from thedestinations registered with the sys-tem. To use this function, it is neces-sary to register the entry. (See page52.)
Touch to display and edit the entryinformation. (See page 56.)
INFORMATION
● If “Home” has not been registered, amessage will be displayed and thesetting screen will automaticallyappear. (See page 53.)
● To route to your Home address, you canuse a voice recognition command.Example: Say “Favorites Home”.
34
2. DESTINATION SEARCH
Display audio_U_2nd
1 Touch “Previous” on the “My Destina-tions” screen.
2 Touch the desired entry.
3 The starting route guidance screen willbe displayed. (See page 42.)
1 Touch “Phone Book” on the “My Des-tinations” screen.
2 Touch the desired entry.
3 The starting route guidance screen willbe displayed. (See page 42.)
DESTINATION SEARCH BY “Previous”
A destination can be selected from thepast destination list.
Touch to display and edit the entryinformation. (See page 56.)
INFORMATION
● The list can contain a maximum of100 entries. When the maximum isreached, the oldest destination isdeleted, making room for the new des-tination to be stored in the list.
DESTINATION SEARCH BY “Phone Book”
A destination can be set using theaddress of a contact from the phonebook of a connected cellular phone.Before using this function, connect aBluetooth® phone with a phone profile.(See page 204.)If a contact does not have address in-formation stored, the entry will bedimmed.
Touch “Search Contact” to search bythe contact's name.
Touch to display and edit the entryinformation. (See page 56.)
INFORMATION
● “Search Contact” cannot be oper-ated while driving.
35
2. DESTINATION SEARCH
2
APPLIC
ATIO
N-“M
ap”
Display audio_U_2nd
1 Touch “Dest” on the map.
2 Touch “Enter Destination”.
The “Enter Destination” screen can be dis-
played by touching on any of the“Navigation” screens.
3 Touch the tab for the desired method.
Please refer to the following pages for adescription of each operation.
1 Touch “Address” on the “Enter Desti-nation” screen.
2 Touch “Country”.
3 Touch the desired country.
4 Touch “State” and enter the desiredstate (USA and Mexico) or province(Canada).
DESTINATION SEARCH ON THE “Enter Destination” SCREEN
There are several ways to search adestination.(a)Destination search by address(b)Destination search by POI(c)Destination search by advanced
DESTINATION SEARCH BY “Address”
A destination can be searched using acity name or zip code.
36
2. DESTINATION SEARCH
Display audio_U_2nd
5 Touch “City” or “Zip” to enter the cityname or zip code.
When either a “City” or “Zip” is entered,the other will be entered automatically.
6 Touch “Street” to enter the streetname.
7 Touch “No.” to enter the street No.
8 Touch “Calculate Route”.
9 The starting route guidance screen willbe displayed. (See page 42.)
■SEARCHING “By Category”
1 Touch “POI” on the “Enter Destina-tion” screen.
2 Touch “By Category”.
3 Touch the desired item to search thearea. (See page 38.)
4 Touch the desired category.
INFORMATION
● “Calculate Route” can be selectedonce a “City” or “Zip” has beenentered. If “Calculate Route” istouched when only “City” or “Zip” hasbeen entered, a route search starts withthe center of the city entered as the des-tination.
● While driving, screen buttons other than“Country” cannot be selected.
DESTINATION SEARCH BY “POI”
POIs in a specific area can besearched by category, name or fromthe map.
37
2. DESTINATION SEARCH
2
APPLIC
ATIO
N-“M
ap”
Display audio_U_2nd
5 Touch for the desired item.
If you touch the desired item, the startingroute guidance screen will be displayeddirectly. (See page 42.)
6 Touch “Calculate”.
7 The starting route guidance screen willbe displayed. (See page 42.)
■SEARCHING “By Name”
1 Touch “POI” on the “Enter Destina-tion” screen.
2 Touch “By Name” on the “POI”screen.
3 Touch the desired item to search thearea. (See page 38.)
4 Input POI name.
5 Touch “OK”.
6 Follow the steps “SEARCHING “ByCategory”” from “STEP 5”. (See page36.)When “Save” is touched, the point is
registered in the “Stored” list on the “MyDestinations” screen. (See page 54.)
When is touched, the registeredtelephone number is called.
INFORMATION
● The POI search result list is sorted bydistance to the POI. The distance can besorted by the following methods:• When the search area is set to “At
Current Position”, “Around” or“Along Route”, the distance will becalculated from the current position tothe POI.
• When the search area is set to “AtDestination”, the distance will becalculated from the destination to thePOI.
INFORMATION
● Searching “By Name” cannot beoperated while driving.
38
2. DESTINATION SEARCH
Display audio_U_2nd
■SEARCHING “By Map”
1 Touch “POI” on the “Enter Destina-tion” screen.
2 Touch “By Map” on the “POI” screen.
3 Touch the desired item to search thearea. (See page 38.)
4 Touch the desired POI icon on themap.
5 Follow the steps “SEARCHING “ByCategory”” from “STEP 5”. (See page36.)
■SELECTING THE SEARCH AREA
1 Touch “By Category”, “By Name” or“By Map”.
2 Touch the desired item to search thearea.
“At Current Position”: Around the cur-rent position“Around”: Around the defined country(See page 39.)“At Destination”: Around the main desti-nation“Along Route”: Along the current route
INFORMATION
● Depending on the current map scale,not all POI icons will be available forselection.
INFORMATION
● When route guidance is not in use, “AtDestination” and “Along Route” can-not be selected.
● When “At Destination” is selected,POIs around the destination will besearched. POIs around waypoints willnot be searched.
39
2. DESTINATION SEARCH
2
APPLIC
ATIO
N-“M
ap”
Display audio_U_2nd
Selecting “Around” area
1 Touch “Country” to select a country.
2 Touch “State” and enter the desiredstate (USA and Mexico) or province(Canada).
3 Touch “City” or “Zip” to enter thename or zip code.
When either a “City” or “Zip” is entered,the other will be entered automatically.
4 Touch “Define as Search Area”.
■ONLINE SEARCH
■FUEL PRICES
If you select “Around”, touch “De-fine” to select the desired search area.
A destination can be selected via En-tune service. For detailed informationabout “ONLINE SEARCH”, see page81.
Fuel Prices function is using Entuneservice. It enables the navigation sys-tem to display current fuel prices andgas station locations, which can be setas a destination if desired.For detailed information about “FUELPRICES”, see page 83.
40
2. DESTINATION SEARCH
Display audio_U_2nd
1 Touch “Advanced” on the “Enter Des-tination” screen.
2 Touch the desired method to searchthe destination.
Please refer to the following pages for adescription of each operation.
■SELECTING ON MAP
1 Touch “Select Point on Map” on the“Advanced” screen.
2 Touch the desired point on the map.
3 Touch “Calculate”.
4 The starting route guidance screen willbe displayed. (See page 42.)
DESTINATION SEARCH BY “Advanced”
When “Save” is touched, the point isregistered in the “Stored” list on the “MyDestinations” screen. (See page 54.)
41
2. DESTINATION SEARCH
2
APPLIC
ATIO
N-“M
ap”
Display audio_U_2nd
■ENTER GEO-COORDINATES
1 Touch “Enter Geo-Coordinates” onthe “Advanced” screen.
2 Touch “N” or “S”.
3 Input the latitude (Degrees°, Minutes’,Seconds”).
4 Touch “W” or “E”.
5 Input the longitude (Degrees°, Min-utes’, Seconds”).
6 Touch “OK”.
7 Touch “Calculate”.
8 The starting route guidance screen willbe displayed. (See page 42.)
■ENTER INTERSECTION
1 Touch “Enter Intersection” on the“Advanced” screen.
2 Touch “Country” to select a country.
3 Touch “State” and enter the desiredstate (USA and Mexico) or province(Canada).
4 Touch “City” or “Zip” to enter the cityname or zip code.
5 Touch “Street” to input the name ofthe first intersecting street and thentouch “OK”.
6 Touch “Street” to input the name ofthe second intersecting street and thentouch “OK”.
7 Touch “Calculate Route”.
8 The starting route guidance screen willbe displayed. (See page 42.)
Geo coordinates can be entered inDMS format (Degrees°, Minutes’, Sec-onds”). Only coordinate values thatcan potentially exist are able to be en-tered. Impossible coordinate valuesand their relevant screen buttons willbe dimmed.
When “Save” is touched, the point isregistered in the “Stored” list on the “MyDestinations” screen. (See page 55.)
INFORMATION
● If a destination that is not located on aroad is set, the vehicle will be guided tothe point on a road nearest to the desti-nation.
● This function cannot be operated whiledriving.
42
Display audio_U_2nd
3. ROUTE GUIDANCE
1. STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE
1 Touch “Start”.
2 Starts route guidance. (See page 44.)
1 Touch one of the three route alterna-tives to select it.
2 Start route guidance. (See page 44.)
STARTING ROUTE GUIDANCE SCREEN
After searching the destination, thestarting route guidance screen will bedisplayed.According to the setting, either the rec-ommended route screen or route alter-natives screen will be displayed. (Seepage 64.)
CAUTION
● Be sure to obey traffic regulations andkeep road conditions in mind while driv-ing. If a traffic sign on the road has beenchanged, the route guidance may notindicate such changed information.
RECOMMENDED ROUTE SCREEN
The recommended route will be dis-played on the map.
“Preferences”: Touch to adjust theroute preferences for current routebefore starting the route guidance. (Seepage 43.)“Avoid”: Touch to adjust the avoidancecriteria of current route before startingthe route guidance. (See page 43.)
INFORMATION
● The default recommended route can bechanged. (See page 64.)
● The arrival time or the remaining timewill be displayed in the upper right areaof the map. Each time the area istouched, the display switches betweendisplaying the arrival time and remainingtime.
● Distance of the entire route is displayedon the map.
● The starting route guidance screen willalways be displayed in 2D North.
ROUTE ALTERNATIVES SCREEN
Three route alternatives are displayedon the map.
“Avoid”: Touch to adjust the avoidancecriteria of current route before startingthe route guidance. (See page 43.)
INFORMATION
● The arrival time and distance of theentire route will be displayed in the list.
● The starting route guidance screen willalways be displayed in 2D North.
43
3. ROUTE GUIDANCE
2
APPLIC
ATIO
N-“M
ap”
Display audio_U_2nd
1 Touch “Preferences” on the startingroute guidance screen.
2 Touch the desired item.
“Fast Route”: Touch to calculate the fast-est route.“Short Route”: Touch to calculate theshortest route.“Ecological Route”: Touch to calculatean ecological route.
3 The route will be recalculated.
1 Touch “Avoid” on the starting routeguidance screen.
2 Touch the desired item.
“Avoid Freeways”: Touch to avoidfreeways.“Avoid Toll Roads”: Touch to avoid tollroads.“Avoid Tunnels”: Touch to avoid tun-nels.“Avoid Ferries”: Touch to avoid ferries.“Avoid Border Crossings”: Touch toavoid border crossings.
3 Touch .
4 The route will be recalculated.
SETTING THE ROUTE
SETTING THE ROUTE PREFERENCES
SETTING THE AVOIDANCE CRITERIA
INFORMATION
● Setting the route preference and avoid-ance in the above method affects cur-rent route only. Route option defaultscan be changed from the “RouteOptions” screen. (See page 64.)
44
3. ROUTE GUIDANCE
Display audio_U_2nd
2. ROUTE GUIDANCE
On this screen, the following information isdisplayed.
■SIGNPOSTS
■LANE RECOMMENDATION
ROUTE GUIDANCE SCREEN
While guiding the route, the followingscreen will be displayed.
No. Information
Distance and travel/arrival time tothe destination
Traffic message on the route (Seepage 84.)
The colored section of the bar re-duces as the vehicle approachesthe next turn
Distance to the next turn with the ar-row indicating the turn direction
The name of the road currently be-ing travelled on
Guidance route
Current position
When approaching the turn, a signpostwill automatically be displayed.
When approaching a maneuver, thelane recommendation will automatical-ly be displayed.
INFORMATION
● If the vehicle goes off the guided route,the route will be recalculated.
● For some areas, the roads have notbeen completely digitized in our data-base. For this reason, the route guid-ance may select a road that should notbe traveled on.
● The above items will be displayeddepending on the map scale.
● The displaying of the above items canbe switched off. (See page 61.)
45
3. ROUTE GUIDANCE
2
APPLIC
ATIO
N-“M
ap”
Display audio_U_2nd
When is touched while route guid-ance is active, the last navigationannouncement will be repeated.
After touching , touch “+” or “-” toadjust the volume level of the navigationannouncements.After touching “+” or “-”, short audibleinformation will be given to control the cur-rent volume level (e.g. turn up/turn down).
VOICE GUIDANCE
The voice guidance provides variousmessages as you approach an inter-section, or other points where maneu-vering the vehicle is necessary.
INFORMATION
● The voice guidance may not pronouncecertain street names correctly or clearlydue to the limitations of the text-to-speech function.
● On freeways, interstates or other high-ways with higher speed limits, the voiceguidance will be made at earlier pointsthan on city streets in order to allow timeto maneuver the vehicle.
● If the system cannot determine the cur-rent vehicle position correctly (in casesof poor GPS signal reception), the voiceguidance may be early or delayed.
CAUTION
● Be sure to obey the traffic regulationsand keep the road condition in mindespecially when you are driving on IPDroads (roads that are not completely dig-itized in our database). The route guid-ance may not have the updatedinformation such as the direction of aone way street.
46
3. ROUTE GUIDANCE
Display audio_U_2nd
3. SETTING AND DELETING THE ROUTE
1 Touch “Options”.
2 Touch the desired items.
On this screen, the following functions canbe operated.
Routes can be checked, changed andrecalculated during route guidance.
SETTING FROM THE “Options” SCREEN
Checking and setting routes is mainlyperformed from the “Options” screen.
No. Function
Touch to change the map setting.(See page 61.)
Touch to stop the current route guid-ance.
Touch to set the route preferencesand the avoidance criteria for theroute calculation. (See page 47.)(The current status is displayed onthe right of the item.)
Touch to display a list of the differentsegments of the route. It is also pos-sible to define a detour. (See page47.) (The current status is displayedon the right of the item.)
Touch to display the complete route.
Touch to block a fixed distance onthe road ahead. (See page 48.) (Thecurrent status is displayed on theright of the item.)
Touch to display the current loca-tion, geo-coordinates and GPS in-formation. (See page 26.)
Touch to display the destination’s in-formation. (See page 48.)
47
3. ROUTE GUIDANCE
2
APPLIC
ATIO
N-“M
ap”
Display audio_U_2nd
1 Touch “Route Options For CurrentRoute” on the “Options” screen.
2 Touch the desired item to change theroute setting.
“Preferences”: Touch to adjust the routepreferences. (See page 43.)“Avoid”: Touch to adjust the avoidancecriteria. (See page 43.)
3 The route will be recalculated.
1 Touch “Route List” on the “Options”screen.
2 Touch the desired item to display thesegment.
Guidance arrow, street name, distance tothe point are displayed.
3 The detail of the segment is displayed.
or : Touch to display the next orprevious segment.
SETTING THE ROUTE PREFERENCE OR AVOIDANCE CRITERIA FOR CURRENT ROUTE
DISPLAYING THE ROUTE LIST
A list of the different segments of theroute can be displayed.
Touch “Detour” to detour the desiredsegment. (See page 51.)
48
3. ROUTE GUIDANCE
Display audio_U_2nd
1 Touch “Block Road Ahead” on the“Options” screen.
2 Touch the desired item to select thedesired detour distance.
“Deactivate Block Road Ahead”: Touchto deactivate the function.“Block Next 1 mi” ~ “Block Next 12 mi”:Touch to detour the next 1 mile ~ 12 milesof the current route (road).
“Deactivate Block Road Ahead” can beselected when the block road ahead func-tion has been activated.
3 The route will be recalculated.A blocked route will be marked in the map.After the blocked route has beendetoured, the block road ahead functionwill automatically be deactivated.
1 Touch “Destination Information” onthe “Options” screen.
2 The destination information screen willbe displayed.
On this screen, the following information isdisplayed.
BLOCK ROAD AHEAD
A fixed distance on the road ahead canbe blocked.
DISPLAYING THE DESTINATION INFORMATION
The destination information is dis-played.
No. Information
Address of destination
Selected route preference
Selected avoidance criteria
Arrival time, remaining time anddistance to destination
Address of each waypoint (if en-tered)
49
3. ROUTE GUIDANCE
2
APPLIC
ATIO
N-“M
ap”
Display audio_U_2nd
1 Touch “Dest” on the map.
2 Touch “Enter Destination”.
The “Enter Destination” screen can be dis-
played by touching on any of the“Navigation” screens.
3 Touch “Waypoint” on the “Enter Des-tination” screen.
4 Touch the desired method to searchthe destination.
For detailed information about searchingthe destination on the map, see page 33.
If you search the destination by “EnterAddress”
5 Touch “Add as Waypoint”.
If you search the destination by “SelectPoint on Map” or “Enter Geo-Coordi-nates”
5 Touch “Add”.
If you search the destination by the othermethods
5 Touch the desired entry.
6 Touch “Insert Waypoint” to select theposition of the waypoint.
7 The route will be recalculated.
ADDING DESTINATIONS
Destinations can be added and theroute changed accordingly.
INFORMATION
● In addition to the main destination, amaximum of 4 waypoints can be set.
● The main destination is marked by ,
the waypoints are marked by .
50
3. ROUTE GUIDANCE
Display audio_U_2nd
1 Touch “Show Destination List” onthe “Waypoint” screen.
2 Touch the desired destination to be ed-ited.
3 Touch desired item.
On this screen, the following functions canbe operated.EDITING DESTINATIONS
No. Function
Touch to register the point in the“Stored” list on the “My Destina-tions” screen. (See page 55.)
Touch to change the order of the
destinations. Touch or tomove the destination up or down theorder displayed on the next screen.
Touch to delete the destination.
Touch to delete all waypoints.
INFORMATION
● If the main destination is deleted, thelast waypoint before the deleted destina-tion will become the new main destina-tion.
51
3. ROUTE GUIDANCE
2
APPLIC
ATIO
N-“M
ap”
Display audio_U_2nd
1 Display the route list. (See page 47.)
2 Touch the desired segment to detour.
3 Touch “Detour”.
or : Touch to display the next orprevious segment.
4 The route will be recalculated.
1 Display the route list. (See page 47.)
2 Touch “Detours”.
3 Touch “Detour Off”.
If there is more than one point to detour, alist of points to detour will be displayed.Select points from the list to canceldetouring them.
4 The route will be recalculated.
DETOURING A SEGMENT ON THE ROUTE
When detouring a segment, the detourroute can be changed.
DETOURING THE SEGMENT
CANCELLING THE DETOURED SEGMENT
52
Display audio_U_2nd
4. MY DESTINATIONS
1. REGISTERING AN ENTRY
1 Touch “Dest” on the map.
2 Touch “My Destinations”.
The “My Destinations” screen can be dis-
played by touching on any of the“Navigation” screens.
3 Touch “Stored” on the “My Destina-tions” screen.
4 Touch “Create New Entry”.
5 Input the entry address. (See page 35.)
6 Touch “Save New Entry”.
7 Input the entry name.
8 Touch “OK”.
9 The entry is saved in the “Stored” list.
REGISTERING A NEW ENTRY
Up to 200 destinations can be regis-tered with this system.
INFORMATION
● This function cannot be operated whiledriving.
REGISTERING FROM THE “My Destinations” SCREEN
Touch to display and edit the entryinformation. (See page 56.)
53
4. MY DESTINATIONS
2
APPLIC
ATIO
N-“M
ap”
Display audio_U_2nd
■REGISTERING “Home”
1 Touch “Home”.
2 Touch “Yes”.
3 Touch the desired method to searchthe point.
For details about searching the point onthe map, see page 33.
If you search the destination by “EnterAddress”
4 Touch “Save as Home Address”.
If you search the destination by “SelectPoint on Map” or “Enter Geo-Coordi-nates”
4 Touch “Save”.
If you search the destination by the othermethods
4 Touch the desired entry from the list.
5 The entry is registered as “Home” inthe “Stored” list.
If “Home” has not been registered,touching “Home” allows a home ad-dress to be registered.
For security reasons, use a point closeto your home instead of your actualhome address.
Touch to display and edit the entryinformation. (See page 56.)
INFORMATION
● To route to your Home address, you canuse a voice recognition command.Example: Say “Favorites Home”.
54
4. MY DESTINATIONS
Display audio_U_2nd
1 Touch the desired point on the map.
2 Touch “Save”.
3 Follow the steps “REGISTERINGFROM THE “My Destinations”SCREEN” from “STEP 7”. (See page52.)
1 Search the point by “POI”. (See pages32 and 36.)
2 Touch “Save”.
3 Follow the steps “REGISTERINGFROM THE “My Destinations”SCREEN” from “STEP 7”. (See page52.)
■REGISTERING FROM THE LIST ONTHE “Previous” OR “Phone Book”SCREEN
1 Search the point by “Previous” or“Phone Book”. (See page 34.)
2 Touch next to the desired item.
3 Touch “Add to Stored Contacts”.
4 Follow the steps “REGISTERINGFROM THE “My Destinations”SCREEN” from “STEP 7”. (See page52.)
REGISTERING FROM THE MAP
REGISTERING FROM POI
REGISTERING FROM THE LIST
INFORMATION
● If the contact includes an address and aphone number, they will be stored in the“Stored” list on the “My Destinations”screen and “Contacts” screen. (Seepages 52 and 163.)
55
4. MY DESTINATIONS
2
APPLIC
ATIO
N-“M
ap”
Display audio_U_2nd
■REGISTERING FROM THE DESTI-NATION LIST
1 Display the “Show Destination List”screen. (See page 50.)
2 Touch the desired destination.
3 Touch “Add to Stored Contacts”.
4 Follow the steps “REGISTERINGFROM THE “My Destinations”SCREEN” from “STEP 7”. (See page52.)
1 Search the point by “Enter Geo-Coor-dinates”. (See page 41.)
2 Touch “Save”.
3 Follow the steps “REGISTERINGFROM THE “My Destinations”SCREEN” from “STEP 7”. (See page52.)
REGISTERING FROM GEO-COORDINATES
LOADING SAVED DESTINATIONS FROM A PHONE
Address and number will be stored inthe “Stored” list on the “My Destina-tions” screen and “Contacts” screen.(See pages 52 and 163.) For detailedinformation about “LOADING SAVEDDESTINATIONS FROM A PHONE”,see page 89.
56
4. MY DESTINATIONS
Display audio_U_2nd
2. DISPLAYING AND EDITING THE ENTRY INFORMATION
1 Touch next to the desired item onthe “My Destinations” screen.
The entry options screen of “Stored” list
The entry options screen of “Previous”list
The entry options screen of “PhoneBook” list
On this screen, the following functions canbe operated.
DISPLAYING AND EDITING THE ENTRY INFORMATION
Detailed information of entries in thelist can be displayed or edited.
No. Function
Touch to display the details ofthe entry information. (See page57.)
Touch to change the entry name.(See page 57.)
Touch to edit the address. (Seepage 57.)
Touch to delete the entry.
Touch to delete all entries.
Touch to register the entry in the“Stored” list on the “My Destina-tions” screen and “Contacts”screen. (See page 54.)
57
4. MY DESTINATIONS
2
APPLIC
ATIO
N-“M
ap”
Display audio_U_2nd
1 Touch “Show Details” on the entryoptions screen.
2 This screen will be displayed.
The address will be marked on the map. The address and a picture, if available, ofthe contact from the system’s phone bookwill be displayed.
1 Touch “Rename XX” on the entry op-tions screen.
2 Input the new name.
3 Touch “OK”.
1 Touch “Edit Address” on the entryoptions screen.
2 Input the new address. (See page 35.)
3 Touch “Save Changes”.
SHOW DETAILS OF THE ENTRY
When you touch “Start”, the startingroute guidance screen will be displayed.
CHANGING THE ENTRY NAME
INFORMATION
● This function cannot be operated whiledriving.
EDITING THE ADDRESS
INFORMATION
● This function cannot be operated whiledriving.
● If an entry that is transferred from a cel-lular phone is edited, the change willaffect the entry in the “Stored” list on the“My Destinations” screen and “Contacts”screen. (See pages 52 and 163.)
58
4. MY DESTINATIONS
Display audio_U_2nd
3. SENDING/RESTORING STORED CONTACTS USING A USB MEMORY
1 Open the cover of the USB/AUX portand connect a USB memory.
The USB/AUX port is located on theinstrument panel, or in the console box orglove box etc. The actual design and but-ton position will differ depending on thevehicle. For details, refer to vehicle“Owner’s Manual”.
2 Press the “SETUP” button.
3 Touch “General”.
4 Touch “Stored Contacts Backup”.
5 Touch “Backup Stored Contacts toUSB”.
6 The following screen will be displayedwhile sending the data.
SENDING STORED CONTACTS TO A USB MEMORY
The entries stored in the “Stored” liston the “My Destinations” screen and“Contacts” screen (See pages 52 and163.) can be transferred to a USBmemory.
59
4. MY DESTINATIONS
2
APPLIC
ATIO
N-“M
ap”
Display audio_U_2nd
7 The following screen will be displayedwhen sending data to the USB memoryis complete.
1 Open the cover of the USB/AUX portand connect a USB memory.
The USB/AUX port is located on theinstrument panel, or in the console box orglove box etc. The actual design and but-ton position will differ depending on thevehicle. For details, refer to vehicle“Owner’s Manual”.
2 Press the “SETUP” button.
3 Touch “General”.
4 Touch “Stored Contacts Backup”.
5 Touch “Restore Contact Backupfrom USB”.
INFORMATION
● Downloading may not complete cor-rectly in the following cases:• If the engine switch is turned off during
downloading• If the USB memory is removed before
downloading is complete
RESTORING STORED CONTACTS FROM A USB MEMORY
Backed-up data can be transferredfrom a USB memory to this system.Transferred addresses and numberswill be stored in the “Stored” list on the“My Destinations” screen and “Con-tacts” screen. (See pages 52 and 163.)
60
4. MY DESTINATIONS
Display audio_U_2nd
6 The following screen will be displayedwhile loading the data.
7 The following screen will be displayedwhen loading the data to the system iscomplete.
INFORMATION
● Downloading may not complete cor-rectly in the following cases:• If the engine switch is turned off during
downloading• If the USB memory is removed before
downloading is complete
61
2
APPLIC
ATIO
N-“M
ap”
Display audio_U_2nd
5. NAVIGATION SETTING
1. MAP SETTINGS
1 Touch “Options”.
2 Touch “Map Settings”.
3 Touch the item to be set.
On this screen, the following functions canbe set.SETTING THE MAP
No. Function
Touch to change the map layout.(See page 28.)
Touch to set the display of POIicon categories. (See page 62.)
Touch to change the vehicleicon. (See page 62.)
Touch to change the screen to“Day” or “Night”. (See page63.)
Touch to change the estimatedtime between “Arrival Time/Dis-tance” and “Remaining Time/Distance” to the destination.(See page 63.)
Touch to set the display of theroute guidance arrow on or off.(See page 44.)
Touch to set the display of thename of the road currently beingtravelled on to on or off. (Seepage 44.)
Touch to set the display of sign-posts on or off. (See page 44.)
Touch to set the display of thelane recommendation on or off.(See page 44.)
Touch to set the display of thetraffic message icons on or off.(See page 44.)
INFORMATION
● The current setting of each item is dis-played on its right.
● Selected item’s checkboxes will change
to when the item has beenselected. All selected items will be acti-vated simultaneously.
62
5. NAVIGATION SETTING
Display audio_U_2nd
1 Touch “POIs on Map” on the “MapSettings” screen.
2 Select the POI categories.
On this screen, the following functions canbe operated.
3 Touch .
1 Touch “Vehicle Icons” on the “MapSettings” screen.
2 Touch the desired icon.
3 Touch .
POIs ON MAP
POI categories displayed on the mapcan be selected.
No. Function
Touch to display all categories.
Touch to hide all icons.
Touch to display the selectedicons.
INFORMATION
● The system can display both genericand branded POI icons. (See page 29.)
VEHICLE ICONS
The vehicle icon can be changed.
63
5. NAVIGATION SETTING
2
APPLIC
ATIO
N-“M
ap”
Display audio_U_2nd
1 Touch “Day/Night Mode” on the “MapSettings” screen.
2 Touch the desired item.
“Automatic”: Touch to change the screento day or night mode depending on the po-sition of the headlight switch.“Day”: Touch to always display the map inday mode.“Night”: Touch to always display the mapin night mode.
3 Touch .
1 Touch “Arrival Information” on the“Map Settings” screen.
2 Touch the desired item.
“Off”: Touch to turn off the estimated time/distance.“Arrival Time/Distance”: Touch to dis-play the arrival time in the upper right areaof the map. The distance to the destinationwill also be displayed.“Remaining Time/Distance”: Touch todisplay the remaining time to reach thedestination in the upper right area of themap. The distance to the destination willalso be displayed.
3 Touch .
DAY/NIGHT MODE
The screen can be changed to daymode or night mode.
INFORMATION
● If set to “Automatic”, the “Day Mode”setting on the “Display Settings” screen(See page 201.) will take priority.
ARRIVAL INFORMATION
The estimated time to the destinationcan be changed between arrival time/distance and remaining time/distance.It can also be turned off.
64
5. NAVIGATION SETTING
Display audio_U_2nd
2. ROUTE SETTINGS
1 Touch “Dest” on the map.
2 Touch “Route Options”.
The “Route Options” screen can be dis-
played by touching on any of the“Navigation” screens.
3 Touch “Preferences” on the “RouteOptions” screen.
4 Touch the desired item.
“Route Type”: Touch to select the routetype between “Fast Route”, “ShortRoute” and “Ecological Route”.“Show Route Alternatives”: Touch todisplay 3 routes (fastest, shortest and eco-logical) on the map after a route calcula-tion.
“Make a Round Trip”: Touch to have theroute automatically calculated back to thestarting point after the set destination hasbeen reached.
Entered waypoints will also be consideredon the way back to the starting point.
5 Touch .
SETTING THE ROUTE OPTIONS
SETTING THE ROUTE CALCULATION
The route preferences for the route cal-culation can be set.
INFORMATION
● “Show Route Alternatives” and“Make a Round Trip” are not select-able at the same time.
65
5. NAVIGATION SETTING
2
APPLIC
ATIO
N-“M
ap”
Display audio_U_2nd
1 Touch “Dest” on the map.
2 Touch “Route Options”.
The “Route Options” screen can be dis-
played by touching on any of the“Navigation” screens.
3 Touch “Avoid” on the “Route Options”screen.
4 Touch the desired item.
“Avoid Freeways”: Touch to avoid free-ways.“Avoid Toll Roads”: Touch to avoid tollroads.“Avoid Tunnels”: Touch to avoid tunnels.“Avoid Ferries”: Touch to avoid ferries.“Avoid Border Crossings”: Touch toavoid border crossings.
5 Touch .
SETTING THE AVOIDANCE CRITERIA FOR THE ROUTE CALCULATION
The avoidance criteria for the route cal-culation can be set.
66
Display audio_U_2nd
6. NAVIGATION SYSTEM INFORMATION
1. LIMITATIONS OF THE NAVIGATION SYSTEM
The Global Positioning System (GPS) de-veloped and operated by the U.S. Depart-ment of Defense provides an accuratecurrent vehicle position, normally using 4or more satellites, and in some case 3 sat-ellites. The GPS system has a certain levelof inaccuracy. While the navigation systemwill compensate for this most of the time,occasional positioning errors of up to 300feet (100 m) can and should be expected.Generally, position errors will be correctedwithin a few seconds.
The GPS signal may be physically ob-structed, leading to inaccurate vehicle po-sition on the map display. Tunnels, tallbuildings, trucks, or even the placement ofobjects on the instrument panel may ob-struct the GPS signals.The GPS satellites may not send signalsdue to repairs or improvements beingmade to them.
Even when the navigation system is re-ceiving clear GPS signals, the vehicle po-sition may not be shown accurately orinappropriate route guidance may occur insome cases.
Accurate current vehicle position may notbe shown in the following cases:• When driving on a small angled Y-
shaped road.• When driving on a winding road.• When driving on a slippery road such as
in sand, gravel, snow, etc.• When driving on a long straight road.• When motorway and surface streets run
in parallel.• After moving by ferry or vehicle carrier.• When a long route is searched during
high speed driving.• When driving without setting the current
position calibration correctly.• After repeating a change of direction by
going forward and backward, or turningon a turntable in the parking lot.
• When leaving a covered parking lot orparking garage.
• When a roof carrier is installed.• When driving with tire chains installed.• When the tires are worn.• After replacing a tire or tires.• When using tires that are smaller or
larger than the factory specifications.• When the tire pressure in any of the four
tires is not correct.
This navigation system calculates thecurrent vehicle position using satellitesignals, various vehicle signals, mapdata, etc. However, an accurate posi-tion may not be shown depending onsatellite condition, road configuration,vehicle condition or other circumstanc-es.
NOTICE
● The installation of window tinting mayobstruct the GPS signals. Most windowtinting contains some metallic contentthat will interfere with GPS signal recep-tion of the antenna. We advise againstthe use of window tinting on vehiclesequipped with navigation systems.
67
6. NAVIGATION SYSTEM INFORMATION
2
APPLIC
ATIO
N-“M
ap”
Display audio_U_2nd
Inappropriate route guidance may occur inthe following cases:• When turning at an intersection off the
designated route guidance.• If you set more than one destination but
skip one of them, auto reroute will dis-play a route returning to the destinationthat was skipped.
• When turning at an intersection for whichthere is no route guidance.
• When passing through an intersectionfor which there is no route guidance.
• During auto reroute, the route guidancemay not be available for the next turn tothe right or left.
• It may take a long time to operate autoreroute during high speed driving. Inauto reroute, a detour route may beshown.
• After auto reroute, the route may not bechanged.
• An unnecessary U-turn may be shown orannounced.
• A location may have multiple names andthe system will announce one or more.
• Some routes may not be searched.• If the route to your destination includes
gravel, unpaved roads or alleys, theroute guidance may not be shown.
• Your destination point might be shownon the opposite side of the street.
• When a portion of the route has regula-tions prohibiting the entry of the vehiclethat vary by time or season or other rea-sons.
• The road and map data stored in thenavigation system may not be completeor may not be the latest version.
INFORMATION
● This navigation system uses tire turningdata and is designed to work with fac-tory-specified tires for the vehicle.Installing tires that are larger or smallerthan the originally equipped diametermay cause inaccurate display of the cur-rent vehicle position. The tire pressurealso affects the diameter of the tires somake sure the tire pressure of all fourtires is correct.
68
6. NAVIGATION SYSTEM INFORMATION
Display audio_U_2nd
2. MAP INFORMATION
END-USER TERMSThe data (“Data”) is provided for yourpersonal, internal use only and not forresale. It is protected by copyright, andis subject to the following terms andconditions which are agreed to by you,on the one hand, and Harman(“Harman”) and its licensors (includingtheir licensors and suppliers) on theother hand.© 2011 NAVTEQ B.V., © Bundesamtfür Eich- und Vermessungswesen, ©EuroGeographics, source: © IGN 2009– BD TOPO®, Die Grundlagendatenwurden mitGenehmigung der zustaendigenBehoerden entnommen, ContainsOrdnance Survey data © Crowncopyright and database right 2010Contains Royal Mail data © Royal Mailcopyright and database right 2010,Copyright Geomatics Ltd., Copyright ©2003; Top-Map Ltd., La Banca DatiItaliana è stata prodotta usando qualeriferimento anche cartografia numericaed al tratto prodotta e fornita dallaRegione Toscana., Copyright © 2000;Norwegian Mapping Authority, Source:IgeoE – Portugal, Informacióngeográfica propiedad del CNIG, Basedupon electronic data Ó National LandSurvey Sweden., TopografischeGrundlage: Ó Bundesamt fürLandestopographie.. All rightsreserved.
TERMS AND CONDITIONSPLEASE READ THIS END USERLICENSE AGREEMENTCAREFULLY BEFORE USING THENAVTEQ DATABASENOTICE TO THE USERTHIS IS A LICENSE AGREEMENT -AND NOT AN AGREEMENT FORSALE – BETWEEN YOU ANDNAVTEQ B.V. FOR YOUR COPY OFTHE NAVTEQ NAVIGABLE MAPDATA-BASE, INCLUDINGASSOCIATED COMPUTERSOFTWARE, MEDIA ANDEXPLANATORY PRINTEDDOCUMENTATION PUBLISHED BYNAVTEQ (JOINTLY “THEDATABASE”). BY USING THEDATABASE, YOU ACCEPT ANDAGREE TO ALL TERMS ANDCONDITIONS OF THIS END USERLICENSE AGREEMENT(“AGREEMENT”). IF YOU DO NOTAGREE TO THE TERMS OF THISAGREEMENT, PROMPTLY RETURNTHE DATABASE, ALONG WITH ALLOTHER ACCOMPANYING ITEMS,TO YOUR SUP-PLIER FOR AREFUND.OWNERSHIPThe Database and the copyrights andintellectual property or neighboringrights therein are owned by NAVTEQor its licensors. Ownership of the mediaon which the Database is contained isretained by NAVTEQ and/or yoursupplier until after you have paid in fullany amounts due to NAVTEQ and/oryour supplier pursuant to thisAgreement or similar agreement(s)under which goods are provided to you.
69
6. NAVIGATION SYSTEM INFORMATION
2
APPLIC
ATIO
N-“M
ap”
Display audio_U_2nd
LICENSE GRANTNAVTEQ grants you a non-exclusivelicense to use the Database for yourpersonal use or, if applicable, for use inyour business’ internal operations. Thislicense does not include the right togrant sub-licenses.LIMITATIONS ON USEThe Database is restricted for use inthe specific system for which it wascreated. Except to the extent explicitlypermitted by mandatory laws (e.g.national laws based on the EuropeanSoftware Directive (91/250) and theDatabase Directive (96/9)), you maynot extract or reutilize substantial partsof the contents of the Database norreproduce, copy, modify, adapt,translate, disassemble, decompile,reverse engineer any portion of theDatabase. If you wish to obtaininteroperability information as meant in(the national laws based on) theEuropean Software Directive, you shallgrant NAVTEQ reasonable opportunityto provide said information onreasonable terms, including costs, tobe determined by NAVTEQ.TRANSFER OF LICENSE You may not transfer the Database tothird parties, except when installed inthe system for which it was created orwhen you do not retain any copy of theDatabase, and provided that thetransferee agrees to all terms andconditions of this Agreement andconfirms this in writing to NAVTEQ.Multi-disc sets may only be transferredor sold as a complete set as providedby NAVTEQ and not as subset thereof.
LIMITED WARRANTYNAVTEQ warrants that, subject to thewarnings set out below, for a period of12 months after acquisition of yourcopy of the Database, it will performsubstantially in accordance withNAVTEQ’s Criteria for Accuracy andCompleteness existing on the date youacquired the Database; these criteriaare available from NAVTEQ at yourrequest. If the Database does notperform in accordance with this limitedwarranty, NAVTEQ will use reasonableefforts to repair or replace your non-conforming copy of the Database. Ifthese efforts do not lead toperformance of the Database inaccordance with the warranties set outherein, you will have the option to eitherreceive a reasonable refund of theprice you paid for the Database or torescind this Agreement. This shall beNAVTEQ’s entire liability and your soleremedy against NAVTEQ. Except asexpressly provided in this section,NAVTEQ does not warrant nor makeany representations regarding the useof results of the use of the Database interms of its correctness, accuracy,reliability, or otherwise. NAVTEQ doesnot warrant that the Database is or willbe error free. No oral or writteninformation or advice provided byNAVTEQ, your supplier or any otherperson shall create a warranty or in anyway increase the scope of the limitedwarranty described above. The limitedwarranty set forth in this Agreementdoes not affect or prejudice anystatutory legal rights that you may haveunder the legal warranty againsthidden defects.
70
6. NAVIGATION SYSTEM INFORMATION
Display audio_U_2nd
If you did not acquire the Databasefrom NAVTEQ directly, you may havestatutory rights against the person fromwhom you have acquired the Databasein addition to the rights granted byNAVTEQ hereunder according to thelaw of your jurisdiction. The abovewarranty of NAVTEQ shall not affectsuch statutory rights and you mayassert such rights in addition to thewarranty rights granted herein.LIMITATION OF LIABILITYThe price of the Database does notinclude any consideration forassumption of risk of consequential,indirect or unlimited direct damageswhich may arise in connection withyour use of the Database. Accordingly,in no event shall NAVTEQ be liable forany consequential or indirect damages,including without limitation, loss ofrevenue, data, or use, incurred by youor any third party arising out of your useof the Database, whether in an action incontract or tort or based on a warranty,even if NAVTEQ has been advised ofthe possibility of such damages. In anyevent NAVTEQ’s liability for directdamages is limited to the price of yourcopy of the Database.THE LIMITED WARRANTY ANDLIMITATION OF LIABILITY, SETFORTH IN THIS AGREE-MENT, DONOT AFFECT OR PREJUDICE YOURSTATUTORY RIGHTS WHERE YOUHAVE ACQUIRED THE DATABASEOTHERWISE THAN IN THE COURSEOF A BUSINESS.
WARNINGSThe Database may contain inaccurateor incomplete information due to thepassage of time, changingcircumstances, sources used and thenature of collecting comprehensivegeographic data, any of which maylead to incorrect results. The Databasedoes not include or reflect informationon - inter alia - neighborhood safety;law enforcement; emergencyassistance; construction work; road orlane closures; vehicle or speedrestrictions; road slope or grade; bridgeheight, weight or other limits; road ortraffic conditions; special events; trafficcongestion; or travel time.GOVERNING LAWThis Agreement shall be governed bythe laws of the jurisdiction, in which youreside at the date of acquisition of theDatabase. Should you at that momentreside outside the European Union orSwitzerland, the law of the jurisdictionwithin the European Union orSwitzerland where you acquired theDatabase shall apply. In all othercases, or if the jurisdiction where youacquired the Database cannot bedefined, the laws of the Netherlandsshall apply. The courts competent atyour place of residence at the time youacquired the Database shall havejurisdiction over any dispute arising outof, or relating to this Agreement,without prejudice to NAVTEQ’ right tobring claims at your then current placeof residence.
3
71
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Display audio_U_2nd
1. QUICK REFERENCE..................... 72
2. PICTURE SLIDESHOW................. 73DISPLAYING THE PICTURES.............. 73PLAYING PICTURE SLIDESHOWS ..... 74
3. EMAIL ............................................ 75NEW EMAIL NOTIFICATION
POP-UP WINDOW.............................. 75CHECKING EMAIL................................ 75
4. CALENDAR ................................... 77CHECKING CALENDAR ....................... 77
1. ENTUNE SERVICE ....................... 78BEFORE USING ENTUNE .................... 78AVAILABILITY OF SERVICE................. 79INITIALIZING PERSONAL DATA .......... 80
2. OPERATING NAVIGATION FUNCTION USING ENTUNE SERVICE..................................... 81
ONLINE SEARCH.................................. 81FUEL PRICES ....................................... 83TRAFFIC MESSAGES........................... 84LOADING SAVED DESTINATIONS
FROM A PHONE................................. 89
3. OPERATING AN APPLICATION USING ENTUNE SERVICE......... 91
OPERATING AN APPLICATION ........... 91IF A MESSAGE APPEARS ON
THE SCREEN ..................................... 92
1 APPLICATIONS OPERATION 2 ENTUNE SERVICE
APPLICATION-THE OTHERS
72
Display audio_U_2nd
1. APPLICATIONS OPERATION
1. QUICK REFERENCE
“Applications” menu screen
The actual design and button position will differ depending on the vehicle and avail-ability of Entune. Some buttons will be in different positions or not shown. For details,refer to vehicle “Owner’s Manual”.
The navigation application and several other applications can be accessed bypressing the “APPS” button.When the “APPS” button is pressed, the “Applications” menu screen that was last
displayed is returned to. Touch to display the “Applications” menu screen.
No. Function Page
Press to display a list of applications.
Touch to access the applications. 81, 83, 91
Touch to view pictures stored on a USB memory. 73
Touch to display the connected phone’s Emails. 75
Touch to access the connected phone’s calendar, tasks and notes. 77
Touch to close the applications. 91
Touch to shift to the next or previous page.
73
3
APPLIC
ATIO
N-TH
E OTH
ERS
1. APPLICATIONS OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
2. PICTURE SLIDESHOW
1 Open the cover of the USB/AUX portand connect a USB memory.
The USB/AUX port is located on theinstrument panel, or in the console box orglove box etc. The actual design and but-ton position will differ depending on thevehicle. For details, refer to vehicle“Owner’s Manual”.
2 Press the “APPS” button to displaythe “Applications” menu screen.
If the “Applications” menu screen is not
displayed, touch until it is dis-played.
3 Touch “Pictures”.
4 The slideshow starts automatically.
: Touch to stop the slideshow.
When the vehicle is stopped, picturesstored on a USB memory can beviewed.
INFORMATION
● Images cannot be viewed while driving.● When the vehicle starts moving while
viewing pictures, a pop-up window willbe displayed and pictures cannot be dis-played. Touch “Previous” to return tothe previous screen.
● Available image data format: JPEG,PNG and BMP
DISPLAYING THE PICTURES
INFORMATION
● All readable pictures on the device aredisplayed in chronological order. Theslideshow will repeat when it is finished.
● The pictures will be changed every fewseconds.
74
1. APPLICATIONS OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
1 Touch “Show”.
2 Operating switches will be displayed.
“Hide”: Touch to close the slideshow op-tions.
: Touch to pause the slideshow.
: Touch to play the slideshowagain.
: Touch to display the previouspicture.
: Touch to display the next pic-ture.
PLAYING PICTURE SLIDESHOWS
A slideshow can be played, paused,and desired images can be selected.
INFORMATION
● When the slideshow is playing, thepause and skip screen buttons disap-pear automatically after a few seconds.
75
3
APPLIC
ATIO
N-TH
E OTH
ERS
1. APPLICATIONS OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
3. EMAIL
1 Press the “APPS” button to displaythe “Applications” menu screen.
If the “Applications” menu screen is not
displayed, touch until it is dis-played.
2 Touch “Emails”.
When the downloading of an Email hasbeen completed, the mail list will be dis-played.
3 Touch the desired Email.
Incoming Emails to a connectedBluetooth® phone can be downloaded.Before using this application, connecta Bluetooth® phone with a phoneprofile. (See page 204.)
INFORMATION
● The Email feature relies on the capabil-ity of the specific phone. On mostphones the transfer capability is notenabled in the correct format to workwith the Entune system.
● Emails cannot be sent using this func-tion.
● Downloading may not complete cor-rectly if the engine switch is turned offduring downloading.
NEW EMAIL NOTIFICATION POP-UP WINDOW
When a new Email is received, a pop-upwindow is displayed on the screen.
This function can be set to “On” or“Off”. (See page 213.)
CHECKING EMAIL
76
1. APPLICATIONS OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
The state of an Email is shown by the fol-lowing icons.
: Unread mail
: Read mail
: Important mail
4 The text of the Email is displayed.
: Touch to have the Email read out.
To cancel this function, touch .
77
3
APPLIC
ATIO
N-TH
E OTH
ERS
1. APPLICATIONS OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
4. CALENDAR
1 Press the “APPS” button to displaythe “Applications” menu screen.
If the “Applications” menu screen is not
displayed, touch until it is dis-played.
2 Touch “Calendar”.
When the downloading of the calendar iscomplete, the current day’s calendarentries will be displayed.
3 When a displayed schedule entry istouched, the entry’s detailed informa-tion is displayed.
: Touch to display the previous day’sschedule.
: Touch to display the following day’sschedule.
: Touch to display the current day’stasks.
: Touch to display the notes.
Calendar entries, tasks and notes froma connected Bluetooth® phone can bedownloaded. Before using thisapplication, connect a Bluetooth®
phone with a phone profile. (See page204.)
INFORMATION
● This function may not be availabledepending on the phone.
● Calendar entries cannot be edited usingthis function.
● Downloading may not complete cor-rectly if the engine switch is turned offduring downloading.
CHECKING CALENDAR
78
Display audio_U_2nd
2. ENTUNE SERVICE
1. ENTUNE SERVICE*
1 Perform user registration from the des-ignated web address in the guidanceemail or go to http://www.toyota.comand follow the Entune registrationlinks.
1 Download the Entune application usingyour cellular phone.
2 Run the Entune application on yourcellular phone.
3 Enter a user name and password intothe Entune application on your cellularphone.
BEFORE USING ENTUNE
USER REGISTRATION
When purchasing the vehicle, an emailaddress is registered at your Toyotadealer. If your email address was notregistered at your Toyota dealer, youremail address can be registered at theEntune website. A user registrationguidance email containing a web ad-dress will be sent.
*: Entune is available in the 48 states, D.C. and Alaska.
REGISTERING THE DOWNLOADED ENTUNE APPLICATION
79
2. ENTUNE SERVICE
3
APPLIC
ATIO
N-TH
E OTH
ERS
Display audio_U_2nd
Entune is available in the 48 states,D.C. and Alaska.
INFORMATION
● If your email address was not registeredat your Toyota dealer when the vehiclewas purchased, an email address canbe registered at http://www.toyota.com/entune/.
● Entune operational procedures can alsobe confirmed by visiting http://www.toyota.com/entune/.
● This system supports the following ser-vice.• Bluetooth® Specification
Ver.1.1 or higher (Recommended: Ver.2.1 + EDR orhigher)
• ProfilesHFP (Hands Free Profile)Ver.1.0 or higher(Recommended: Ver.1.5 or higher)DUN (Dial-Up Networking Profile)Ver.1.1 or higherPAN (Personal Area Network)Ver. 1.0PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile)Ver.1.0 or higherSPP (Serial Port Profile)MAP (Message Access Profile)
• ApplicationPIM (Personal Information Manager)
● If your cellular phone does not supportHFP, you cannot register the Bluetooth®
phone, or use DUN/PAN or PBAP pro-files individually.
● If the connected Bluetooth® phone ver-sion is older than recommended orincompatible, this function may not beused.
AVAILABILITY OF SERVICE
INFORMATION
● When using Entune, depending on thedetails of your cellular phone contract,data usage fees may apply. Confirmdata usage fees before using this ser-vice.
● In this section, the required operationsto activate application, connect a cellularphone to the navigation system andregistration steps for Entune areexplained. For details regarding Entuneoperations and each of the application,refer to http://www.toyota.com/entune/.
80
2. ENTUNE SERVICE
Display audio_U_2nd
The following personal data can bedeleted and returned to their default set-tings:• Downloaded contents• Radio stations that were listened to• Input history
INITIALIZING PERSONAL DATA
The personal data used in applicationcan be reset. (See “DELETE PER-SONAL DATA” on page 199.)
INFORMATION
● Once initialized, data will be erased. Payclose attention when initializing the data.
81
3
APPLIC
ATIO
N-TH
E OTH
ERS
2. ENTUNE SERVICE
Display audio_U_2nd
2. OPERATING NAVIGATION FUNCTION USING ENTUNE SERVICE
1 Touch “Dest” on the map.
2 Touch “Enter Destination”.
The “Enter Destination” screen can be dis-
played by touching on any of the“Navigation” screens.
3 Touch “POI” on the “Enter Destina-tion” screen.
4 Touch “Online Search by Xxxx”.
Online search can be entered on the“Applications” menu screen.
5 Touch “Search Area”.
6 Select the desired search area.
“At Current Position”: Touch to definethe area at the current position.“Define City”: Touch to define the area bycity name. Input the city name and thentouch “OK”.“From Map”: Touch to define the area onmap. Touch the desired city on the mapand then touch “Select”.“At Destination”: Touch to define thearea around the main destination. Whenroute guidance is not in use, “At Destina-tion” cannot be selected.
ONLINE SEARCH
A destination can be selected via on-line search.Before using this function, connect aBluetooth® phone with an internet pro-file. (See page 204.)
82
2. ENTUNE SERVICE
Display audio_U_2nd
7 Touch “Enter Search Word”.
8 Input the search word and then touch“OK”.
9 The search results will be displayed.Touch the desired item.
Up to 20 items will be searched when per-forming an online search.
“Previous Results”: Touch to display theprevious result.“Next Results”: Touch to display the nextresult.
10Touch “Calculate”.
“Details”: Touch to display the details ofthe point information.
: Touch to call the registered tele-phone number.
11The starting route guidance screen willbe displayed. (See page 42.)
INFORMATION
● The color of indicates if online con-nection is active or not. After a timeoutof 1 minute, an active online connectionwill automatically be terminated.
83
2. ENTUNE SERVICE
3
APPLIC
ATIO
N-TH
E OTH
ERS
Display audio_U_2nd
1 Touch “Dest” on the map.
2 Touch “Enter Destination”.
The “Enter Destination” screen can be dis-
played by touching on any of the“Navigation” screens.
3 Touch “POI” on the “Enter Destina-tion” screen.
4 Touch “Fuel Prices” on the “POI”screen.
5 Touch for the desired item.
On this screen, the following functions canbe operated.
If you touch the desired item, the startingroute guidance screen will be displayeddirectly. (See page 42.)
6 Touch “Calculate”.
7 The starting route guidance screen willbe displayed. (See page 42.)
FUEL PRICES
It enables the navigation system to dis-play current fuel prices and gas stationlocations, which can be set as a desti-nation if desired.Before using this function, connect aBluetooth® phone with an internet pro-file. (See page 204.)
No. Function
Touch to display search result listsorted by company brand.
Touch to display search result listsorted by the price.
Touch to display search result listsorted by the distance.
Touch to select the desired fueltype.
When “Save” is touched, the point isregistered in the “Stored” list on the “MyDestinations” screen. (See page 54.)
When is touched, the registeredtelephone number is called.
84
2. ENTUNE SERVICE
Display audio_U_2nd
1 Touch “Dest” on the map.
2 Touch “Traffic Messages”.
The “Traffic Messages” screen can be dis-
played by touching on any of the“Navigation” screens or “Traffic” on the“Applications” menu screen.
3 Touch “On Route”, “Show All” or“Warnings” to select the desired list.
“On Route”: During route guidance, thetraffic messages relating to the set routewill be displayed.“Show All”: All traffic messages will bedisplayed.“Warnings”: Traffic messages with warn-ings will be displayed.
4 Touch the desired message.
TRAFFIC MESSAGES
It contains a list of traffic messages re-lating to the set route, all traffic mes-sages and warnings.Before using this function, connect aBluetooth® phone with an internet pro-file. (See page 204.)
DISPLAYING TRAFFIC MESSAGES
85
2. ENTUNE SERVICE
3
APPLIC
ATIO
N-TH
E OTH
ERS
Display audio_U_2nd
On this screen, the following information isdisplayed.
5 The traffic message will be displayed.
or : Touch to display next or pre-vious traffic message.
: Touch to have the traffic messageread out. To cancel this function, touch
.“More”: Touch to display all messages.
■LIST OF TRAFFIC MESSAGEICONS
No. Information
Street number
Route segmentIf route segment is not available,information such as street name,city name, region or country willbe displayed.
: Icon of an incident
: Icon of an incident on theroute
: Icon of an incident on thedetoured route
Distance to incident
Icon Name
Slippery
Bad weather
Wind
Snow fall
Traffic
Heavy traffic
Accident
Road construction
Narrow track
Warning
Blockage
Security checkpoint
Information
86
2. ENTUNE SERVICE
Display audio_U_2nd
■DETOURING THE SEGMENT
1 Displaying the traffic information list.(See page 84.)
2 Touch “On Route” on the “TrafficMessages” screen.
3 Touch the desired segment to detour.
4 Touch “Detour”.
or : Touch to display the next orprevious message.
: Touch to have the traffic messageread out. To cancel this function, touch
.“More”: Touch to display all traffic mes-sages.
5 The route will be recalculated.The mark of the TMC on the “On Route”
screen changes into .
■CANCELLING THE DETOUREDSEGMENT
1 Touch the detoured segment on the“On Route” screen.
2 Touch “Detour Off”.
or : Touch to display the next orprevious message.
: Touch to have the traffic messageread out. To cancel this function, touch
.“More”: Touch to display all traffic mes-sages.
3 The route will be recalculated.The mark of the TMC on the “On Route”
screen changes to .
DETOURING A SEGMENT FROM A TRAFFIC MESSAGE LIST
If a traffic message relates to the routebeing travelled, the desired segmentcan be detoured.
87
2. ENTUNE SERVICE
3
APPLIC
ATIO
N-TH
E OTH
ERS
Display audio_U_2nd
■IF “Automatic” IS SELECTED
1 The following screen will be displayed.
2 The route will be recalculated automat-ically.
■IF “Manual” IS SELECTED
1 The following screen will be displayed.
“Consider”: Touch to display with the cur-rent route, the TMC event and the sug-gested detour.“Ignore”: Touch to ignore the message.
If “Consider” is selected
2 Touch “Ignore” or “Detour”.
“Ignore”: Touch to ignore the message.“Detour”: Touch to recalculate the route.
RECALCULATING THE ROUTE BY THE TRAFFIC MESSAGES
You will be informed about relevanttraffic messages on the route by a pop-up window.A pop-up window may differ dependingon the traffic message settings. (Seepage 89.)
88
2. ENTUNE SERVICE
Display audio_U_2nd
1 Touch “Dest” on the map.
2 Touch “Route Options”.
The “Route Options” screen can be dis-
played by touching on any of the“Navigation” screens.
3 Touch “Settings”.
Please refer to the following pages for adescription of each setting.
■SETTING “Radius Filter”
1 Touch “Radius Filter” on the “Set-tings” screen.
2 Touch desired item.
“Off”: Touch to deactivate the function.“6 mi” ~ “60 mi”: Touch to set the radiusfrom 6 miles to 60 miles.
3 Touch .
TRAFFIC MESSAGE SETTINGS
Once the radius filter has been set,only traffic messages within the radiuswill be displayed in the traffic messagelist.
89
2. ENTUNE SERVICE
3
APPLIC
ATIO
N-TH
E OTH
ERS
Display audio_U_2nd
■SETTING “Dynamic Reroute”
1 Touch “Dynamic Reroute” on the“Settings” screen.
2 Touch the desired item.
“Off”: Touch to disable receiving trafficmessages and no reroute will be calculat-ed.“Automatic”: Touch to enable relevanttraffic messages on the route to be dis-played as a pop-up window and activateautomatic reroute calculation.“Manual”: Touch to enable relevant trafficmessages on the route to be displayed asa pop-up window but disable automatic re-route calculation. The user decides if re-route calculation is desirable or not.
3 Touch .
1 Touch “Dest” on the map.
2 Touch “Enter Destination”.
The “Enter Destination” screen can be dis-
played by touching on any of the“Navigation” screens.
3 Touch “Advanced” on the “Enter Des-tination” screen.
4 Touch “Load Saved Destinationsfrom Phone”.
When the cost warning or roaming warn-ing screen is displayed, touch “Con-tinue”. This function can be set to on oroff. (See page 212.)
The method of reroute can be set.
LOADING SAVED DESTINATIONS FROM A PHONE
Addresses and numbers will be storedin the “Stored” list on the “My Destina-tions” screen and “Contacts” screen.(See pages 52 and 163.)
90
2. ENTUNE SERVICE
Display audio_U_2nd
5 The following screen will be displayedwhen loading is complete.
6 The entry is registered in the “Stored”list on the “My Destinations” screenand “Contacts” screen. (See pages 52and 163.)
NOTICE
● Do not turn off the engine while down-loading.
INFORMATION
● If a message similar to the one below isdisplayed, delete X item(s) in the“Stored” list on the “My Destinations”screen and “Contacts” screen to makeroom for the new destination(s). (Seepages 56 and 166.)
91
3
APPLIC
ATIO
N-TH
E OTH
ERS
2. ENTUNE SERVICE
Display audio_U_2nd
3. OPERATING AN APPLICATION USING ENTUNE SERVICE
■OPENING AN APPLICATION
1 Press the “APPS” button to displaythe “Applications” menu screen.
If the “Applications” menu screen is not
displayed, touch until it is dis-played.
2 Touch the desired application.
When the cost warning or roaming warn-ing screen is displayed, touch “Con-tinue”. This function can be set to on oroff. (See page 212.)
Several downloaded applications can beopened at the same time and the desiredapplication can be selected.
is displayed on the left side of applica-tion names that are currently open.
3 The application is opened.
(on some applications): Touch to up-date the data
■CLOSING AN APPLICATION
1 Touch .
2 Touch “Close” on the right side of theapplication to be closed.
: Touch to display the application in-formation.
OPERATING AN APPLICATION
Before using applications, connect theBluetooth® phone with an internetprofile. (See page 204.) If a Bluetooth®
connection with an internet profile isnot currently active, applications will bedimmed.
OPENING/CLOSING AN APPLICATION
92
2. ENTUNE SERVICE
Display audio_U_2nd
IF A MESSAGE APPEARS ON THE SCREEN
When problems occur starting up the application player, a message will appear onthe screen. Referring to the table below to identify the problem, take the suggestedcorrective action.
Message Display conditions Corrective action
“Connection has failed.” Bluetooth® connectionhas failed.
Please check your Bluetooth® settingson your phone and confirm your device ispaired to the system.Refer to http://www.toyota.com/entune/to confirm if the phone is compatible ornot.
“Connection has failed.Please ensure that theEntune app is runningon your device.”
Entune app connectioncannot be established.
Please check that your Entune app isrunning and logged in with correct logincredentials on your device.If you manually “Disconnect” from yourvehicle on your Entune app on yourdevice, you may need to touch “Connectto Vehicle” on your Entune app Optionsto recover connection to vehicle.For Apple users:Do not use “Connect for Internet”.Instead attach your Apple USB DockConnector (aka charging cable) to thevehicles USB port to access internetfunctions.
“User Login InformationIncorrect.”
Entune login credentialsare incorrect for the ser-vice.
Please check that your Entune app islogged in with the correct credentials forthe system.
“Search Provider notavailable.”
Data connection wasdisconnected.
After a few moments, retry the operation.If unsuccessful, please confirm your de-vice is paired and connected to the sys-tem.Refer to http://www.toyota.com/entune/to confirm if the phone is compatible ornot.
“Service Provider un-available.Please check your In-ternet connection.”
Data connection wasdisconnected.
After a few moments, retry the operation.If unsuccessful, please confirm your de-vice is paired and connected to the sys-tem.Refer to http://www.toyota.com/entune/to confirm if the phone is compatible ornot.
93
2. ENTUNE SERVICE
3
APPLIC
ATIO
N-TH
E OTH
ERS
Display audio_U_2nd
94
Display audio_U_2nd
1. QUICK REFERENCE .................... 96
2. SOME BASICS.............................. 98TURNING THE AUDIO SYSTEM
ON OR OFF......................................... 98CONTROLS USING THE
“TUNE SCROLL” KNOB...................... 99SWITCHING AUDIO SOURCE.............. 99DSP CONTROL ................................... 100TONE AND BALANCE......................... 101
3. RADIO OPERATION ................... 102SWITCHING TO RADIO MODE........... 102PRESETTING A STATION .................. 102SELECTING A STATION..................... 103RADIO BROADCAST DATA
SYSTEM ............................................ 103TRAFFIC ANNOUNCEMENT .............. 104USING HD Radio™ TECHNOLOGY.... 105
1 AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
4
95
1
2
3
4
5
6
Display audio_U_2nd
7
8
9
4. RADIO OPERATION (XM® Satellite Radio BROADCAST) ........................... 108
HOW TO SUBSCRIBE TO AN XM® Satellite Radio .................... 108
DISPLAYING THE RADIO ID.............. 108SWITCHING TO SATELLITE
RADIO MODE................................... 109CHANNEL CATEGORY ...................... 109PRESETTING A CHANNEL ................ 109SELECTING A CHANNEL................... 110DISPLAYING THE TITLE AND
NAME................................................ 110IF THE SATELLITE RADIO
TUNER MALFUNCTIONS ................ 111
5. CD PLAYER OPERATION .......... 113INSERTING OR EJECTING A DISC... 113SWITCHING TO CD MODE ................ 114PLAYING AN AUDIO CD .................... 114PLAYING A MP3/WMA DISC.............. 116
6. USB MEMORY/iPod OPERATION.............................. 119
CONNECTING A USB MEMORY OR iPod ................................................... 119
SWITCHING TO USB OR iPod MODE ....................................... 120
PLAYING A USB MEMORY OR iPod ................................................... 120
7. AUX DEVICE OPERATION......... 126CONNECTING A PORTABLE
AUDIO DEVICE................................. 126SWITCHING TO AUX MODE .............. 127PLAYING A PORTABLE
AUDIO DEVICE................................. 127
8. Bluetooth® AUDIO OPERATION ............................. 128
SWITCHING TO Bluetooth® AUDIO MODE ................................... 130
CONNECTING Bluetooth® AUDIO ...... 130PLAYING Bluetooth® AUDIO............... 134
9. STEERING SWITCHES............... 138STEERING SWITCHES
(WITH TWO DIRECTION STEERING SWITCH)........................ 138
STEERING SWITCHES (WITH FOUR DIRECTION STEERING SWITCH)........................ 139
10. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATING HINTS........................................ 141
RADIO RECEPTION............................ 141iPod...................................................... 142USB MEMORY .................................... 143CARING FOR YOUR CD PLAYER
AND DISCS....................................... 143MP3/WMA FILES................................. 145CD-R AND CD-RW DISCS .................. 146TERMS ................................................ 147Gracenote® .......................................... 148
AUDIO SYSTEM
96
Display audio_U_2nd
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
1. QUICK REFERENCE
The actual design and button position will differ depending on the vehicle. Some but-tons will be in different positions or not shown. For details, refer to vehicle “Owner’sManual”.
To access the audio system, press the “AUDIO” button. The audio system turnson in the last mode used.
No. Name Function Page
Audio controlscreen
A selected audio source is displayed, and it canbe operated with the touch screen controls.
Disc slot Insert a disc into this slot. The CD player turns onimmediately. 113
“Source” Touch to select your desired audio sources. Theaudio source selection screen will be displayed. 99
“TUNE SCROLL”knob
Turn to select radio station bands, tracks andfiles. Also, the knob can be used for selectionfrom the list display.
99
“AUDIO” button Press to display the audio control screen. The au-dio system turns on in the last mode used. 98, 99
button* Press to pause or resume playing the music.
97
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
4
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display audio_U_2nd
*: If equipped
“SEEK/TRACK”button
Press the “ ” or “ ” button to seek up or down fora station, or to access a desired track or file.
103, 110, 115, 117, 120, 134
“PWR VOL” knob Press to turn the audio system on and off, andturn to adjust the volume. 98
button Press to eject a disc. 113
No. Name Function Page
98
Display audio_U_2nd
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
2. SOME BASICS
“AUDIO” button: Press this button to dis-play screen buttons for the audio system.“PWR VOL” knob: Press this knob to turnthe audio system on and off. Turn thisknob to adjust the volume. The systemturns on in the last mode used.
This section describes some of the ba-sic features of the audio system. Someinformation may not pertain to yoursystem.Your audio system works when the en-gine switch is turned to the “ACC” or“ON” position.
CAUTION
● For vehicles sold in U.S.A. and Canada:Part 15 of the FCC RulesFCC Warning: Changes or modificationsin construction not expressly approvedby the party responsible for compliancecould void the user’s authority to operatethe equipment. Radio frequency expo-sure. This device is approved for MobileApplication only and, to comply withapplicable FCC radio frequency expo-sure regulations, must be used with adistance of at least 7.9 in. (20 cm)between the antenna and the body ofany person at all time during use.
● Laser products• Do not take this unit apart or attempt to
make any changes yourself. This is anintricate unit that uses a laser pickup toretrieve information from the surface ofcompact discs. The laser is carefullyshielded so that its rays remain insidethe cabinet. Therefore, never try to dis-assemble the player or alter any of itsparts since you may be exposed tolaser rays and dangerous voltages.
• This product utilizes a laser. Use ofcontrols or adjustments or perfor-mance of procedures other than thosespecified herein may result in hazard-ous radiation exposure.
NOTICE
● To prevent the 12-volt battery from beingdischarged, do not leave the audio sys-tem on longer than necessary when theengine is not running (hybrid vehicles:the hybrid system is off).
TURNING THE AUDIO SYSTEM ON OR OFF
INFORMATION
● If the volume is adjusted while music ispaused or muted, the pause or mute willbe cancelled.
99
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
4
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display audio_U_2nd
Radio modeRadio stations can be tuned in manuallyusing this knob.
Modes other than radioTracks, songs or files can be selected us-ing the knob.
When a list displayedWhen a list is displayed on the screen, turnthe “TUNE SCROLL” knob to move thecursor box to select a desired item fromthe list, and pressing the knob will play it.The track that is being played is highlight-ed.
1 Press the “AUDIO” button.
The audio system turns on in the lastmode used.
2 Touch “Source”.
3 Touch a desired audio source.
CONTROLS USING THE “TUNE SCROLL” KNOB
SWITCHING AUDIO SOURCE
INFORMATION
● You cannot select dimmed screen but-tons. Connect the audio device beforeselecting.
100
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
1 Press the “AUDIO” button.
2 Touch or .
USB memory/iPod and Bluetooth® au-dio modes
Modes other than USB memory/iPodand Bluetooth® audio
3 Touch the “DSP” tab to display thisscreen.
Without JBL sound system
With JBL sound system
4 Touch the desired screen button.
Without JBL sound system
1 Touch “High”, “Mid” or “Low” of“Automatic Sound Levelizer”.
2 Touch “OK”.
With JBL sound system
1 Touch “On” of “Automatic SoundLevelizer”.
2 Touch “OK”.
1 Touch “On” of “Surround”.
2 Touch “OK”.
DSP CONTROL
DSP control can be set from the“Options” screen. Touch “Options” andthen touch “Sound Settings” on thenext screen.
AUTOMATIC SOUND LEVELIZER (ASL)
The system adjusts to the optimum vol-ume and tone quality according to ve-hicle speed to compensate forincreased vehicle noise.
SURROUND FUNCTION (IF EQUIPPED)
101
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
4
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display audio_U_2nd
1 Press the “AUDIO” button.
2 Touch or .
USB memory/iPod and Bluetooth® au-dio modes
Modes other than USB memory/iPodand Bluetooth® audio
3 Touch the “Sound” tab to display thisscreen.
4 Touch the desired screen button.“Treble” “+” or “-”: To adjust high-pitched tones.“Mid” “+” or “-”: To adjust mid-pitchedtones.“Bass” “+” or “-”: To adjust low-pitchedtones.“Front” or “Rear”: To adjust the soundbalance between the front and rear speak-ers.“L” or “R”: To adjust the sound balancebetween the left and right speakers.
5 Touch “OK”.
TONE AND BALANCE
TONE
How good an audio program sounds islargely determined by the mix of thetreble, mid and bass levels. In fact, dif-ferent kinds of music and vocal pro-grams usually sound better withdifferent mixes of treble, mid and bass.
BALANCE
A good balance of the left and right ste-reo channels and of the front and rearsound levels is also important.Keep in mind that when listening to astereo recording or broadcast, chang-ing the right/left balance will increasethe volume of one group of soundswhile decreasing the volume of anoth-er.
Tone and balance can be set from the“Options” screen. Touch “Options” andthen touch “Sound Settings” on thenext screen.
INFORMATION
● The tone of each mode can be adjusted.
102
Display audio_U_2nd
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
3. RADIO OPERATION
1 Press the “AUDIO” button.
The audio system turns on in the lastmode used.
2 Touch “Source”.
3 Touch “AM” or “FM”.
1 Tune in the desired station.
2 Touch one of the left side screen but-tons (1-6) and hold it until a beep isheard. This sets the frequency to thescreen button. The station’s frequencywill be displayed in the screen button.
To change the preset station to a differentone, follow the same procedure.
Touch or to change the presetpage.
SWITCHING TO RADIO MODE PRESETTING A STATION
Radio mode has a mix preset function,which can store up to 36 stations (6station per page × 6 page) from any ofthe AM, FM or SAT bands.
103
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
4
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display audio_U_2nd
Preset tuning: Touch one of the mix pre-set channels on the left side of the screento select the desired station. The screenbutton is highlighted and the station fre-quency appears on the screen.Manual tuning: Search for a desired radiostation by turning the “TUNE SCROLL”knob.Seek tuning: Press the “ ” or “ ” buttonof “SEEK/TRACK”. The radio will beginseeking up or down for a station of thenearest frequency and will stop when astation is found. Each time the button ispressed, the stations will be searched au-tomatically one after another.To scan all the frequencies: Touch“SCAN”. “SCAN” will appear on thescreen. The radio will find the next stationand stay there for 10 seconds if “All” or“HD Only” is selected, or 5 seconds if“Analog” is selected, and then scanagain. To stay tuned to a station and stopthe scanning, touch “SCAN” again. (Toset the HD Radio™ system, see page214.)
1 Touch “Options”.
SELECTING A STATION
Tune in the desired station using one ofthe following methods.
RADIO BROADCAST DATA SYSTEM
This audio system is equipped with Ra-dio Broadcast Data Systems (RBDS).RBDS mode allows text messages tobe received from radio stations that uti-lize RBDS transmitters.When RBDS is on, the radio can— only select stations of a particularprogram type,— display messages from radio sta-tions,— search for a stronger signal station.RBDS features are available onlywhen listening to an FM station thatbroadcasts RBDS information and the“FM info” indicator is on.
SELECTING A DESIRED TYPE
104
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
2 Touch “TYPE >” or “< TYPE” to moveforward and backward through the pro-gram list.
Once a program type has been set,“TYPE SEEK” will appear on the screen.The program list is in the following order:• Classical• Country• EasyLis (Easy Listening)• Inform (Information)• Jazz• News• Oldies• Other• Pop Music• Religion• Rock• R&B (Rhythm and Blues)• Sports• Talk• Traffic (Not available when “HD Radio™
Settings” are set to analog)• Alert (Emergency Alert)
3 Touch “TYPE SEEK” and the systemwill start to seek for stations in the rele-vant program type.
“Traffic”: Touch to seek a traffic programstation. “TRAF SEEK” will appear on thescreen.
INFORMATION
● If no relevant program can be found, “notype” will appear on the screen.
TRAFFIC ANNOUNCEMENT
A station that regularly broadcasts traf-fic information is automatically located.
INFORMATION
● If no traffic program station is found, “NoTraffic” will appear on the screen.
● If a traffic program station is found, thename of the traffic program station willbe displayed for a while.
105
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
4
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display audio_U_2nd
1 Touch “HD Radio” to turn the indicatoron.
As a user works through the analog radiostations, (where applicable) the radioreceiver will automatically tune from ananalog signal to a digital signal within 5seconds.An orange “HD)” logo indicator will be dis-played on the screen when in digital. The“HD)” logo will first appear in a gray colorindicating the station is indeed (an analogand) a digital station. Once the digital sig-nal is acquired, the logo will change to abright orange color.
1 Touch “Text”.
2 Information such as the artist name,song title, album title and music genrebeing listened to are displayed on thetext screen.
To display messages from the station,touch “Additional Information”.
1 Touch “Multicast”.
Each time “Multicast” is touched, thesupplemental program changes.If “Multicast” is touched when tuned tothe last of the supplemental programs, themain program will be returned to.
USING HD Radio™ TECHNOLOGY
HD Radio™ Technology is the digitalevolution of analog AM/FM radio. Yourradio product has a special receiverwhich allows it to receive digitalbroadcasts (where available) inaddition to the analog broadcasts italready receives. Digital broadcastshave better sound quality than analogbroadcasts as digital broadcastsprovide free, crystal clear audio with nostatic or distortion. For moreinformation, and a guide to availableradio stations and programming, referto www.hdradio.com.
INFORMATION
MULTICAST
On the FM radio frequency most digitalstations have “multiple” or supplemen-tal programs on the FM station.
106
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
1 Touch “Tag” to bookmark the musicinformation.
2 Open the cover and connect iPod us-ing an iPod cable.
The USB/AUX port is located on theinstrument panel, or in the console box orglove box etc. The actual design and but-ton position will differ depending on thevehicle. For details, refer to vehicle“Owner’s Manual”.Turn on the power of the iPod if it is notturned on.Once an iPod is connected, the music tagmoves from the radio into the iPod.When the iPod is connected to iTunes, the“tagged” information of the songs whichwere tagged while listening to the radiocan be viewed. Then a user may decide topurchase the song or CD/Album whichhas been listened to on their radio.
TAG INFORMATION
● If tagging the music information fails,“Saving the HD Radio tag failed.” will bedisplayed on the screen. If this occurs,tag the information again.
● HD Radio™ stations can be preset.
107
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
4
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display audio_U_2nd
TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
Experience Cause Action
Mismatch of time alignmenta users may hear a shortperiod of programming re-played or an echo, stutteror skip.
The radio stations analogand digital volume is notproperly aligned or the sta-tion is in ballgame mode.
None, radio broadcast issue. Auser can contact the radio station.
Sound fades, blending inand out.
Radio is shifting betweenanalog and digital audio.
Reception issue, may clear-up asthe vehicle continues to be driven.Touching “HD Radio” with the in-dicator off can force radio in an an-alog audio.
Audio mute condition whenan HD2/HD3 multicastchannel has been playing.
The radio does not haveaccess to digital signals atthe moment.
This is normal behavior, wait untilthe digital signal returns. If out ofthe coverage area, seek a newstation.
Audio mute delay when se-lecting an HD2/HD3 multi-cast channel preset.
The digital multicast con-tent is not available untilHD Radio™ broadcast canbe decoded and make theaudio available. This takesup to 7 seconds.
This is normal behavior, wait forthe audio to become available.
Text information does notmatch the present song au-dio.
Data service issue by theradio broadcaster.
Broadcaster should be notified.Complete the form;www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences.
No text information shownfor the present selected fre-quency.
Data service issue by theradio broadcaster.
Broadcaster should be notified.Complete the form;www.ibiquity.com/automotive/report_radio_station_experiences.
HD Radio Technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corpora-tion. U.S. and Foreign Patents. HD Radio™ and the HD, HD Radio, and “Arc” logosare proprietary trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corp.
108
Display audio_U_2nd
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
4. RADIO OPERATION (XM® Satellite Radio BROADCAST)
If “CH 000” is selected using the“TUNE SCROLL” knob, the ID code,which is 8 alphanumeric characters, willbe displayed. If another channel isselected, the ID code will no longer bedisplayed. The channel (000) displaysthe radio ID and the specific radio code.
HOW TO SUBSCRIBE TO AN XM® Satellite Radio
To listen to a satellite radio broadcastin the vehicle, a subscription to theXM® Satellite Radio service is neces-sary.
An XM® Satellite Radio is a tuner de-signed exclusively to receive broad-casts provided under a separatesubscription. Availability is limited tothe 48 contiguous U.S. states andsome Canadian provinces.
HOW TO SUBSCRIBE
It is necessary to enter into a separateservice agreement with XM® SatelliteRadio in order to receive satellitebroadcast programming in the vehicle.Additional activation and service sub-scription fees apply that are not includ-ed in the purchase price of the vehicleand digital satellite tuner.
For complete information on subscrip-tion rates and terms, or to subscribe toXM® Satellite Radio:U.S.A.Refer to www.siriusxm.com or call 1-800-967-2346.
CanadaRefer to www.xmradio.ca or call 1-877-209-0079.
INFORMATION
● XM® Satellite Radio is solely responsi-ble for the quality, availability and con-tent of the satellite radio servicesprovided, which are subject to the termsand conditions of the XM® SatelliteRadio customer service agreement.
● Customers should have their radio IDready; the radio ID can be found by tun-ing to “channel 000” on the radio. Fordetails, see “DISPLAYING THE RADIOID” below.
● All fees and programming are theresponsibility of XM® Satellite Radio andare subject to change.
SATELLITE TUNER TECHNOLOGY NOTICE
Toyota’s satellite radio tuners areawarded Type Approval Certificatesfrom XM® Satellite Radio Inc. as proofof compatibility with the services of-fered by XM® Satellite Radio.
DISPLAYING THE RADIO ID
Each XM® tuner is identified with aunique radio ID. The radio ID is re-quired when activating an XM® serviceor when reporting a problem.
109
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
4
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display audio_U_2nd
1 Press the “AUDIO” button to displaythe audio control screen.
The audio system turns on in the lastmode used.
2 Touch “Source”.
3 Touch “SAT”.
1 Touch “Options”.
2 Touch either “TYPE >” or “< TYPE” togo to the next or previous category.
1 Tune in the desired channel.
2 Touch one of the left side screen but-tons (1-6) and hold it until a beep isheard. This sets the preset frequencyto the screen button. The Channelnumber will be displayed in the screenbutton.
To change the preset channel to a differ-ent one, follow the same procedure.
SWITCHING TO SATELLITE RADIO MODE
CHANNEL CATEGORY
PRESETTING A CHANNEL
110
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
Preset tuning: Touch the channel selectorscreen button (1-6) to listen to the desiredchannel. The selected screen button (1-6)is highlighted and its related informationappears on the right side of the screen.Manual tuning: Turn the “TUNE SCROLL”knob to select the next or previous channel.Turning the knob quickly allows rapid scroll-ing through the channel list.To select a channel within the currentcategory: Press the “ ” or “ ” button of“SEEK/TRACK”. The radio will change upor down to a channel within the currentchannel category.
To scan the currently selected channelcategory: Touch “SCAN”. “SCAN” ap-pears on the screen. The radio will find thenext channel in the same channel catego-ry, stay there for a few seconds, and thenscan again. To select a channel, touch“SCAN” again.
1 Touching “Text” displays the artistname and song title you are currentlylistening to.
SELECTING A CHANNEL
Tune in the desired channel using oneof the following methods.
DISPLAYING THE TITLE AND NAME
INFORMATION
● Up to 64 alphanumeric characters canbe displayed. (Some information will notbe fully displayed.)
111
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
4
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display audio_U_2nd
IF THE SATELLITE RADIO TUNER MALFUNCTIONS
When problems occur with the XM® tuner, a message will appear on the screen.Referring to the table below to identify the problem, take the suggested correctiveaction.
Message Explanation
Ck Antenna
The XM® antenna is not connected. Check whether the XM® an-tenna cable is attached securely.
A short circuit occurs in the antenna or the surrounding antennacable. See a Toyota certified dealer for assistance.
Ch Unauth
You have not subscribed to XM® Satellite Radio. The radio is be-ing updated with the latest encryption code. Contact XM® Satel-lite Radio for subscription information. When a contract iscanceled, you can choose “CH000” and all free-to-air channels.
The premium channel you selected is not authorized. Wait forabout 2 seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or“CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select anotherchannel. To listen to the premium channel, contact XM® SatelliteRadio.
No Signal The XM® signal is too weak at the current location. Wait until yourvehicle reaches a location with a stronger signal.
Loading The unit is acquiring audio or program information. Wait until theunit has received the information.
Ch Off Air The channel you selected is not broadcasting any programming.Select another channel.
----- There is no song/program title or artist name/feature associatedwith the channel at that time. No action is required.
Ch Unavail
The channel you selected is no longer available. Wait for about 2seconds until the radio returns to the previous channel or“CH001”. If it does not change automatically, select anotherchannel.
INFORMATION
● Contact the XM® Listener Care Center at 1-800-967-2346 (U.S.A.) or 1-877-209-0079(Canada).
112
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
NOTICE
● This equipment has been tested andfound to comply with the limits for aclass B digital device, pursuant to Part15 of the FCC Rules. These limits aredesigned to provide reasonable protec-tion against harmful interference in aresidential installation. This equipmentgenerates, uses and can radiate radiofrequency energy and, if not installedand used in accordance with the instruc-tions, may cause harmful interference toradio communications. However, thereis no guarantee that interference will notoccur in a particular installation.
● If this equipment does cause harmfulinterference to radio or television recep-tion, which can be determined by turningthe equipment off and on, the user isencouraged to try to correct the interfer-ence by one or more of the followingmeasures:• Reorient or relocate the receiving
antenna.• Increase the separation between the
equipment and receiver.• Connect the equipment into an outlet
on a circuit different from that towhich the receiver is connected.
• Consult the dealer or an experiencedradio/TV technician for help.
● Information to user• Alternation or modifications carried
out without appropriate authorizationmay invalidate the user’s right tooperate the equipment.
INFORMATION
● This XM® tuner supports “AudioServices” (Music and Talk) of only XM®
Satellite Radio and “Text Information*”linked to the respective “AudioServices”.*: Text Information includes, StationName, (Artist) Name, (Song) Title andCategory Name.
113
4
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display audio_U_2nd
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
5. CD PLAYER OPERATION
1 Insert a disc with the label side up.
When a disc is correctly inserted into theslot, the CD player will automatically startplaying from the first track or the first file ofthe first folder on a disc.
1 Press the button.
The disc will be ejected.
The CD player can play audio CDs, CDtext and MP3/WMA discs.(a)Audio CD, CD text (See page 114.)(b)MP3/WMA disc (See page 116.)For appropriate discs for this player,see “AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATINGHINTS” on page 141.
INSERTING OR EJECTING A DISC
INSERTING A DISC
INFORMATION
● If the label is facing down, “Check DISC”will appear on the screen.
● The player is intended for use with 4.7in. (12 cm) discs only. To play 3 in. (8cm) discs, use an adaptor.
NOTICE
● Do not stack up two discs for insertion,or it will cause damage to the CD player.Insert only one disc into the slot at atime.
● Never try to disassemble or oil any partof the CD player. Do not insert anythingother than a disc into the slot.
EJECTING A DISC
114
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
1 Press the “AUDIO” button.
The audio system turns on in the lastmode used.
2 Touch “Source”.
3 Touch “DISC”.
If a CD-TEXT disc is inserted, the title ofthe track and disc currently being playedwill be displayed.
: Touch to pause the track.
: Touch to resume playing the track.
1 Press and hold the “ ” or “ ” of the“SEEK/TRACK” button to fast forwardor reverse. When the button is re-leased, the player will start playingfrom that position.
SWITCHING TO CD MODE
INFORMATION
● If no disc is in the slot, “DISC” cannotbe selected. Insert a disc into the slot.
PLAYING AN AUDIO CD
When you touch , you can adjustsound settings. (See pages 100 and101.)
INFORMATION
● The progress bar indicator does notalways correspond to the actual elapsedplayback position.
FAST FORWARD AND REVERSE
115
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
4
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display audio_U_2nd
“SEEK/TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or“ ” of “SEEK/TRACK” button to select adesired track.“TUNE SCROLL” knob: Turn this knob toselect a desired track. Also, the knob canbe used for selection from the list display.Track list: A desired track can be selectedfrom a list.
Touch “Tracks” on the screen. The listwill be displayed.
Touch a desired track. The player will startplaying the selected track from the begin-ning.
Touch or to scroll the list.
If appears to the right of titles, thecomplete titles are too long for the display.Touch this screen button to scroll to titles.
SELECTING A DESIRED TRACK
Select a desired track using one of thefollowing methods.
116
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
(Repeat mode): Use it to automat-ically repeat the track you are currently lis-tening to.
The repeat mode changes as follows eachtime the screen button is touched.
(Random mode): Use it for auto-matic random selection of the track.
The random mode changes as followseach time the screen button is touched.
The title of the file and folder currentlybeing played will be displayed.
: Touch to pause the file.
: Touch to resume playing the file.
1 Press and hold the “ ” or “ ” of the“SEEK/TRACK” button to fast forwardor reverse. When the button is re-leased, the player will start playingfrom that position.
PLAYING REPEAT AND RANDOM ORDER
: Repeating the track
: OFF
:Playing the tracks in ran-dom order
:OFF
PLAYING A MP3/WMA DISC
When you touch , you can adjustsound settings. (See pages 100 and101.)
INFORMATION
● The progress bar indicator does notalways correspond to the actual elapsedplayback position.
FAST FORWARD AND REVERSE
117
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
4
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display audio_U_2nd
“SEEK/TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or“ ” of “SEEK/TRACK” button to select adesired file.“TUNE SCROLL” knob: Turn this knob toselect a desired file. Also, the knob can beused for selection from the list display.File list: A desired file can be selectedfrom a list.
Touch “Files” on the screen. The list willbe displayed.
Touch a desired file. The player will startplaying the selected file from the begin-ning.
Touch or to scroll the list.
If appears to the right of titles, thecomplete titles are too long for the display.Touch this screen button to scroll to titles.
1 Touch “Folders”. The folder list will bedisplayed.
2 Touch a desired folder from the list.The file list for the folder will be dis-played.
When a desired file is touched, the playerwill start playing the file.
Touch or to scroll the list.
If appears to the right of titles, thecomplete titles are too long for the display.Touch this screen button to scroll to titles.
SELECTING A DESIRED FILE
Select a desired file using one of thefollowing methods.
SELECTING A DESIRED FOLDER
118
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
(Repeat mode): Use it to automat-ically repeat the file or folder you are cur-rently listening to.
The repeat mode changes as follows eachtime the screen button is touched.
(Random mode): Use it for auto-matic random selection of the file.
The random mode changes as followseach time the screen button is touched.
PLAYING REPEAT AND RANDOM ORDER
:Repeating the file
:Repeating the folder
:OFF
:Playing the files on the fold-er in random order
:Playing the files in all thefolders in random order
:OFF
119
4
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display audio_U_2nd
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
6. USB MEMORY/iPod OPERATION
1 Open the cover of the USB/AUX portand connect a USB memory or iPodusing an iPod cable.
The USB/AUX port is located on theinstrument panel, or in the console box orglove box etc. The actual design and but-ton position will differ depending on thevehicle. For details, refer to vehicle“Owner’s Manual”.Turn on the power of the USB memory oriPod if it is not turned on.If a USB memory or iPod is inserted, itstarts playing automatically. As soon as itis ready to play, the audio control screen isshown automatically.
The system enables users to enjoymusic played from a USB memory oriPod on the vehicle's speakers.
CAUTION
● Do not operate the player’s controls orconnect the USB memory or iPod whiledriving.
NOTICE
● Do not leave your portable player in thevehicle. The temperature inside may riseto a level that could damage the portableplayer.
● Do not press down on or apply unneces-sary pressure to the portable playerwhile it is connected as this may dam-age the portable player or its terminal.
● Do not insert foreign objects into theUSB port as this may damage the porta-ble player or its terminal.
INFORMATION
● This system has a charging function foriPods.
● When the battery level of an iPod is verylow, the iPod may not operate. If so,charge the iPod before use.
● Depending on the portable player that isconnected to the system, certain func-tions may not be available. If a functionis unavailable due to a malfunction, dis-connecting your portable player andreconnecting it may resolve the problem.
● When an iPod does not operate, updatethe software of the iPod to the latest ver-sion, and then retry. For supported mod-els and software versions, see page142.
● This system supports MTP devices.
CONNECTING A USB MEMORY OR iPod
120
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
1 Press the “AUDIO” button.
The audio system turns on in the lastmode used.
2 Touch “Source”.
3 Touch “USB” or “iPod”.
■PLAY AND PAUSE
: Touch to pause the song.
: Touch to resume playing the song.
SWITCHING TO USB OR iPod MODE
INFORMATION
● If no USB memory or iPod is connected,“USB” or “iPod” cannot be selected.Connect a USB memory or iPod to theUSB port.
PLAYING A USB MEMORY OR iPod
PLAYING A SONG
The title of the album, song and artistname of the song currently being lis-tened to will be displayed.
When you touch , you can adjustsound settings. (See pages 100 and101.)
INFORMATION
● The progress bar indicator does notalways correspond to the actual elapsedplayback position.
● USB memory only: If the song’s datadoes not contain an ID3 tag, the file andfolder name will be displayed instead ofthe song and album title. Please notethat the file name will not include thefile’s extension.
121
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
4
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display audio_U_2nd
■FAST FORWARD AND REVERSE
1 Press and hold the “ ” or “ ” of the“SEEK/TRACK” button to fast forwardor reverse. When the button is re-leased, the player will start playingfrom that position.
■SELECTING A PLAYLIST
1 Touch “Browse”.
2 Touch the desired list.
Touch the desired item to display its list.Continue to touch the applicable screenbutton until its song list is displayed.
3 Touch the desired song.
SELECTING A DESIRED SONG
Songs can be sorted and selected fromvarious playlists.
The selecting playlist screen is can bedisplayed from the “Options” screen.Touch “Options” and then touch“Browse For Music” on the nextscreen.
122
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
■SELECTING BY LIST
1 Touch “List”.
2 Touch the desired song.
■SELECTING A DESIRED SONG US-ING THE “SEEK/TRACK” BUTTONOR “TUNE SCROLL” KNOB
“SEEK/TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or“ ” of the “SEEK/TRACK” button to se-lect a desired song.“TUNE SCROLL” knob: Turn to select adesired song.
INFORMATION
● USB memory only: Files that do not con-tain song title and/or album informationwill be displayed as “Unknown” in the“Artist” and/or “Album” list.
● While the media is being synchronized,a pop-up window is displayed. Whensynchronization is complete, a pop-upwindow will be displayed and the func-tion will be available. Touch “OK” toreturn to the previous screen.
The desired song can be selected fromthe current playlist.
The list is can be displayed from the“Options” screen. Touch “Options” andthen touch “Current Playlist” on thenext screen.
123
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
4
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display audio_U_2nd
1 Touch cover art.
2 A list of all the songs from the albumwill be displayed.
3 Touch the desired song.
1 Touch “Play More Like This”.
A pop-up window is displayed until theplaylist is created. If you touch “Cancel”on the screen, the creation of the newplaylist is cancelled.
■“Play More Like This” SETTING
1 Touch “Options”.
COVER ART FUNCTION
The album, that the song currently be-ing listened to is from, is called up sothat a song from it can be selected.
INFORMATION
● If a song other than the one currentlybeing listened to is selected, the currentlist is updated and will include all thesongs from the album the selected songbelongs to.
● It may take time to display iPod coverart. Only iPod cover art that is saved inJPEG format can be displayed.
● When Audio book or Podcast playlistsare selected, this function is not avail-able.
PLAYING “Play More Like This” FUNCTION
The system creates a new playlist con-taining songs similar to the one cur-rently being listened to.
The size of the playlist of similar songscan be set.
124
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
2 Touch “Play More Like This Set-tings”.
3 Touch the desired size of the playlist.
4 Touch .
■FROM THE AUDIO CONTROLSCREEN
1 Touch or .
(Repeat mode): Use it to automatical-ly repeat the song you are currently listen-ing to.
The repeat mode changes as follows eachtime the screen button is touched.
(Random mode): Use it for automaticrandom order in the current playlist.
The random mode changes as followseach time the screen button is touched.
REPEAT AND RANDOM PLAY FUNCTIONS
Repeat and random play functions areavailable.
: Repeating the song
: OFF
: Playing the songs in randomorder
: OFF
125
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
4
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display audio_U_2nd
■FROM THE “Options” SCREEN
1 Touch “Options”.
2 Touch “Random” or “Repeat Track”.
To cancel repeat or random order, touch“Random” or “Repeat Track” again.
INFORMATION
● When “Random” is on, the songs in thecurrent playlist are played in randomorder.
126
Display audio_U_2nd
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
7. AUX DEVICE OPERATION
1 Open the cover of the USB/AUX portand connect a portable audio device.
The USB/AUX port is located on theinstrument panel, or in the console box orglove box etc. The actual design and but-ton position will differ depending on thevehicle. For details, refer to vehicle“Owner’s Manual”.
Connecting a portable audio devicewith the AUX port enables users to en-joy music via the vehicle speakers.
CAUTION
● Do not connect a portable audio deviceor operate the device controls while driv-ing.
NOTICE
● Do not leave the portable audio devicein the car. In particular, high tempera-tures inside the vehicle may damage thedevice.
● Do not push down on or apply unneces-sary pressure to the portable audiodevice while it is connected as this maydamage the device or its terminal.
● Do not insert foreign objects into theAUX port as this may damage the porta-ble audio device or its terminal.
CONNECTING A PORTABLE AUDIO DEVICE
127
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
4
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display audio_U_2nd
1 Press the “AUDIO” button.
The audio system turns on in the lastmode used.
2 Touch “Source”.
3 Touch “AUX”.
Only the volume can be adjusted usingthe audio system controls. The remainingcontrols need to be operated on the porta-ble audio device itself.
SWITCHING TO AUX MODE
INFORMATION
● If no portable audio device is connected,“AUX” cannot be selected. Connect theportable audio device to the AUX port.
PLAYING A PORTABLE AUDIO DEVICE
When you touch , you can adjustsound settings. (See pages 100 and101.)
128
Display audio_U_2nd
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
8. Bluetooth® AUDIO OPERATION
The Bluetooth® audio system enablesusers to enjoy music played on a por-table player from the vehicle speakervia wireless communication.If your portable player does not supportBluetooth®, the Bluetooth® audiosystem will not function.
CAUTION
● Do not operate the player’s controls orconnect to the Bluetooth® audio systemwhile driving.
● Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth®
antennas. People with implanted pace-makers or cardiac defibrillators shouldmaintain a reasonable distance betweenthemselves and the Bluetooth® anten-nas. The radio waves may affect theoperation of such devices.
● Before using Bluetooth® devices, usersof any electrical medical device otherthan implanted pacemakers andimplanted cardiac defibrillators shouldconsult the manufacturer of the devicefor information about its operation underthe influence of radio waves. Radiowaves could have unexpected effects onthe operation of such medical devices.
NOTICE
● Do not leave your portable audio playerin the car. In particular, high tempera-tures inside the vehicle may damage theportable audio player.
INFORMATION
● In the following conditions, the systemmay not function.• The portable audio player is turned
off.• The portable audio player is not con-
nected.• The portable audio player has a low
battery.● Depending on the portable audio player
that is connected to the system, certainfunctions may not be available.
● It may take time, the phone connectionis carried out during Bluetooth® audioplay.
129
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
4
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display audio_U_2nd
Bluetooth is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG, Inc.
INFORMATION
● Portable audio players must correspondto the following specifications in order tobe connected to the Bluetooth® audiosystem. However, please note that somefunctions may be limited depending onthe type of portable audio player.• Bluetooth® Specification
Ver.1.1 or higher(Recommended: Ver.2.1+EDR orhigher)
• ProfileA2DP (Advanced Audio DistributionProfile)Ver.1.0 or higher(Recommended: Ver.1.2 or higher)AVRCP (Audio/Video Remote Con-trol Profile)Ver.1.0 or higher(Recommended: Ver.1.4 or higher)
CAUTION
● FCC ID: QNG-BE2729IC ID: 6434A-BE2729MADE IN USAThis device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and RSS-210 of the industryCanada. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and (2) This device must accept any interfer-ence received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.
● FCC WARNING: Changes or modifica-tions not expressly approved by theparty responsible for compliance couldvoid the user’s authority to operate theequipment.
● CAUTION: Radio Frequency RadiationExposureThis equipment complies with FCC radi-ation exposure limits set forth for uncon-trolled equipment and meets the FCCradio frequency (RF) Exposure Guide-lines in Supplement C to OET65 andRSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF)Exposure rules. This equipment hasvery low levels of RF energy that itdeemed to comply without maximumpermissive exposure evaluation (MPE).But it is desirable that it should beinstalled and operated with at least 20cm and more between the radiator andperson’s body (excluding extremities:hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
● Co-location: This transmitter must not beco-located or operated in conjunctionwith any other antenna or transmitter.
130
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
1 Press the “AUDIO” button.
The audio system turns on in the lastmode used.
2 Touch “Source”.
3 Touch “Bluetooth*”.
If a Bluetooth® audio device is not con-nected, the connecting Bluetooth® audioscreen will automatically appear.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG, Inc.
SWITCHING TO Bluetooth® AUDIO MODE
CONNECTING Bluetooth® AUDIO
In order to use the Bluetooth® audiosystem, it is necessary to pair a porta-ble player and connect the audio pro-file (A2DP) with the system. (In thismanual, pairing refers to a Bluetooth®
device connecting with the system.Connecting refers to the paired de-vice’s profile(s) being connected to thesystem.)Once you have connected a devicewith audio profile (A2DP), you can en-joy your music on the vehicle’s audiosystem.If you have not yet connected a porta-ble player with audio profile (A2DP),you must first pair a portable playerwith audio profile (A2DP) according tothe following procedures. Connectyour portable player with audio profile(A2DP) after bringing the vehicle to acomplete stop.
See “Bluetooth® SETTINGS” on page202 of additional registration when reg-istering.
131
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
4
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display audio_U_2nd
■CONNECTING FROM THE SYSTEM
1 Switching to Bluetooth® audio mode.(See page 130.)
2 Touch “Search Bluetooth* Devices”.
3 Touch “Add New Device”.
4 Touch “Search for Bluetooth* Devi-ces”.
When another Bluetooth® device is cur-rently connected, a pop-up window is dis-played. To disconnect it, touch “Yes”.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG, Inc.
5 The following screen will be displayedwhile searching for a Bluetooth® de-vice.
To cancel this function, touch “Cancel”.
6 Touch the device to be paired.
Connectable Bluetooth® devices will bedisplayed in the list.
7 The following screen will be displayed.
To cancel this function, touch “Cancel”.
CONNECTING Bluetooth® AUDIO
132
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
8 Confirm the PIN.
Confirm the PIN displayed on the screen,and then touch “Accept”.If the device does not support SSP(Secure Simple Pairing), input the PIN dis-played on the screen into the device.
9 The following screen will be displayedwhen pairing is complete.
10The system waits for connection re-quests coming from the paired device.Phone and Music profiles are typicallyconnected automatically.
If the automatic connection failed, the fol-lowing screen will be displayed. Touch“Connect for Music”.
Once a portable player has been con-nected, it will be automatically connectedwhenever the engine switch is turned tothe “ACC” or “ON” position.
■CONNECTING FROM THE DEVICE
1 Switching to Bluetooth® audio mode.(See page 130.)
2 Touch “Search Bluetooth* Devices”.
3 Touch “Add New Device”.
4 Touch “Make This System Discover-able”.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG, Inc.
INFORMATION
● For details on device detection andoperation of the portable player, refer tothe manual that comes with the portableaudio player.
133
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
4
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display audio_U_2nd
When another Bluetooth® device is cur-rently connected, a pop-up window is dis-played. To disconnect it, touch “Yes”.
5 The following screen will be displayed.
To cancel this function, touch “Cancel”.
6 Confirm the PIN.
Confirm the PIN displayed on the screen,and then touch “Accept”.If the device does not support SSP(Secure Simple Pairing), input the PIN dis-played on the screen into the device.
7 The following screen will be displayedwhen pairing is complete.
8 The system waits for connection re-quests coming from the paired device.Phone and Music profiles are typicallyconnected automatically.
If the Bluetooth® device is disconnectedon purpose, such as it was turned off, thisdoes not happen. Reconnect it manuallyusing either of the following methods:• Select a portable player again. (See
page 208.)• Connect the audio profile. (See page
204.)
RECONNECTING Bluetooth® AUDIO
If a portable player is disconnected dueto poor reception from the Bluetooth®
network when the engine switch is inthe “ACC” or “ON” position, the systemwill automatically reconnect the porta-ble player.
134
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
■PLAY AND PAUSE
: Touch to pause the song.
: Touch to resume playing the song.
■FAST FORWARD AND REVERSE
1 Press and hold the “ ” or “ ” of the“SEEK/TRACK” button to fast forwardor reverse. When the button is re-leased, the player will start playingfrom that position.
■SELECTING A PLAYLIST
1 Touch “Browse”.
2 Touch the desired list.
Touch the desired item to display its list.Continue to touch the applicable screenbutton until its song list is displayed.
PLAYING Bluetooth® AUDIO
PLAYING A SONG
The title of the song, album and artistname of the song currently being lis-tened to will be displayed.
When you touch , you can adjustsound settings. (See pages 100 and101.)
INFORMATION
● The progress bar indicator does notalways correspond to the actual elapsedplayback position.
● If the song’s data does not contain anID3 tag, the file and folder name will bedisplayed instead of the song and albumtitle. Please note that the file name willnot include the file’s extension.
● Bluetooth® audio screen may differdepending on your device.
SELECTING A DESIRED SONG
Songs can be sorted and selected fromvarious playlists.
135
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
4
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display audio_U_2nd
3 Touch the desired song.
■SELECTING BY LIST
1 Touch “List”.
2 Touch the desired song.
The selecting playlist screen is can bedisplayed from the “Options” screen.Touch “Options” and then touch“Browse For Music” on the nextscreen.
INFORMATION
● Files that do not contain song title and/oralbum information will be displayed as“Unknown” in the “Artist” and/or “Album”list.
● This function may not be availabledepending on the portable audio player.
The desired song can be selected fromthe current playlist.
The list is can be displayed from the“Options” screen. Touch “Options” andthen touch “Current Playlist” on thenext screen.
INFORMATION
● This function may not be availabledepending on the portable audio player.
136
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
■SELECTING A DESIRED SONG US-ING THE “SEEK/TRACK” BUTTONOR “TUNE SCROLL” KNOB
“SEEK/TRACK” button: Press the “ ” or“ ”of the “SEEK/TRACK” button to selecta desired song.“TUNE SCROLL” knob: Turn to select adesired song.
■FROM THE AUDIO CONTROLSCREEN
1 Touch or .
(Repeat mode): Use it to automatical-ly repeat the song you are currently listen-ing to.
The repeat mode changes as follows eachtime the screen button is touched.
(Random mode): Use it for automaticrandom order in the current playlist.
The random mode changes as followseach time the screen button is touched.
REPEAT AND RANDOM PLAY FUNCTIONS
Repeat and random play functions areavailable.
: Repeating the song
: OFF
: Playing the songs in randomorder
: OFF
137
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
4
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display audio_U_2nd
■FROM THE “Options” SCREEN
1 Touch “Options”.
2 Touch “Random” or “Repeat Track”.
To cancel repeat or random order, touch“Random” or “Repeat Track” again.
INFORMATION
● When “Random” is on, the songs in thecurrent playlist are played in randomorder.
138
Display audio_U_2nd
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
9. STEERING SWITCHES
The actual design and button position willdiffer depending on the vehicle. Fordetails, refer to vehicle “Owner’s Manual”.Details of the specific switches, controls,and features are described below.
Volume control switchPress the “+” side to increase the volume.The volume continues to increase whilethe switch is being pressed.Press the “-” side to decrease the vol-ume. The volume continues to decreasewhile the switch is being pressed.
“ ” “ ” switch
RadioTo select a preset station: Press the “ ”or “ ” switch.To seek a radio station: Press and holdthe “ ” or “ ” switch until you hear a beep.If you press either the “ ” or “ ” switch inseek mode, the seek mode will be can-celled.
CD playerTo select a desired track or file: Pressthe “ ” or “ ” switch.To select a desired folder (MP3/WMA):Press and hold the “ ” or “ ” switch untilyou hear a beep.
USB memory/iPodTo select a desired song: Press the “ ”or “ ” switch.Fast forward and reverse: Press andhold the “ ” or “ ” switch until you hear abeep.
Bluetooth® audio playerTo select a desired song: Press the “ ”or “ ” switch.Fast forward and reverse: Press andhold the “ ” or “ ” switch until you hear abeep.
“MODE” switchPress the “MODE” switch to select anaudio mode. Each press changes themode sequentially if the desired mode isready to use.To turn the audio system on, press the“MODE” switch.Press and hold the “MODE” switch untilyou hear a beep and the music will pauseor be muted. By the same operation, it isreleased.
Some parts of the audio system can beadjusted with the switches on thesteering wheel.
STEERING SWITCHES (WITH TWO DIRECTION STEERING SWITCH)
No. Switch
Volume control switch
“ ” “ ” switch
“MODE” switch
139
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
4
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display audio_U_2nd
The actual design and button position willdiffer depending on the vehicle. Fordetails, refer to vehicle “Owner’s Manual”.Details of the specific switches, controls,and features are described below.
Volume control switchPress the “+” side to increase the volume.The volume continues to increase whilethe switch is being pressed.Press the “-” side to decrease the vol-ume. The volume continues to decreasewhile the switch is being pressed.
“ ” “ ” “ ” “ ” switch
RadioTo select a preset station: Press the “ ”or “ ” side of the switch. Repeat this to se-lect the next preset station.
To seek a station: Press and hold the “ ”or “ ” side of the switch until a beep isheard. Repeat this to find the next station.If either side of the switch is pressed dur-ing seek mode, seeking will be canceled.To change the preset page: The radio’spreset page can be changed by pressingthe “ ” or “ ” side of the switch.
CD playerTo select a desired track or file: Pressthe “ ” or “ ” side of the switch until thedesired track or file to play is selected. Toreturn to the beginning of the current trackor file, press the “ ” side of the switch oncequickly.To select a desired folder (MP3/WMA):Press the “ ” or “ ” switch to change tothe next or the previous folder.
USB memory/iPodTo select a desired song: Press the “ ”or “ ” switch until the desired song is se-lected.Fast forward and reverse: Press andhold the “ ” or “ ” switch until you hear abeep.
Bluetooth® audio playerTo select a desired song: Press the “ ”or “ ” side of the switch until the desiredsong is selected.Fast forward and reverse: Press andhold the “ ” or “ ” switch until you hear abeep.
STEERING SWITCHES (WITH FOUR DIRECTION STEERING SWITCH)
No. Switch
Volume control switch
“ ” “ ” “ ” “ ” switch
“MODE/HOLD” switch
Back switch
Enter switch
140
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
“MODE/HOLD” switchPress the “MODE/HOLD” switch to selectan audio mode. Each press changes themode sequentially if the desired mode isready to use.To turn the audio system on, press the“MODE/HOLD” switch.Press and hold the “MODE/HOLD” switchuntil you hear a beep and the music willpause or be muted. By the same opera-tion, it is released.
Back switchPress the back switch to return to the pre-vious screen.
Enter switchWhen in radio mode, pressing the enterswitch returns to the preset screen.When in media mode, pressing the enterswitch returns to the list screen.
141
4
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display audio_U_2nd
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
10. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATING HINTS
Fading and drifting stations: Generally,the effective range of FM is about 25 miles(40 km). Once outside this range, you maynotice fading and drifting, which increasewith the distance from the radio transmit-ter. They are often accompanied by distor-tion.Multi-path: FM signals are reflective, mak-ing it possible for two signals to reach yourantenna at the same time. If this happens,the signals will cancel each other out,causing a momentary flutter or loss of re-ception.Static and fluttering: These occur whensignals are blocked by buildings, trees, orother large objects. Increasing the basslevel may reduce static and fluttering.Station swapping: If the FM signal youare listening to is interrupted or weakened,and there is another strong station nearbyon the FM band, your radio may tune in thesecond station until the original signal canbe picked up again.
Fading: AM broadcasts are reflected bythe upper atmosphere especially atnight. These reflected signals can interferewith those received directly from the radiostation, causing the radio station to soundalternately strong and weak.Station interference: When a reflectedsignal and a signal received directly from aradio station are very nearly the same fre-quency, they can interfere with each other,making it difficult to hear the broadcast.Static: AM is easily affected by externalsources of electrical noise, such as hightension power lines, lightening, or electri-cal motors. This results in static.
NOTICE
● To avoid damaging the audio system:• Be careful not to spill beverages over
the audio system.• Do not put anything other than on
appropriate discs into the CD playerslot.
INFORMATION
● The use of a cellular phone inside ornear the vehicle may cause a noise fromthe speakers of the audio system whichyou are listening to. However, this doesnot indicate a malfunction.
RADIO RECEPTION
Usually, a problem with radio receptiondoes not mean there is a problem withyour radio it is just the normal resultof conditions outside the vehicle.For example, nearby buildings and ter-rain can interfere with FM reception.Power lines or telephone wires can in-terfere with AM signals. And of course,radio signals have a limited range, andthe farther you are from a station, theweaker its signal will be. In addition, re-ception conditions change constantlyas your vehicle moves.Here are some common receptionproblems that probably do not indicatea problem with your radio.
FM
AM
142
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
Cargo loaded on the roof luggage carrier,especially metal objects, may adverselyaffect the reception of XM® SatelliteRadio.Alternation or modifications carried outwithout appropriate authorization mayinvalidate the user’s right to operate theequipment.
“Made for iPod” and “Made for iPhone”mean that an electronic accessory hasbeen designed to connect specifically toiPod, or iPhone, respectively, and hasbeen certified by the developer to meetApple performance standards.Apple is not responsible for the operationof this device or its compliance with safetyand regulatory standards. Please notethat the use of this accessory with iPod oriPhone may affect wireless performance.iPhone, iPod, iPod classic, iPod nano andiPod touch are trademarks of Apple Inc.,registered in the U.S. and other countries.
The following iPod, iPod nano, iPodclassic, iPod touch and iPhone devic-es can be used with this system.Made for
• iPod touch (4th generation)• iPod touch (3rd generation)• iPod touch (2nd generation)• iPod touch (1st generation)• iPod classic• iPod with video• iPod nano (6th generation)• iPod nano (5th generation)• iPod nano (4th generation)• iPod nano (3rd generation)• iPod nano (1st generation)• iPhone 4• iPhone 3GS• iPhone 3G• iPhone
Depending on differences between mod-els or software versions etc., some modelsmight be incompatible with this system.
XM®
iPod
COMPATIBLE MODELS
143
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
4
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display audio_U_2nd
USB memory that can be used for MP3and WMA playback.• USB communication formats: USB 2.0
HS (480 Mbps) and FS (12 Mbps)• File formats: FAT 16/32 (Windows®)• Correspondence class: Mass storage
class
Your CD player is intended for use with4.7 in. (12 cm) discs only. To play 3 in. (8cm) discs, use an adaptor.Extremely high temperatures can keepyour CD player from working. On hotdays, use air conditioning to cool the vehi-cle interior before you listen to a disc.Bumpy roads or other vibrations maymake your CD player skip.If moisture gets into your CD player, youmay not hear any sound even though yourCD player appears to be working. Removethe discs from the CD player and wait untilit dries.
Use only discs marked as shown above.The following products may not be play-able on your CD player.• SACDs• dts CDs• Copy-protected CDs• Video CDsSpecial shaped discs
Transparent/translucent discs
USB MEMORY
CARING FOR YOUR CD PLAYER AND DISCS
Audio CDs
144
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
Low quality discs
Labeled discsHandle discs carefully, especially whenyou are inserting them. Hold them on theedge and do not bend them. Avoid gettingfingerprints on them, particularly on theshiny side.Dirt, scratches, warping, pin holes, orother disc damage could cause the CDplayer to skip or to repeat a section of atrack. (To see a pin hole, hold the disc upto the light.)Remove discs from the CD player whenyou are not using them. Store them in theirplastic cases away from moisture, heat,and direct sunlight.
To clean a disc: Wipe it with a soft, lint-free cloth that has been dampened withwater. Wipe in a straight line from the cen-ter to the edge of the disc (not in a circle).Do not use a conventional record cleaneror anti-static device.
NOTICE
● Do not use special shaped, transparent/translucent, low quality or labeled discssuch as those shown in the illustrations.The use of such discs may damage theplayer, or it may be impossible to ejectthe disc.
● This system is not designed for use ofDual Disc. Do not use Dual Discbecause it may cause damage to theplayer.
Correct Wrong
145
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
4
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display audio_U_2nd
MP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3) and WMA(Windows Media Audio) are audio com-pression standards.The MP3/WMA player can play MP3 andWMA files on CD-ROM, CD-R and CD-RW discs.The unit can play disc recordings compati-ble with ISO 9660 level 1,2 (Romeo Joliet)and UDF (2.01 or lower) file system.When naming an MP3 or WMA file, addthe appropriate file extension (.mp3 or.wma).The MP3/WMA player plays back fileswith .mp3 or .wma file extensions as MP3or WMA files. To prevent noise and play-back errors, use the appropriate file exten-sions.The player can play only the first sessionusing multi-session compatible CDs.MP3 files are compatible with the ID3 TagVer. 1.0, Ver. 1.1, Ver. 2.2, and Ver. 2.3formats. The unit cannot display disc title,track title and artist name in other formats.USB memory: MP3 files are compatiblewith the ID3 Tag Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1, Ver.2.2, Ver. 2.3 and Ver. 2.4 formats. The unitcannot display track title and artist namein other formats.WMA files can contain a WMA tag that isused in the same way as an ID3 tag. WMAtags carry information such as track title,artist name.The sound quality of MP3/WMA files gen-erally improves with higher bit rates. Inorder to achieve a reasonable level ofsound quality, files recorded with a bit rateof at least 128 kbps are recommended.
MP3 files:MPEG 1 AUDIO LAYER 3 32, 44.1, 48kHzMPEG2 AUDIO LAYER3 16, 22.05, 24kHzWMA files for WMA player:Ver. 7, 8, 9 CBR 32, 44.1, 48 kHzWMA files for USB memory:Ver. 7, 8, 9 HIGH PROFILE 32, 44.1, 48kHz
MP3 files for MP3 player:MPEG1 LAYER3 32 to 320 kbpsMPEG2 LSF LAYER3 8 to 160 kbpsMP3 files for USB memory:MPEG 1 AUDIO LAYER 2, 3 32 to 320kbpsMPEG 2 AUDIO LAYER 2, 3 8 to 160kbpsWMA files for WMA player:Ver. 7, 8 CBR 48 to 192 kbpsVer. 9 CBR 48 to 320 kbpsWMA files for USB memory:Ver. 7, 8, 9 CBR 48 to 320 kbps
M3u playlists are not compatible with theaudio player.MP3i (MP3 interactive) and MP3PRO for-mats are not compatible with the audioplayer.The player is compatible with VBR (Vari-able Bit Rate).When playing back files recorded as VBR(Variable Bit Rate) files, the play time willnot be correctly displayed if fast-forward orreverse operations are used.It is not possible to check folders that donot include MP3/WMA files.
MP3/WMA FILES SAMPLING FREQUENCY
PLAYABLE BIT RATES
146
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
MP3/WMA files in folders up to 8 levelsdeep can be played. However, the start ofplayback may be delayed when usingdiscs containing numerous levels of fold-ers. For this reason, we recommend creat-ing discs with no more than two levels offolders.WMA files Ver. 9 depends on “WindowsMedia® Audio Standard”.
The play order of the compact disc withthe structure shown on the left is as fol-lows:
MP3/WMA player: It is possible to play upto 192 folders or 255 files on one disc.USB memory:Maximum number of folder in device:3000Maximum number of files in one folder:255Maximum number of files in device: 9999The order changes depending on the PCand MP3/WMA encoding software youuse.
CD-R/CD-RW discs that have not beensubject to the “finalizing process” (a pro-cess that allows discs to be played on aconventional CD player) cannot beplayed.It may not be possible to play CD-R/CD-RW discs recorded on a music CDrecorder or a personal computer becauseof disc characteristics, scratches or dirt onthe disc, or dirt, condensation, etc. on thelens of the unit.It may not be possible to play discsrecorded on a personal computer depend-ing on the application settings and theenvironment. Record with the correct for-mat. (For details, contact the appropriateapplication manufacturers of the applica-tions.)CD-R/CD-RW discs may be damaged bydirect exposure to sunlight, high tempera-tures or other storage conditions. The unitmay be unable to play some damageddiscs.If you insert a CD-RW disc into the MP3/WMA player, playback will begin moreslowly than with a conventional CD or CD-R disc.Recordings on CD-R/CD-RW cannot beplayed using the DDCD (Double DensityCD) system.
001.mp3 002.wma
Folder 1003.mp3Folder 2004.mp3005.wma
Folder 3006.mp3
001. mp3 002. wma. . . 006. mp3
CD-R AND CD-RW DISCS
147
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
4
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display audio_U_2nd
This is a general term that describes theprocess of writing data on-demand to CD-R, etc., in the same way that data is writ-ten to floppy or hard discs.
This is a method of embedding track-related information in an MP3 file. Thisembedded information can include thetrack title, the artist’s name, the albumtitle, the music genre, the year of produc-tion, comments and other data. The con-tents can be freely edited using softwarewith ID3 tag editing functions. Althoughthe tags are restricted to the number ofcharacters, the information can be viewedwhen the track is played back.
WMA files can contain a WMA tag that isused in the same way as an ID3 tag. WMAtags carry information such as track title,artist name.
This is the international standard for theformatting of CD-ROM folders and files.For the ISO 9660 format, there are twolevels of regulations.Level 1: The file name is in 8.3 format (8character file names, with a 3 characterfile extension. File names must be com-posed of one-byte capital letters and num-bers. The “_” symbol may also beincluded.)Level 2: The file name can have up to 31characters (including the separation mark“.” and file extension). Each folder mustcontain fewer than 8 hierarchies.
Playlists created using “WINAMP” soft-ware have a playlist file extension (.m3u).
MP3 is an audio compression standarddetermined by a working group (MPEG) ofthe ISO (International Standard Organiza-tion). MP3 compresses audio data toabout 1/10 the size of that on conventionaldiscs.
WMA (Windows Media Audio) is an audiocompression format developed byMicrosoft®. It compresses files into a sizesmaller than that of MP3 files. The decod-ing formats for WMA files are Ver. 7, 8,and 9.
TERMS
PACKET WRITE
ID3 TAG
WMA TAG
ISO 9660 FORMAT
m3u
MP3
WMA
148
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
Gracenote®
Music recognition technology andrelated data are provided byGracenote®. Gracenote is the industrystandard in music recognition technol-ogy and related content delivery. Formore information visitwww.gracenote.com.
Gracenote® End User LicenseAgreement
This application or device containssoftware from Gracenote, Inc. ofEmeryville, California (“Gracenote”).The software from Gracenote (the“Gracenote Software”) enables thisapplication to perform disc and/or fileidentification and obtain music-relatedinformation, including name, artist,track, and title information(“Gracenote Data”) from onlineservers or embedded databases(collectively, “Gracenote Servers”)and to perform other functions. Youmay use Gracenote Data only bymeans of the intended End-Userfunctions of this application or device.
You agree that you will use GracenoteData, the Gracenote Software, andGracenote Servers for your ownpersonal non-commercial use only.You agree not to assign, copy, transferor transmit the Gracenote Software orany Gracenote Data to any third party.YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OREXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, THEGRACENOTE SOFTWARE, ORGRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPTAS EXPRESSLY PERMITTEDHEREIN.You agree that your non-exclusivelicense to use the Gracenote Data, theGracenote Software, and GracenoteServers will terminate if you violatethese restrictions. If your licenseterminates, you agree to cease anyand all use of the Gracenote Data, theGracenote Software, and GracenoteServers. Gracenote reserves all rightsin Gracenote Data, the GracenoteSoftware, and the Gracenote Servers,including all ownership rights. Underno circumstances will Gracenotebecome liable for any payment to youfor any information that you provide.You agree that Gracenote, Inc. mayenforce its rights under thisAgreement against you directly in itsown name.The Gracenote service uses a uniqueidentifier to track queries for statisticalpurposes. The purpose of a randomlyassigned numeric identifier is to allowthe Gracenote service to countqueries without knowing anythingabout who you are. For moreinformation, see the web page for theGracenote Privacy Policy for theGracenote service.
149
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
4
AU
DIO
SYSTEM
Display audio_U_2nd
The Gracenote Software and eachitem of Gracenote Data are licensed toyou “AS IS.” Gracenote makes norepresentations or warranties,express or implied, regarding theaccuracy of any Gracenote Data fromin the Gracenote Servers. Gracenotereserves the right to delete data fromthe Gracenote Servers or to changedata categories for any cause thatGracenote deems sufficient. Nowarranty is made that the GracenoteSoftware or Gracenote Servers areerror-free or that functioning ofGracenote Software or GracenoteServers will be uninterrupted.Gracenote is not obligated to provideyou with new enhanced or additionaldata types or categories thatGracenote may provide in the futureand is free to discontinue its servicesat any time.GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALLWARRANTIES EXPRESS ORIMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOTLIMITED TO, IMPLIEDWARRANTIES OFMERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FORA PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE,AND NON-INFRINGEMENT.GRACENOTE DOES NOTWARRANT THE RESULTS THATWILL BE OBTAINED BY YOUR USEOF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWAREOR ANY GRACENOTE SERVER. INNO CASE WILL GRACENOTE BELIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIALOR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES ORFOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR LOSTREVENUES.copyright © 2000 to presentGracenote
150
1. AUDIO SYSTEM OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
5
151
1
2
3
4
5
6
Display audio_U_2nd
7
8
9
1. QUICK REFERENCE................... 152
2. HANDS-FREE SYSTEM .............. 155USING THE PHONE SWITCH AND
MICROPHONE ................................. 156ABOUT THE PHONE BOOK
IN THIS SYSTEM.............................. 157WHEN YOU RELEASE YOUR CAR ... 157
3. CONNECTING A Bluetooth® PHONE....................................... 159
CONNECTING A Bluetooth® PHONE ............................................. 159
4. REGISTERING AN ENTRY ......... 163REGISTERING A NEW ENTRY.......... 163REGISTERING AN ENTRY AS
“Speed Dials” .................................... 165DISPLAYING AND EDITING
THE ENTRY INFORMATION............ 166SENDING STORED CONTACTS
TO A USB MEMORY ........................ 167
1. CALLING ON A Bluetooth® PHONE....................................... 168
BY DIAL............................................... 168BY “Stored” LIST ON THE
“Contacts” SCREEN.......................... 168BY PHONE BOOK............................... 169
BY SPEED DIALS................................ 170BY CALL HISTORY ............................. 171CALLING USING A SHORT
MESSAGE......................................... 171BY POI* CALL...................................... 172
2. RECEIVING CALLS ON A Bluetooth® PHONE .................. 173
3. TALKING ON A Bluetooth® PHONE...................................... 174
ADJUSTING THE RECEIVER VOLUME ........................................... 175
SENDING TONES ............................... 175DIALING A SECOND NUMBER .......... 175
1. SHORT MESSAGE FUNCTION ................................ 177
NEW SHORT MESSAGE NOTIFICATION POP-UP WINDOW........................................... 177
CHECKING RECEIVED SHORT MESSAGES ...................................... 177
CHECKING SENT SHORT MESSAGES ...................................... 178
SENDING A NEW SHORT MESSAGE......................................... 179
1 BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
2 TELEPHONE OPERATION
3 SHORT MESSAGE FUNCTION
Bluetooth® HANDS-FREE SYSTEM
*: Point of Interest
152
Display audio_U_2nd
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
1. QUICK REFERENCE
“Phone” menu screen
The actual design and button position will differ depending on the vehicle. Some but-tons will be in different positions or not shown. For details, refer to vehicle “Owner’sManual”.
Pressing the button allows access to the “Phone” menu screen.
When the button is pressed, the screen that was last displayed is returned
to. Touch to display the “Phone” menu screen.
No. Function Page
Touch to display the “Dial By Number” screen.A call can be made by dialing the number. 153, 168
Touch to display the “Contacts” screen.An entry from the list of contacts in the “Stored” screen, “Phone Book”or “Speed Dials” can be selected and called.
168, 169, 170
Touch to display the “Call History” screen.An entry from the missed, received or dial call lists can be selectedand called.
171
Touch to display the “Messages” screen.A list of received and sent short messages and a menu to create newshort messages can be displayed.
177
Touch to display the “Phone” menu screen.
153
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
5
Bluetooth
® HA
ND
S-FREE SYSTEM
Display audio_U_2nd
“Dial By Number” screen
To display the “Dial By Number” screen, touch “Dial By Number” on the “Phone”
menu screen, or touch on any of the “Phone” screens. The “Dial By Number”screen can also be displayed by pressing the switch on the steering wheel.
No. Name Function
Shortcut keys Touch the corresponding icon to change to the “Dial By Number”,“Contacts”, “Call History” or “Messages” screen.
The Name ofphone and pro-vider
Displaying name of the phone and provider. These information maynot be displayed depending on the phone.
Number keys Touch to input a phone number.
Save the num-ber screen but-ton
Touch to register a phone number.
Delete screenbutton Touch to delete an input phone number.
Off hook screenbutton Touch to make a phone call.
The receivingarea
“R” is displayed when receiving in a Roaming area.• The receiving area may not be displayed depending on the
phone.
154
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
The amount ofbattery chargeleft
The six bars display the charge level of the phone’s battery.• The amount displayed does not always correspond with the
amount displayed on the cellular phone. The amount of batterycharge left may not be displayed depending on the phone. Thissystem does not have a charging function.
• If this information is not available from the connected phone, theicon will be shown with a question mark.
The level of re-ception
The five bars display the level of reception.• The level of reception does not always correspond with the level
displayed on the cellular phone.• The level of reception may not be displayed depending on the
phone.• If this information is not available from the connected phone, the
icon will be shown with a question mark.
Bluetooth® con-nection The icon indicates an active BT-connection.
Short messag-es information Displays short messages information.
Missed calls in-formation Displays missed calls information.
INFORMATION
● An antenna for the Bluetooth® connection is built into the instrument panel. The systemmay not function when you use the Bluetooth® phone in the following conditions andplaces:• When the cellular phone is obstructed by certain objects (such as when it is behind the
seat or in the glove box and console box).• When the cellular phone touches or is covered with metal materials.
No. Name Function
155
5
Bluetooth
® HA
ND
S-FREE SYSTEM
Display audio_U_2nd
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
2. HANDS-FREE SYSTEM
Bluetooth® hands-free system allowsyou to make or receive a call withouttaking your hands off the steeringwheel by connecting your cellularphone.
This system supports Bluetooth®.Bluetooth® is a wireless data systemby which you can call without yourcellular phone being connected with acable or placed on a cradle.The operating procedure of the systemis explained in this section.
For registering and setting of the phone,see “Bluetooth® SETTINGS” on page202.
CAUTION
● Use a cellular phone or connect theBluetooth® phone only when safe andlegal to do so.
● Your audio unit is fitted with Bluetooth®
antennas. People with implanted pace-makers or cardiac defibrillators shouldmaintain a reasonable distance betweenthemselves and the Bluetooth® anten-nas. The radio waves may affect theoperation of such devices.
● Before using Bluetooth® devices, usersof any electrical medical device otherthan implanted pacemakers andimplanted cardiac defibrillators shouldconsult the manufacturer of the devicefor information about its operation underthe influence of radio waves. Radiowaves could have unexpected effects onthe operation of such medical devices.
NOTICE
● Do not leave your cellular phone in thecar. The temperature inside may be highand damage the phone.
● If the Bluetooth® phone is too close tothe system, quality of the sound maydeteriorate and connecting conditionmay go down.
INFORMATION
● If your cellular phone does not supportBluetooth®, this system will not function.
● Depending on the cellular phone mod-els, some functions may be restricted.
● In the following conditions, the systemmay not function.• The cellular phone is turned off.• The current position is outside the
communication area.• The cellular phone is not connected.• The cellular phone has a low battery.• When outgoing is controlled, due to
heavy traffic on telephone lines, etc.• When the cellular phone itself cannot
be used• When transferring the phone book
data from the cellular phone● When using Bluetooth® audio and
hands-free at the same time, the follow-ing problems may occur.• The Bluetooth® connection may be
cut.• Noise may be heard on the
Bluetooth® audio playback.● The Bluetooth® phone battery will be
depleted quickly when it is connected toBluetooth®.
156
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
Bluetooth is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG, Inc.
By pressing the phone, you can receive acall or hang up without taking your handsoff the steering wheel.
By pressing the volume switch, you canadjust the volume.
You can use the microphone when talkingon the phone.
INFORMATION
● This system supports the following ser-vice.• Bluetooth® Specification
Ver.1.1 or higher (Recommended: Ver.2.1 + EDR orhigher)
• ProfilesHFP (Hands Free Profile)Ver.1.0 or higher(Recommended: Ver.1.5 or higher)DUN (Dial-Up Networking Profile)Ver.1.1 or higherPAN (Personal Area Network)Ver. 1.0PBAP (Phone Book Access Profile)Ver.1.0 or higherSPP (Serial Port Profile)MAP (Message Access Profile)
• ApplicationPIM (Personal Information Manager)
● If your cellular phone does not supportHFP, you cannot register the Bluetooth®
phone, or use DUN/PAN or PBAP pro-files individually.
● If the connected Bluetooth® phone ver-sion is older than recommended orincompatible, this function may not beused.
USING THE PHONE SWITCH AND MICROPHONE
The actual design and button positionwill differ depending on the vehicle. Fordetails, refer to vehicle “Owner’sManual”.
157
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
5
Bluetooth
® HA
ND
S-FREE SYSTEM
Display audio_U_2nd
The following data is stored for every reg-istered phone. When another phone isconnecting, you cannot read the regis-tered data.• Phone book data• Call history data
You can initialize the following data in thesystem.• Phone book data• Call history data• Speed dial data• Bluetooth® phone data• Volume setting• Bluetooth® setting
INFORMATION
● The other party’s voice will be heardfrom the front speakers. The audio sys-tem will be muted during phone calls orwhen hands-free speech commands areused.
● Talk alternately with the other party onthe phone. If you talk at the same time,your voices may not reach each other. (Itis not a malfunction.)
● Keep the volume of receiving voicedown. Otherwise, an echo will be heardand receiving voice can be heard out-side of the vehicle. When you talk on thephone, speak clearly towards the micro-phone.
● In the following situations, your voicemay not reach the other party.• Driving on an unpaved road. (Due to
traffic noise.)• Driving at high speed.• A window is open.• Turning the air-conditioning vents
towards the microphone.• The sound of the air-conditioning fan is
loud.• There is an effect from the cellular
phone network.
ABOUT THE PHONE BOOK IN THIS SYSTEM
INFORMATION
● When you delete the phone, the above-mentioned data is also deleted.
WHEN YOU RELEASE YOUR CAR
A lot of personal data is registeredwhen you use the Hands-free system.When you release your car, initializeyour data. (See “DELETE PERSONALDATA” on page 199.)
INFORMATION
● If you initialize it, the former state willnever come back again. Pay attentionwhen initializing the data.
158
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
CAUTION
● FCC ID: QNG-BE2729IC ID: 6434A-BE2729MADE IN USAThis device complies with Part 15 of theFCC Rules and RSS-210 of the industryCanada. Operation is subject to the fol-lowing two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and (2) This device must accept any interfer-ence received, including interferencethat may cause undesired operation.
● FCC WARNING: Changes or modifica-tions not expressly approved by theparty responsible for compliance couldvoid the user’s authority to operate theequipment.
● CAUTION: Radio Frequency RadiationExposureThis equipment complies with FCC radi-ation exposure limits set forth for uncon-trolled equipment and meets the FCCradio frequency (RF) Exposure Guide-lines in Supplement C to OET65 andRSS-102 of the IC radio frequency (RF)Exposure rules. This equipment hasvery low levels of RF energy that itdeemed to comply without maximumpermissive exposure evaluation (MPE).But it is desirable that it should beinstalled and operated with at least 20cm and more between the radiator andperson’s body (excluding extremities:hands, wrists, feet and ankles).
● Co-location: This transmitter must not beco-located or operated in conjunctionwith any other antenna or transmitter.
159
5
Bluetooth
® HA
ND
S-FREE SYSTEM
Display audio_U_2nd
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
3. CONNECTING A Bluetooth® PHONE
■CONNECTING FROM THE SYSTEM
1 Press the button.
2 Touch “Search Bluetooth* devices”.
3 Touch “Add New Device”.
4 Touch “Search for Bluetooth* Devi-ces”.
When another Bluetooth® device is cur-rently connected, a pop-up window is dis-played. To disconnect it, touch “Yes”.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG, Inc.
CONNECTING A Bluetooth® PHONE
In order to use the hands-free system,it is necessary to pair the phone andconnect the phone’s profile (HFP) withthe system. (In this manual, pairing re-fers to a Bluetooth® device connectingwith the system. Connecting refers tothe paired device’s profile(s) beingconnected to the system.)Once the profile has been connected,hands-free calls can be made.If you have not yet connected anyBluetooth® phones with phone profile(HFP), you must first pair your phonewith phone profile (HFP) according tothe following procedure. Connect yourBluetooth® phone with phone profile(HFP) after bringing the vehicle to acomplete stop.
See “Bluetooth® SETTINGS” on page202 of additional registration when reg-istering.
CONNECTING A Bluetooth® PHONE
160
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
5 The following screen will be displayedwhile searching for a Bluetooth® de-vice.
To cancel this function, touch “Cancel”.
6 Touch the device to be paired.
Connectable Bluetooth® devices will bedisplayed in the list.
7 The following screen will be displayed.
To cancel this function, touch “Cancel”.
8 Confirm the PIN.
Confirm the PIN displayed on the screen,and then touch “Accept”.If the device does not support SSP(Secure Simple Pairing), input the PIN dis-played on the screen into the device.
9 The following screen will be displayedwhen pairing is complete.
10The system waits for connection re-quests coming from the paired device.Phone and Music profiles are typicallyconnected automatically.
If the automatic connection failed, the fol-lowing screen will be displayed. Touch“Connect for Phone”.
Once the Bluetooth® phone has been con-nected, it will be automatically connectedwhenever the engine switch is turned tothe “ACC” or “ON” position.
INFORMATION
● For details on device detection and theoperation of your cellular phone, see themanual that comes with the cellularphone.
161
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
5
Bluetooth
® HA
ND
S-FREE SYSTEM
Display audio_U_2nd
■CONNECTING FROM THE DEVICE
1 Press the button.
2 Touch “Search Bluetooth* devices”.
3 Touch “Add New Device”.
4 Touch “Make This System Discover-able”.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG, Inc.
When another Bluetooth® device is cur-rently connected, a pop-up window is dis-played. To disconnect it, touch “Yes”.
5 The following screen will be displayed.
To cancel this function, touch “Cancel”.
6 Confirm the PIN.
Confirm the PIN displayed on the screen,and then touch “Accept”.If the device does not support SSP(Secure Simple Pairing), input the PIN dis-played on the screen into the device.
7 The following screen will be displayedwhen pairing is complete.
162
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
8 The system waits for connection re-quests coming from the paired device.Phone and Music profiles are typicallyconnected automatically.
If the Bluetooth® phone is disconnectedon purpose, such as it was turned off, thisdoes not happen. Reconnect it manuallyusing either of the following methods:• Select the Bluetooth® phone again. (See
page 208.)• Connect the phone profile. (See page
204.)
RECONNECTING THE Bluetooth® PHONE
If a Bluetooth® phone is disconnecteddue to poor reception from theBluetooth® network when the engineswitch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position,the system will automaticallyreconnect the Bluetooth® phone.
163
5
Bluetooth
® HA
ND
S-FREE SYSTEM
Display audio_U_2nd
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
4. REGISTERING AN ENTRY
1 Touch “Contacts”.
The “Contacts” screen can be displayed
by touching on any of the “Phone”screens.
2 Touch “Stored” on the “Contacts”screen.
3 Touch “Create New Entry”.
4 Select one of 4 phone types (“Mo-bile”, “Home”, “Work” or “Other”)and input a number.
: Touch to delete one number. Touchand hold to continue deleting numbers.
You can enter a number for each phonetype.
5 Touch .
6 Input the entry name.
7 Touch “OK”.
8 The entry is registered in the “Stored”list.
REGISTERING A NEW ENTRY
Up to 200 numbers can be registeredwith this system.
INFORMATION
● This function cannot be operated whiledriving.
REGISTERING FROM THE “Contacts” SCREEN
Touch to display and edit the entryinformation. (See page 166.)
164
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
1 Touch “Dial By Number” on the“Phone” menu screen.
The “Dial By Number” screen can be dis-
played by touching on any of the“Phone” screens.
You can also press the switch on thesteering wheel to display the “Dial ByNumber” screen.
2 Input the numbers.
3 Touch .
4 Follow the steps “REGISTERINGFROM THE “Contacts” SCREEN” from“STEP 6”. (See page 163.)
1 Search the entry by “Phone Book”.(See page 169.)
2 Touch for desired item.
3 Touch “Add to Stored Phone Num-bers”.
4 Follow the steps “REGISTERINGFROM THE “Contacts” SCREEN” from“STEP 6”. (See page 163.)
1 Searching the entry by “Call History”.(See page 171.)
2 Touch next to the desired item.
3 Follow the steps “REGISTERINGFROM THE “Contacts” SCREEN” from“STEP 6”. (See page 163.)
REGISTERING FROM THE “Dial By Number” SCREEN
INFORMATION
● The phone type is registered as“Mobile”.
REGISTERING FROM THE “Phone Book” SCREEN
INFORMATION
● The phone type is registered as“Mobile”.
● If the contact includes an address and aphone number, they will be stored in the“Stored” list on the “My Destinations”screen and “Contacts” screen. (Seepages 52 and 163.)
REGISTERING FROM THE “Call History” SCREEN
INFORMATION
● The phone type is registered as“Mobile”.
REGISTERING FROM AN EXTERNAL DEVICE
“vCard” formatted data can be trans-ferred from a USB memory to this sys-tem. Transferred addresses andnumbers will be stored in the “Stored”list on the “My Destinations” screenand “Contacts” screen. (See pages 52and 163.)
165
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
5
Bluetooth
® HA
ND
S-FREE SYSTEM
Display audio_U_2nd
1 Touch “Contacts”.
The “Contacts” screen can be displayed
by touching on any of the “Phone”screens.
2 Touch “Speed Dials” on the “Con-tacts” screen.
3 Touch the desired speed dial screenbutton the phone number is to be reg-istered to.
4 Touch “Yes”.
5 Touch the desired list to select the en-try.
6 Touch the desired entry to register.
If there are 2 or more phone numbers,touch the desired number in the list.
7 The entry is registered as “Speed Di-als”.
REGISTERING AN ENTRY AS “Speed Dials”
Phone numbers from the list in the“Stored” screen and “Phone Book” canbe registered as speed dials. Up to 15speed dials can be registered.
Touch to display and edit the entryinformation. (See page 166.)
166
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
1 Touch next to the desired entryon the “Contacts” screen.
Entry options screen of the “Stored” and“Speed Dials” list
Entry options screen of the “PhoneBook” list
On this screen, the following functions canbe operated.
1 Touch “Rename XX” on the entry op-tions screen.
2 Input the entry name.
3 Touch “OK”.
DISPLAYING AND EDITING THE ENTRY INFORMATION
Detailed information of entries in thelist can be displayed or edited.
No. Function
Touch to display the details ofthe entry information.• Touch the desired entry to call
it.
Touch to change the entry name.(See page 166.)
Touch to edit phone numbers.(See page 167.)
Touch to delete the entry.
Touch to delete all entries.
Touch to register the entry in the“Stored” list on the “My Destina-tions” screen and “Contacts”screen. (See page 164.)
INFORMATION
● “Rename XX” and “Edit Phone Num-bers” cannot be operated while driving.
CHANGING THE ENTRY NAME
167
1. BASIC INFORMATION BEFORE OPERATION
5
Bluetooth
® HA
ND
S-FREE SYSTEM
Display audio_U_2nd
1 Touch “Edit Phone Numbers” on theentry options screen.
2 Select one of 4 phone types and inputa number.
: Touch to delete one number. Touchand hold to continue deleting numbers.
You can edit a number for each phonetype.
3 Touch .
EDITING PHONE NUMBERS
INFORMATION
● If an entry that is transferred from a cel-lular phone is edited, the change willaffect the entry in the “Stored” list on the“My Destinations” screen and “Contacts”screen. (See pages 52 and 163.)
SENDING STORED CONTACTS TO A USB MEMORY
The entries stored in the “Stored” liston the “My Destinations” screen and“Contacts” screen can be transferredto a USB memory. (See page 58.)
168
Display audio_U_2nd
2. TELEPHONE OPERATION
1. CALLING ON A Bluetooth® PHONE
1 Press the switch on the steeringwheel.
The “Dial By Number” screen can be dis-played by touching “Dial By Number”
on the “Phone” menu screen or onany of the “Phone” screens.
2 Touch the desired key to input thephone number.
: Touch to delete one number. Touchand hold to continue deleting numbers.
3 Touch .
4 The connecting screen will be dis-played.
To cancel the call, touch “End Call”.
1 Touch “Contacts”.
The “Contacts” screen can be displayed
by touching on any of the “Phone”screens.
2 Touch “Stored” on the “Contacts”screen.
After a Bluetooth® phone has beenconnected, a call can be made usingthe hands-free system. There are sev-eral methods by which a call can bemade. These are described below.
BY DIAL
You can call by inputting the phonenumber.
When is touched, the number isregistered in the “Stored” list on the“Contacts” screen. (See page 164.)
INFORMATION
● This function cannot be operated whiledriving.
BY “Stored” LIST ON THE “Contacts” SCREEN
Calls can be made using the “Stored”list on the “Contacts” screen. To usethis function, it is necessary to registerthe entry. (See page 163.)
169
2. TELEPHONE OPERATION
5
Bluetooth
® HA
ND
S-FREE SYSTEM
Display audio_U_2nd
3 Touch the desired entry.
If there are 2 or more phone numbers,touch the desired number in the list.
4 The connecting screen will be dis-played.
To cancel the call, touch “End Call”.
1 Touch “Contacts”.
The “Contacts” screen can be displayed
by touching on any of the “Phone”screens.
2 Touch “Phone Book” on the “Con-tacts” screen.
3 Touch the desired entry.
If there are 2 or more phone numbers,touch the desired number in the list.
Touch to display and edit the entryinformation. (See page 166.)
BY PHONE BOOK
Calls can be made using the phonebook data of the connected cellularphone. The phone book changes de-pending on the phone connected.If a contact does not have phone num-ber stored, the entry will be dimmed.You can update the Phone’s book list.(See page 213.)
170
2. TELEPHONE OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
4 The connecting screen will be dis-played.
To cancel the call, touch “End Call”.
1 Touch “Contacts”.
The “Contacts” screen can be displayed
by touching on any of the “Phone”screens.
2 Touch “Speed Dials” on the “Con-tacts” screen.
3 Touch the desired entry.
4 The connecting screen will be dis-played.
To cancel the call, touch “End Call”.
Touch “Search Contact” to search bythe contact’s name. This function cannotbe operated while driving.
Touch to display and edit the entryinformation. (See page 166.)
INFORMATION
● When a phone is connected for the firsttime, its phone book must be down-loaded. If the phone book can not bedownloaded, a pop-up window will bedisplayed.
BY SPEED DIALS
You can call by “Speed Dial” numberlist. Registering number in the “SpeedDial” number list is to see page 165.
Touch to display and edit the entryinformation. (See page 166.)
171
2. TELEPHONE OPERATION
5
Bluetooth
® HA
ND
S-FREE SYSTEM
Display audio_U_2nd
1 Touch “Call History”.
The “Call History” screen can be displayed
by touching on any of the “Phone”screens.
2 Touch the desired list.
“All”: Touch to display all numbers(missed, received and dialed).“Missed”: Touch to display missedcalls.“Received”: Touch to display receivedcalls.“Dialed”: Touch to display dialed num-bers.
The state of a call is shown by the follow-ing icons.
: Missed
: Received
: Dialed
3 Touch the desired entry.
4 The connecting screen will be dis-played.
To cancel the call, touch “End Call”.
1 Touch “Call Sender”.
2 The connecting screen will be dis-played.
To cancel the call, touch “End Call”.
BY CALL HISTORY
Calls can be made using one of the 4call lists functions.
When is touched, the entry is reg-istered in the “Stored” list on the “Con-tacts” screen. (See page 164.)
CALLING USING A SHORT MESSAGE
Calls can be made to a short messagesender’s phone number. (See page177.)
172
2. TELEPHONE OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
1 Touch .
2 The connecting screen will be dis-played.
To cancel the call, touch “End Call”.
BY POI CALL
Calls can be made to a POI when itsdetails are displayed on the screen.(See pages 32 and 36.)
173
5
Bluetooth
® HA
ND
S-FREE SYSTEM
2. TELEPHONE OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
2. RECEIVING CALLS ON A Bluetooth® PHONE
1 Press the switch on the steeringwheel.
“Accept”: Touch to talk on the phone.“Reject”: Touch to reject the call.
The layout of the incoming call screenmay differ depending on the informationavailable from the connected phone.
Single call
2 The ongoing screen is displayed. (Seepage 174.)
Call waiting
2 The ongoing screen is displayed. (Seepage 174.)
The first call is put on hold.The second call’s information is displayedbelow the first call information.
When a call is received, this screen isdisplayed and a sound is heard.
Ringtone and ringtone volume can beset. (See pages 197 and 213.)
INFORMATION
● During international phone calls, theother party’s name may not be displayedcorrectly depending on the cellularphone which you have.
174
2. TELEPHONE OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
3. TALKING ON A Bluetooth® PHONE
Single call
Call waiting
On this screen, the following functions canbe operated.
While you are talking on a Bluetooth®
phone, the ongoing screen is dis-played. The operations outlined belowcan be performed on this screen.
No. Function
Touch to hang up the phone.
• The switch on the steeringwheel can also be pressed tohang up the phone.
Touch to dial a second number.(See page 175.)
Touch to send a tone. (See page175.)
Touch to put a call on hold. Tocancel this function, touch “Ac-tive call”.
Touch to mute your voice. Tocancel muting your voice, touch“Unmute call”.
Touch to transfer the call. Touch“Transfer to Phone” to changefrom Hands-free call to cellularphone call. Touch “Handsfreemode” to change from cellularphone call to Hands-free call.
Displays a call duration.
Touch to adjust the volume of theother party’s voice. (See page175.)
Displays the name, number andpicture of the other party. The in-formation shown here may differdepending on the informationavailable from your phone.
Touch to change parties.
Touch to change to a conferencecall.
INFORMATION
● When you change from cellular phonecall to Hands-free call, the Hands-freescreen will be displayed and the call canbe operated on the screen.
● Transferring methods will be differentdepending on the type of cellular phonewhich you have.
● For the operation of the phone, see themanual that comes with your cellularphone.
No. Function
175
2. TELEPHONE OPERATION
5
Bluetooth
® HA
ND
S-FREE SYSTEM
Display audio_U_2nd
1 Touch .
2 Touch “-” or “+” to adjust the volumeof the other party’s voice.
1 Touch “Dial Pad”.
2 Inputting the numbers.
Input numbers are sent immediately astones.Touch “Quit” to return the previousscreen.
1 Touch “Dial”.
2 Touch the desired method to call.
If “Dial Number” is selected
3 Input the number and then touch .
If “Dial From Contacts” is selected
3 Touch the desired method and thentouch the desired entry.
ADJUSTING THE RECEIVER VOLUME
The receiver volume can also beadjusted using the switch on the steer-ing wheel.
SENDING TONES
DIALING A SECOND NUMBER
176
2. TELEPHONE OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
If “Dial From Call History” is selected
3 Touch the desired list and then touchthe desired entry.
4 The connecting screen will be dis-played.
To cancel the call, touch “End Call”.
5 When a new call has been established,the following screen will be displayed.
The first call is put on hold.The second call’s information is displayedbelow the first call information.
■CHANGING PARTIES
1 Touch “Swap Calls”.Every time “Swap Calls” is touched, theparty who is on hold will be switched.
■CHANGING TO A CONFERENCECALL
1 Touch “Link Calls”.
INFORMATION
● “Dial Number” cannot be operatedwhile driving.
INFORMATION
● If your cellular phone is not HFP Ver. 1.5compatible, this function can not beused.
● Dialing a second number operation maydiffer depending on your phone com-pany and cellular phone.
177
5
Bluetooth
® HA
ND
S-FREE SYSTEM
Display audio_U_2nd
3. SHORT MESSAGE FUNCTION
1. SHORT MESSAGE FUNCTION
1 Touch “Messages”.
The “Messages” screen can be displayed
by touching on any of the “Phone”screens.
2 Touch “Inbox” on the “Messages”screen.
3 Touch the desired short message.
The state of a message is shown by thefollowing icons.
: New message
: Read message
: Unread message
Received messages can be forwardedfrom the connected Bluetooth® phone,enabling checking and replying usingthis system.
INFORMATION
● This feature is only available on sup-ported Bluetooth® devices. Pleasecheck the phone manufacturer websiteand http://toyota.com/connect fordetails.
NEW SHORT MESSAGE NOTIFICATION POP-UP WINDOW
When a new short message is re-ceived, a pop-up window is displayedon the screen.
This function can be set to “On” or“Off”. (See page 213.)
CHECKING RECEIVED SHORT MESSAGES
178
3. SHORT MESSAGE FUNCTION
Display audio_U_2nd
4 The short message will be displayed.
On this screen, the following functions canbe operated.
1 Touch “Reply Free Text” or “ReplyTemplate”.
2 Input the short message.
3 Touch “OK”.
4 The short message will be sent.
1 Touch “Messages” on the “Phone”menu screen.
The “Messages” screen can be displayed
by touching on any of the “Phone”screens.
2 Touch “Sent” on the “Messages”screen.
3 Touch the desired short message.
4 The short message will be displayed.
: Touch to have the short messageread out. To cancel this function, touch
.
No. Function
Touch to have the shortmessage read out. To cancel this
function, touch .
Touch to call the sender.
Touch to reply to the short mes-sage by free text.
Touch to reply to the short mes-sage by template.
REPLYING THE SHORT MESSAGE
INFORMATION
● “Reply Free Text” cannot be selectedwhile driving.
CHECKING SENT SHORT MESSAGES
179
3. SHORT MESSAGE FUNCTION
5
Bluetooth
® HA
ND
S-FREE SYSTEM
Display audio_U_2nd
1 Touch “Messages” on the “Phone”menu screen.
The “Messages” screen can be displayed
by touching on any of the “Phone”screens.
2 Touch “Create New” on the “Messag-es” screen.
3 Touch “Create Message” or “UseTemplate”.
4 Input the short message. (See page180.)
5 Touch “OK”.
6 Select the desired number/contact towhom the short message should besent.
“Enter Number”, “Select Contact” anda list of former recipients will be displayed.If “Enter Number” is selected
7 Enter the number.
8 Touch “OK”.
9 The short message will be sent.
If “Select Contact” is selected
7 Touch the desired list.
8 Touch the desired contact.
9 The short message will be sent.
If a recipient is selected
7 The short message will be sent imme-diately.
SENDING A NEW SHORT MESSAGE
INFORMATION
● “Create Message” cannot be selectedwhile driving.
180
3. SHORT MESSAGE FUNCTION
Display audio_U_2nd
■FROM THE “Create Message”SCREEN
1 Input the short message.
2 Touch “OK”.
■FROM THE “Use Template”SCREEN
1 Touch the desired template.
: Touch to delete the template.10 messages have already been regis-tered to the message template screen.
2 Edit the short message.
This screen is not displayed while driving.When a template is touched, the screenwill be changed to the recipient selectionscreen.
3 Touch “OK”.
CREATE A NEW SHORT MESSAGE
INFORMATION
● The cursor’s position can be moved bytouching the desired location in the input
screen. Touch or to scroll theinput screen up or down.
● The short messages can contain up to160 characters. If the entered textexceeds the characters available for oneshort message, a new short messagewill begin automatically. This is indicatedby a separation line and an icon in theinput field, which is shown as soon asthere are only 10 characters left for theshort message.
● The number of characters left for theshort message is displayed.
● A maximum of 6 short messages can bewritten in series.
181
3. SHORT MESSAGE FUNCTION
5
Bluetooth
® HA
ND
S-FREE SYSTEM
Display audio_U_2nd
1 Touch “Prepare Template Message”.
2 Input the short message.
3 Touch “OK”.
4 The message is registered in the tem-plate list on the “Use Template”screen.
REGISTER NEW TEMPLATES
New templates can be created. Up to15 templates can be registered.
INFORMATION
● This function is unavailable while driv-ing.
182
3. SHORT MESSAGE FUNCTION
Display audio_U_2nd
6
183
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
Display audio_U_2nd
8
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM FOR NAVIGATION, AUDIO, HANDS-FREE ........................... 184
USING THE VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM FOR NAVIGATION, AUDIO, HANDS-FREE...................... 184
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION ..................................... 185
2. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM FOR APPS ................................ 187
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM FOR APPS OPERATION .................. 187
1 VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM
184
Display audio_U_2nd
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM FOR NAVIGATION, AUDIO, HANDS-FREE
Type A (two direction steering switch)
Type B (four direction steering switch)
Talk switchPress the talk switch to start the voicecommand system.Press and hold the talk switch to cancelthe voice command system.
Back switchPress the back switch to return to the pre-vious screen.
The voice command system enablesthe navigation, audio and hands-freesystems to be operated using voicecommands.
INFORMATION
● Voice recognition language can bechanged.(See “SELECTING A LAN-GUAGE” on page 198.)
● For voice command system for Appsspecific functions, please see page 187for details.
USING THE VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM FOR NAVIGATION, AUDIO, HANDS-FREE
The actual design and button positionwill differ depending on the vehicle. Fordetails, refer to vehicle “Owner’sManual”.
STEERING SWITCHES FOR THE VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM FOR NAVIGATION, AUDIO, HANDS-FREE
185
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
6
VOIC
E CO
MM
AN
D SYSTEM
Display audio_U_2nd
1 Press the talk switch.The voice command system is activated.
2 After a beep sounds, say the desiredcommand or touch the desired com-mand.
: This icon will be displayed if the usercan speak a command.
: Touch to adjust the volume of thevoice guidance volume.
MICROPHONE
The microphone is directed toward thedriver. It is unnecessary to speak di-rectly into the microphone when givinga command. Passengers may not beheard as clearly by the microphone.
INFORMATION
● Wait for the confirmation beep beforespeaking a command.
● Voice commands may not be recognizedif:• Spoken too quickly.• Spoken at a low or high volume.• The windows are open.• Passengers are talking while voice
commands are spoken.• The air conditioning speed is set high.• The air conditioning vents are turned
towards the microphone.● In the following conditions, the system
may not recognize the command prop-erly and using voice commands may notbe possible:• The command is incorrect or unclear.
Note that certain words, accents orspeech patterns may be difficult for thesystem to recognize.
• There is excessive background noise,such as wind noise.
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
Press the talk switch to stop the cur-rently played prompt and skip to thenext dialog step.In case of an activated speech recog-nizer waiting for input, press the talkswitch to restart the speech recognizer.(The recognizer drops the previousinput and waits for new input from theuser.)
186
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
1 Say “More commands” or touch“More commands” on the voice com-mand main menu screen.
2 Say the desired command or touch thedesired command.
3 Say the desired command or touch thedesired command.
The command list is read out and the cor-responding command is highlighted. Tocancel this function, press the talk switch.
Say “Destination” and the House No.,Street, City and State in one shot.
1 Press the talk switch on the steeringwheel.
2 After the beep say “Destination, 9000Super Bowl Dr, Pasadena, Califor-nia”.
1 Press the talk switch on the steeringwheel.
2 After the beep, say “Call 123 4567899”.
1 Press the talk switch on the steeringwheel.
2 After the beep, say “Play MichaelJackson Thriller” or “Play ArtistMichael Jackson” or “Play AlbumThriller”.
DISPLAYING THE COMMAND LIST SCREEN
VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE: PERFORMING A DESTINATION SEARCH BY ADDRESS
Quick tip: For the street address number9000, say “Nine Thousand” or “NineZero Zero Zero”.
VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE: DIAL NUMBER
Quick tip: Say the phone number digitsindividually, without pausing.
VOICE COMMAND EXAMPLE: SEARCH FOR A TRACK USING ARTIST NAME OR ALBUM NAME
Quick tip: Say artist name followed bysong title.
187
6
VOIC
E CO
MM
AN
D SYSTEM
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
2. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM FOR APPS
1 Press on an Apps screen.
be displayed on an Apps screen ifthe user can speak a command specific tothat App function. Please touch to speak acommand.
2 After a beep sounds, say the desiredcommand.
Command list will be displayed on thescreen.
The voice command system for Appsenables Apps specific functions to beoperated using voice commands.
INFORMATION
● Voice command system for Apps requirean internet connection.
● Some Apps may not have voice com-mand functionality.
VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM FOR APPS OPERATION
188
1. VOICE COMMAND SYSTEM OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
7
189
1
2
3
4
5
6
Display audio_U_2nd
7
8
9
1. QUICK REFERENCE .................. 190
2. FUEL CONSUMPTION................ 191FUEL CONSUMPTION
(VEHICLES WITH HYBRID SYSTEM)............................ 191
FUEL CONSUMPTION (VEHICLES WITH GASOLINE ENGINE) ........................ 191
3. TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM.................................... 193
SHOWING THE TIRE PRESSURE SCREEN ........................................... 193
1 VEHICLE INFORMATION
VEHICLE INFORMATION
190
Display audio_U_2nd
1. VEHICLE INFORMATION
1. QUICK REFERENCE
The actual design and button position will differ depending on the vehicle. Some but-tons will be in different positions or not shown. For details, refer to vehicle “Owner’sManual”.The “Information” screen shown above is displayed if the vehicle is equipped withboth a fuel consumption and a tire pressure warning system.
*: If equipped
Fuel consumption information and tire pressure value can be displayed. To accessthe vehicle information system, press the “CAR” button.
No. Name Function Page
“Fuel Consumption”* Displays the “Trip Information”, “History” and“Energy Monitor” screen. 191
“Tire Pressure”* Displays the “Tire Pressure” screen. 193
“CAR” button* Press the “CAR” button to access the vehicle infor-mation system. Functions vary by vehicle.
191
7
VEHIC
LE INFO
RM
ATIO
N
Display audio_U_2nd
1. VEHICLE INFORMATION
2. FUEL CONSUMPTION*
Energy monitorTrip consumptionHistory
1 Press the “CAR” button.
2 Touch “Fuel Consumption”.
“Trip Information” or “History” screen willbe displayed.The “Information” screen is not displayedif the vehicles not equipped with a tirepressure warning system.
If the “Trip Information” screen is not dis-played, touch “Trip Information”.
“Clear”: Trip information data can be de-lete by touching this screen button.“History”: “History” screen can be dis-played by touching this screen button.
FUEL CONSUMPTION (VEHICLES WITH HYBRID SYSTEM)
Fuel consumption such as shown be-low can be displayed on the screen.For details, refer to vehicle “Owner’sManual”.
FUEL CONSUMPTION (VEHICLES WITH GASOLINE ENGINE)
*: If equipped
TRIP INFORMATION
No. Name
Average speed
Elapsed time
Cruising range
Previous fuel consumption perminute
Current fuel consumption perminute
INFORMATION
● The trip information display indicatesgeneral driving conditions. Accuracyvaries with driving habits and road con-ditions.
192
1. VEHICLE INFORMATION
Display audio_U_2nd
If the “History” screen is not displayed,touch “History”.
The average fuel consumption history isdivided by color into past averages andthe average fuel consumption since thelast reset.
“Clear”: Past record data can be delete bytouching this screen button.“Update”: Reset the average fuel con-sumption to measure the current fuel con-sumption again.
Vehicle with multi-information displayWhen you touch “Update”, the averagefuel consumption displayed in the multi-in-formation display will be reset at the sametime.“Trip Information”: “Trip Information”screen can be displayed by touching thisscreen button.
HISTORY
No. Name
Previous fuel economy record
Current fuel economy
Best recorded fuel economy
193
7
VEHIC
LE INFO
RM
ATIO
N
Display audio_U_2nd
1. VEHICLE INFORMATION
3. TIRE PRESSURE WARNING SYSTEM*
To confirm tire pressure values,touch “Yes”. To cancel and returnto the previous screen, touch“No”. (This screen will not beshown if the tire pressure screenis already being displayed.)
1 Press the “CAR” button.
2 Touch “Tire Pressure”.
3 The tire pressure value of eachtire will be displayed.
Type A
Type B
Low tire pressure values will bedisplayed in orange.The display pattern variesdepending on the vehicle. Somevehicles do not show the sparetire pressure.
Vehicles equipped with a tire pres-sure warning system will display awarning screen in addition to awarning indication on the meter iftire pressure becomes low. For in-formation on the tire pressurewarning system, refer to vehicle“Owner’s Manual”.
SHOWING THE TIRE PRESSURE SCREEN
The tire pressure value of each tirecan be confirmed using the tirepressure screen.
*: If equipped
194
1. VEHICLE INFORMATION
Display audio_U_2nd
8
195
1
2
3
4
5
6
Display audio_U_2nd
7
8
9
1. QUICK REFERENCE .................. 196
2. GENERAL SETTINGS ................ 197SCREENS FOR GENERAL
SETTINGS ........................................ 197
3. DISPLAY SETTINGS .................. 200TURN OFF DISPLAY........................... 200CHANGING BETWEEN
DAY AND NIGHT MODE................... 201ADJUST CONTRAST/
BRIGHTNESS ................................... 201
4. Bluetooth® SETTINGS ............... 202Bluetooth® FUNCTION ON/OFF.......... 202CHANGING THE SYSTEM NAME ...... 203SETTING THE PIN .............................. 203PAIRING A Bluetooth® DEVICE .......... 204SETTING THE PAIRED DEVICES ...... 208SETTING OTHER OPTIONS............... 212
5. PHONE SETTINGS ..................... 213SCREEN FOR PHONE SETTINGS..... 213
6. AUDIO SETTINGS ...................... 214
7. VEHICLE SETTINGS .................. 215
1 SETUP OPERATION
SETUP
196
Display audio_U_2nd
1. SETUP OPERATION
1. QUICK REFERENCE
The actual design and button position will differ depending on the vehicle. Some but-tons will be in different positions or not shown. For details, refer to vehicle “Owner’sManual”.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc.
To customize the function settings, press the “SETUP” button.
No. Name Function Page
“General” Settings are available for language selection,operation sounds, etc. 197
“Bluetooth*”Registering, removing, connecting and discon-necting Bluetooth® devices and settings areavailable for Bluetooth®.
202
“Display” Settings are available for contrast and bright-ness of the screen. 200
“Phone” Settings are available for phone sound, phonebook, etc. 213
“SETUP” button Press this button to display the “Setup” screen. 197, 200, 202, 213, 214, 215
“Vehicle” Settings are available for vehicle customization. 215
“Audio” Settings are available for HD Radio™ system. 214
197
8
SETUP
Display audio_U_2nd
1. SETUP OPERATION
2. GENERAL SETTINGS
1 Press the “SETUP” button.
2 Touch “General”.
3 Touch the items to be set.
4 Touch “Save”.
On this screen, the following functions areoperational.
Settings are available for language se-lection, operation sounds, etc.
SCREENS FOR GENERAL SETTINGS
No. Function
You can change the language.(See “SELECTING ALANGUAGE” on page 198.)
“On” or “Off” can be selected tosound beeps.
The personal data can be delet-ed. (See “DELETE PERSONALDATA” on page 199.)
Touch to set the distance unit to“Kilometer” or “Mile”.
198
1. SETUP OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
1 Press the “SETUP” button.
2 Touch “General” on the “Setup”screen.
3 Touch “Language”.
4 Touch the desired screen button.
The previous screen will be displayed.The selectable languages may differdepending on the model or region.
5 Touch “Save”.
Touch to change a keyboard lay-out. (See “SELECTING A KEY-BOARD LAYOUT” on page 199.)
Touch to change the system vol-ume settings.
The entries stored in the “Stored”list on the “My Destinations”screen and “Contacts” screen(See pages 52 and 163.) can betransferred to a USB memory.(See “SENDING/RESTORINGSTORED CONTACTS USING AUSB MEMORY” on page 58.)
Touch to display the system in-formation.The screen shows the softwareversion.
Touch to set the navigationprompt volume.
Touch to set the phone volume.
Touch to set the ringtone vol-ume.
Touch to set the voice dialog vol-ume.
No. Function SELECTING A LANGUAGE
The desired language can be selected.
199
1. SETUP OPERATION
8
SETUP
Display audio_U_2nd
1 Press the “SETUP” button.
2 Touch “General” on the “Setup”screen.
3 Touch “Delete Personal Data”.
4 Touch “Delete”.
1 Press the “SETUP” button.
2 Touch “General” on the “Setup”screen.
3 Touch “Keyboard Layout”.
4 Touch the desired keyboard layout.
“QWERTY”: Latin characters, “QWER-TY”-Layout“ABC”: Latin characters, “ABC”-Layout
DELETE PERSONAL DATA
INFORMATION
● The following personal data can bedeleted or returned to their default set-tings:• Phone book data• Call history data• Speed dial data• Bluetooth® devices data• Phone sound setting• Bluetooth® setting• Sound setting
SELECTING A KEYBOARD LAYOUT
200
Display audio_U_2nd
1. SETUP OPERATION
3. DISPLAY SETTINGS
1 Press the “SETUP” button.
2 Touch “Display”.
3 Touch the items to be set.
Please refer to the following pages foreach setting.
1 Press the “SETUP” button.
2 Touch “Display” on the “Setup”screen.
3 Touch “Screen Off”.
The display screen will be turned off. Toturn it on, press the “AUDIO”, “CAR” or“SETUP” button.The rear view monitor system may not beavailable on all models.
You can adjust the contrast and bright-ness of the screen. You can also turnthe display off.
TURN OFF DISPLAY
201
1. SETUP OPERATION
8
SETUP
Display audio_U_2nd
1 To display the screen in day modeeven with the headlight switch on,touch “Day Mode” on the adjustmentscreen.
1 Press the “SETUP” button.
2 Touch “Display” on the “Setup”screen.
3 Touch “General” or “Camera”, inwhich you want to make an adjust-ment.
4 Select “Contrast” or “Brightness”
using the or .
5 Adjust the contrast or brightness usingthe “+” or “-”.
6 After adjusting the screen, touch“OK”.
CHANGING BETWEEN DAY AND NIGHT MODE
Depending on the position of the head-light switch, the screen changes to dayor night mode.
INFORMATION
● If the screen is set in day mode with theheadlight switch turned on, this conditionis memorized even with the engineswitch turned off.
ADJUST CONTRAST/BRIGHTNESS
Screen button Function
“Contrast” “+” Strengthens the contrastof the screen
“Contrast” “-” Weakens the contrast ofthe screen
“Brightness” “+” Brightens the screen
“Brightness” “-” Darkens the screen
202
Display audio_U_2nd
1. SETUP OPERATION
4. Bluetooth® SETTINGS
1 Press the “SETUP” button.
2 Touch “Bluetooth*”.
3 The following screen will be displayed.
Please refer to the following pages for adescription of each setting.
1 Touch “Bluetooth* On” or“Bluetooth* Off”.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG, Inc.
To set up a Bluetooth® device. Bluetooth® FUNCTION ON/OFF
The Bluetooth® function can beswitched on or off.
INFORMATION
● When Bluetooth® function is off, “AddNew Device”, “Paired Device List”,“Set System Name” and “Set PIN forPairing” will be dimmed.
203
1. SETUP OPERATION
8
SETUP
Display audio_U_2nd
1 Touch “Set System Name”.
2 Input the new name.
3 Touch “OK”.
1 Touch “Set PIN for Pairing”.
2 Input the desired number.
3 Touch “OK”.A 4 to 8-digit PIN can be selected.
CHANGING THE SYSTEM NAME
The system name for can be changed.Leave the default “CAR MULTIMEDIA”or pick your own unique name for yourcar.
INFORMATION
● Some devices/smartphones may needto be powered off and restarted for thenew name to be shown on the device/phone.
SETTING THE PIN
The PIN can be changed to help pre-vent connecting to the wrong device.
204
1. SETUP OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
1 Touch “Add New Device”.
2 Touch “Search for Bluetooth* Devic-es”.
When another Bluetooth® device is cur-rently connected, a pop-up window is dis-played. To disconnect it, touch “Yes”.
*: Bluetooth is a registered trademark ofBluetooth SIG, Inc.
3 The following screen will be displayedwhile searching for a Bluetooth® de-vice.
To cancel this function, touch “Cancel”.
4 Touch the device to be paired.
Connectable Bluetooth® devices will bedisplayed in the list.
5 The following screen will be displayed.
To cancel this function, touch “Cancel”.The PIN shown will be the default numberunless an alternate PIN is selected. (Seepage 203.)
PAIRING A Bluetooth® DEVICE
Up to 4 Bluetooth® devices can bepaired. A paired device can be con-nected to any of its supported profilessuch as phone, music and/or internet.
CONNECTING FROM THE SYSTEM
The system can be used to initiate asearch for available Bluetooth® Devic-es. The Bluetooth® device must beturned on and discoverable.
205
1. SETUP OPERATION
8
SETUP
Display audio_U_2nd
6 Confirm the PIN.
Confirm the PIN displayed on the screen,and then touch “Accept”.If the device does not support SSP(Secure Simple Pairing), input the PIN dis-played on the screen into the device.
7 The following screen will be displayedwhen pairing is complete.
8 The system waits for connection re-quests coming from the paired device.Phone and music profiles are typicallyconnected automatically.
The system will then automatically switchto the phone menu.
Once the connection is made, the systemis ready to make and receive calls.Due to differences in cellular phones, itmay take some time to transfer yourphone’s contact information into the sys-tem. Not all phones can transfer data inthe correct format. If the automatic connection failed, the fol-lowing screen will be displayed. Touch thedesired profile to be connected.
“Connect for Phone”: Touch to connectthe phone profile.“Connect for Music”: Touch to connectthe music profile.“Connect for Internet”: Touch to connectthe internet profile. (Applies when using anAndroid or BlackBerry device and cellularphone data plan)
Prepare your device for the Entune ser-vice before connecting to the internet.(See page 78.)The Entune service requires an internetconnection to operate. The primary con-nection method is activated by choosing“Connect for Internet”.
206
1. SETUP OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
“Connect All”: Touch to connect all sup-ported profiles. (Applies when using anAndroid or BlackBerry device and cellularphone data plan)
Once you have connected the Bluetooth®
device it is automatically connected when-ever the engine switch is turned to the“ACC” or “ON” position. (Select “Automati-cally Connect” on your cellular phone’sBluetooth® settings menu.)The alternate method for creating an inter-net connection (PAN/DUN) is shown onpage 210. Please contact your phone ser-vice provider for details due to possibleextra costs for this connection method.
1 Touch “Add New Device”.
2 Touch “Make This System Discover-able”.
When another Bluetooth® device is cur-rently connected, a pop-up window is dis-played. To disconnect it, touch “Yes”.
For Apple users:Do not use “Connect for Internet”. In-stead connect your Apple USB DockConnector Cable (aka charging cable) tothe vehicle’s USB port to access internetfunctions.
For Apple users:Do not use “Connect All”. Select “Con-nect for Phone” and “Connect for Mu-sic” then connect your Apple USB DockConnector Cable (aka charging cable) tothe vehicle’s USB port to access internetfunctions.
CONNECTING FROM THE DEVICE
The system can be set to recognize apairing request from a Bluetooth® de-vice. The Bluetooth® device must beturned on and searching.
207
1. SETUP OPERATION
8
SETUP
Display audio_U_2nd
3 The following screen will be displayed.
To cancel this function, touch “Cancel”.On your Bluetooth® device, pleasechoose the system name. (i.e. CAR MUL-TIMEDIA or your specified name)
4 Confirm the PIN.
Confirm the PIN displayed on the screen,and then touch “Accept”.If the device does not support SSP(Secure Simple Pairing), input the PIN dis-played on the screen into the device.
5 The following screen will be displayedwhen pairing is complete.
6 The system waits for connection re-quests coming from the paired device.Phone and music profiles are typicallyconnected automatically.
The system will then automatically switchto the phone menu.
Once the connection is made, the systemis ready to make and receive calls.
208
1. SETUP OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
1 Touch “Paired Device List”.
2 Touch the desired device.
The tone of the icons show which profilesthe device supports. (Dimmed icons arenot available.)The device’s currently connected profilesare highlighted.
3 The following screen will be displayed.
On this screen, the following functions canbe operated.
1 Touch “Rename <<Sample Phone1>>”.
2 Input the new device name.
3 Touch “OK”.
4 The new device name is shown.
SETTING THE PAIRED DEVICES
Devices can be disconnected andeach profile connection status can bechanged using the list.Up to 4 devices can be paired at thesame time.
CHANGING THE PHONE/DEVICE NAME
The name for your phone can bechanged to allow you to distinguish be-tween phones if you have more thanone paired (up to 4).
209
1. SETUP OPERATION
8
SETUP
Display audio_U_2nd
1 Touch “Delete Pairing”.
1 Touch the desired profile to be con-nected or disconnected.
“Connect for Phone” or “Disconnect forPhone”: Touch to connect or disconnectthe phone profile.“Connect for Music” or “Disconnect forMusic”: Touch to connect or disconnectthe music profile.“Connect for Internet” or “Disconnectfor Internet”: Touch to connect or discon-nect the internet profile. (Applies when us-ing an Android or BlackBerry device andcellular phone data plan)
“Connect All” or “Disconnect All”:Touch to connect or disconnect all sup-ported profiles. (Applies when using anAndroid or BlackBerry device and cellularphone data plan)
DELETING A PAIRED DEVICE
CONNECTING OR DISCONNECTING PROFILES
For Apple users:Do not use “Connect for Internet”. In-stead connect your Apple USB DockConnector Cable (aka charging cable) tothe vehicle’s USB port to access internetfunctions.
For Apple users:Do not use “Connect All”. Select “Con-nect for Phone” and “Connect for Mu-sic” then connect your Apple USB DockConnector Cable (aka charging cable) tothe vehicle’s USB port to access internetfunctions.
INFORMATION
● For details on device detection andoperation of your Bluetooth® device, seethe manual that comes with theBluetooth® device.
● The music profiles the paired devicesupports can be connected individuallyas desired. Some devices do not allowindividual profiles to be connected. Inthat case, a pop-up window is displayed.
210
1. SETUP OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
1 Touch to select options.
2 Touch “DUN/PAN Connections”.
3 Touch “Enable DUN/PAN Connec-tions” to turn on or off the DUN/PANfunction.
4 Touch “Provider” to enter the providerdetails.
This section may be optional for most cel-lular providers.
5 Touch “Confirm Provider Informa-tion”.
6 Touch “Entune Account”.
ALTERNATE INTERNET CONNECTION METHOD (PAN/DUN)
The Entune service requires an inter-net connection to operate. The primaryconnection method is activated bytouching “Connect for Internet” asshown on page 204.The alternate method for creating aninternet connection (PAN/DUN) isshown below. Please contact yourphone service provider for details dueto possible extra costs for this connec-tion method.
211
1. SETUP OPERATION
8
SETUP
Display audio_U_2nd
7 Touch “Add Entune Account”.
8 Enter Entune user name and pass-word.
Enter the user name and password infor-mation here only if you are sure that youwant to use the DUN/PAN connectionmethod. Please contact your phone ser-vice provider for details due to possibleextra costs for this connection method.The Entune service requires an internetconnection to operate. The primary con-nection method is activated by touchingthe “Connect for Internet” as shown onpage 204.Touch “Remember Password” to turnthe remember user login information func-tion on or off. When this function is acti-vated, the entered user login informationwill be remembered for every user login.Touch “Delete Entune Account” todelete the account.
1 When an App is launched for the firsttime or when “Connect for Internet”is selected from the Bluetooth® pairingmenu, a cost warning message will bedisplayed.
2 A popup may appear asking you to se-lect your carrier.
LAUNCHING APPS USING DUN/PAN
This screen is displayed only whenmaking the first connection.
212
1. SETUP OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
1 Touch to select options.
2 Touch the desired functions to be set.
When the Entune service is used, a costwarning message is shown. The Entuneservice uses your cellular phone’s dataplan. If you exceed the data available onyour plan you may incur charges fromyour phone service provider.It is not recommended to use Entunewhen your phone is in a roaming area.Cell phone service providers typicallycharge extra fees for service in roamingareas. You may also experience poor orno Entune service in these areas.
SETTING OTHER OPTIONS
No. Function
Touch to turn the show cost warningfunction on or off. When this functionis activated, a pop-up window will bedisplayed before using the Entuneservice.
Touch to turn the show roamingwarning function on or off. When thisfunction is activated, a popup win-dow will be displayed before usingthe Entune service.
Touch to turn the automatic down-load of addresses function on or off.
Touch to enable the alternate meth-od for creating an internet connec-tion (PAN/DUN). (See page 210.)
213
8
SETUP
Display audio_U_2nd
1. SETUP OPERATION
5. PHONE SETTINGS
1 Press the “SETUP” button.
2 Touch “Phone”.
3 Touch the desired items to be set.
On this screen, the following functions canbe set.
Settings are available for ringtone se-lection, announce incoming short mes-sage and email, and “Stored” lists.
SCREEN FOR PHONE SETTINGS
No. Function
Touch to select a ringtone. Noringtone, the phone’s ringtoneand the system’s 4 ringtones areavailable for selection.
Touch to turn the incoming shortmessage announcement func-tion “On” or “Off”.
Touch to turn the incoming Emailannouncement function “On” or“Off”.
Touch to update the phone bookof the connected phone. The up-dated list refers to the “Stored”list on the “My Destinations”screen and “Contacts” screen.(See pages 52 and 163.)
214
Display audio_U_2nd
1. SETUP OPERATION
6. AUDIO SETTINGS
1 Press the “SETUP” button.
2 Touch “Audio”.
3 Touch “HD Radio Settings”.
4 Select the desired setting from “HDRadio/Analog Setting”.
5 Touch “Save”.
HD Radio™ system can be set usingthe following procedure:
Screen button Function
“All”Touch to receive both an-alog and digital broad-casts.
“HD Only” Touch to receive only digi-tal broadcasts.
“Analog” Touch to receive only ana-log broadcasts.
215
8
SETUP
Display audio_U_2nd
1. SETUP OPERATION
7. VEHICLE SETTINGS*
1 Press the “SETUP” button.
2 Touch “Vehicle”.
3 Touch the desired items to be set.
For a list of the settings that can bechanged, refer to vehicle “Owner’s Man-ual”.
4 After changing the settings, touch“Save”.
A message indicating that the settings arebeing saved will appear. Do not performany other operations while this message isdisplayed.
Vehicle customization settings can bechanged.
*: If equipped
216
1. SETUP OPERATION
Display audio_U_2nd
9
217
1
2
3
4
5
6
Display audio_U_2nd
7
8
9
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM OPERATION.............. 218
REAR VIEW MONITOR GUIDE LINES.................................... 219
AREA DISPLAYED ON SCREEN........ 220THE REAR VIEW MONITOR
SYSTEM CAMERA ........................... 220
2. DRIVING PRECAUTIONS........... 222
1 REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
218
Display audio_U_2nd
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM OPERATION
1 To display the rear view image on thescreen, the shift lever is in the “R” posi-tion when the engine switch is in the“ON” position.
If you move the shift lever out of the “R”position, the screen returns to the previ-ous screen.If you select another function rear viewmonitor system will turn off.
The rear view monitor system assiststhe driver by displaying an image of theview behind the vehicle while backingup.The image is displayed in reverse onthe screen. This allows the image toappear in the same manner as that ofthe rear view mirror.
CAUTION
● Never depend on the rear view monitorsystem entirely when backing up.Always make sure your intended path isclear.Use caution, just as you would whenbacking up any vehicle.
● Never back up while looking only at thescreen. The image on the screen is dif-ferent from actual conditions. Depicteddistances between objects and flat sur-faces will differ from the actual dis-tances. If you back up while looking onlyat the screen, you may hit a vehicle, aperson or an object. When backing up,be sure to check behind and all aroundthe vehicle visually and with mirrorsbefore proceeding.
● Do not use the system when the backdoor, trunk or tailgate is not completelyclosed.
● Use your own eyes to confirm the vehi-cle’s surroundings, as the displayedimage may become faint or dark, andmoving images will be distorted, or notentirely visible when the outside temper-ature is low. When backing up, be sureto check behind and all around the vehi-cle visually and with mirror before pro-ceeding.
● Do not use the system in the followingcases:• On icy or slick road surfaces, or in
snow.• When using tire chains or emergency
tires.• On an uneven road, such as a slope.With rear view monitor guide lines (ifequipped)
● Always check the vehicle surroundingarea, because the guide lines are ancil-lary lines.
● The guide lines are ancillary lines anddo not change even if the steering wheelis turned.
219
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
9
REA
R VIEW
MO
NITO
R SYSTEM
Display audio_U_2nd
Guidelines shown differ from those shownon the actual screen.
Vehicle width extension guide lines(blue)
These lines indicate the estimated vehiclewidth extension.
Distance guide line (blue)This line indicates a position on theground about 3 ft. (1 m) behind on theground of the rear bumper of the vehicle.
Distance guide line (red)This line indicates a position on theground about 1.5 ft. (0.5 m) behind on theground of the rear bumper of the vehicle.
Vehicle center guide lines (blue)These lines indicate the estimated vehiclecenter on the ground.
NOTICE
● If the back of the vehicle is hit, the posi-tion and mounting angle of the cameramay change. Be sure to have the cam-era’s position and mounting anglechecked at your Toyota dealer.
● As the camera has a water proof con-struction, do not detach, disassemble ormodify it. This may cause incorrect oper-ation.
● If the temperature changes rapidly, suchas when hot water is poured on the vehi-cle in cold weather, the system may notoperate normally.
● Do not strongly rub the camera lens. Ifthe camera lens is scratched, it can nottransmit a clear image.
● Do not allow organic solvent, car wax,window cleaner or glass coat to adhereto the camera. If this happens, wipe it offas soon as possible.
● If the tire size is changed, the area dis-played on the screen may change.
● When washing the vehicle, do not applyintensive bursts of water to the cameraor camera area. Doing so may result inthe camera malfunctioning.
INFORMATION
● If the camera lens becomes dirty, it can-not transmit a clear image. If water drop-lets, snow, or mud adhere to the lens,rinse with water and wipe with a softcloth. If the lens is extremely dirty, washit with a mild cleanser and rinse.
REAR VIEW MONITOR GUIDE LINES (IF EQUIPPED)
Guide lines are displayed on thescreen.
220
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
Display audio_U_2nd
The actual camera location may differdepending on the vehicle. For details,refer to vehicle “Owner’s Manual”.
AREA DISPLAYED ON SCREEN
Image is displayed approximately levelon screen.
INFORMATION
● The area detected by the camera is lim-ited. The camera does not detectobjects which are close to either cornerof the bumper or under the bumper.
Corners of bumper
INFORMATION
● The area displayed on the screen mayvary according to vehicle orientation orroad conditions.
THE REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM CAMERA
The rear view monitor system camerais located as shown in the illustration.
221
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
9
REA
R VIEW
MO
NITO
R SYSTEM
Display audio_U_2nd
On some models
If a bright light (for example, sunlight re-flected off the vehicle body) is picked up bythe camera, the smear effect* peculiar tothe camera may occur.*: Smear effect A phenomenon that oc-curs when a bright light (for example, sun-light reflected off the vehicle body) ispicked up by the camera; when transmit-ted by the camera, the light source ap-pears to have a vertical streak above andbelow it.
INFORMATION
● The camera uses a special lens. Thedistance of the image that appears onthe screen differs from the actual dis-tance.
● In the following cases, it may becomedifficult to see the images on the screen,even when the system is functioning.• In the dark (for example, at night)• When the temperature near the lens
is high or low• When water droplets are adhering to
the camera, or when humidity is high(for example, when it rains)
• When foreign matter (for example,snow or mud) is adhering to the cam-era
• When the camera has scratches ordirt on it
• When the sun or the beam of head-lights is shining directly into the cam-era lens
● When the camera is used under fluores-cent lights, sodium lights, or mercurylights etc., the lights and the illuminatedareas may appear to flicker.
222
Display audio_U_2nd
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
2. DRIVING PRECAUTIONS (WITH REAR VIEW MONITOR GUIDE LINES)
When the grade behind the vehicle slopesup sharply, objects appear to be fartheraway than they actually are.
When the grade behind the vehicle slopesdown sharply, objects appear to be closerthan they actually are.
When any part of the vehicle sags due tothe number of passengers or the distribu-tion of the load, there is a margin of errorbetween the guide lines on the screen andthe actual distance/course on the road.
In any of the following situations, thereis a margin of error between the guidelines on the screen and the actual dis-tance/course on the road.
223
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
9
REA
R VIEW
MO
NITO
R SYSTEM
Display audio_U_2nd
Approx. 1.5 ft. (0.5 m)The distance that appears on the screenbetween three-dimensional objects (suchas vehicles) and flat surfaces (such as theroad) and the actual distance differ as fol-lows.
• In reality, = < ( and areequally far away; is farther than and ). However, on the screen, thesituation appears to be < < .
• On the screen, it appears that a truck isparking approximately 1.5 ft. (0.5 m)away. However, in reality if you back upto point , you will hit the truck.
224
1. REAR VIEW MONITOR SYSTEM
Display audio_U_2nd
225
1
2
3
4
5
6
Display audio_U_2nd
7
8
9
INDEX
226
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Display audio_U_2nd
AAdding destinations.................................. 49“Address” ..................................................35Adjust contrast/brightness...................... 201“Advanced”................................................40“AM” ........................................................102Application operation ................................91Apps..........................................................91APPS button .......................................20, 72“Audio” ......................................................96Audio remote controls
(steering switches) ............................. 138Audio system ............................................95Audio system operating hints................. 141
Caring for your CD player and discs......................................... 143
CD-R and CD-RW discs..................... 146iPod .................................................... 142MP3/WMA files................................... 145Radio reception .................................. 141Terms ................................................. 147USB memory ...................................... 143
B“Beep” .....................................................197Bluetooth®...............................128, 151, 202Bluetooth® audio .................................... 128
Connecting Bluetooth® audio ............. 130Playing Bluetooth® audio player......... 134Sound setting.............................. 100, 101Switching to Bluetooth® audio
mode ............................................... 130Bluetooth® hands-free system ................151Bluetooth® settings ................................ 202
Bluetooth® function ON/OFF .............. 202Displaying the paired device list ......... 208Pairing a Bluetooth® device................ 204Setting pin........................................... 203
C“Calendar” .................................................77“Call History” ...........................................171Calling on a Bluetooth® phone............... 168
By call history ..................................... 171By dial................................................. 168
227
Display audio_U_2nd
By phone book ................................... 169By POI call ......................................... 172By speed dials.................................... 170By “Stored” list on the
“Contacts” screen ........................... 168Calling using a short message........... 171
CAR button ............................................. 190CD........................................................... 113Cellular phone......................................... 151Channel category.................................... 109Checking calendar ................................... 77Connecting a Bluetooth® phone ............ 159Connecting Bluetooth® audio ................. 130Controls using the
“TUNE SCROLL” knob.......................... 99
D“Day / Night Mode”.................................... 61“Delete Personal Data” ........................... 197Destination search................................... 33
On the “Enter Destination” screen........ 35On the “My Destinations” screen.......... 33
Detour the segment on the route ....... 51, 86Dial.......................................................... 168
Displaying and editing the entry information.................................... 56, 166
Displaying the radio ID............................108Displaying the title and name..................110Download application............................... 91
Operating application ........................... 91DSP control.............................................100
Automatic sound levelizer (ASL) .........100Surround function ...............................100
EEject button .............................................113Email ........................................................ 75
Checking “Email” .................................. 75Receiving a new email ......................... 75
“Enter Destination” ....................................35
F“FM” ........................................................102Fuel consumption....................................191
History .................................................192Trip information ...................................191
Function index...........................................12
228
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Display audio_U_2nd
G“General”.................................................197General settings..................................... 197
HHD Radio™.............................................102HD Radio™ broadcasting .......................102Home ........................................................52How to subscribe to an XM®
Satellite Radio .....................................108How to subscribe.................................108Satellite tuner technology notice .........108
IIf the satellite radio tuner malfunctions ...111“Information” screen............................... 190Input screen ............................................. 14Inserting or ejecting a disc ......................113
Ejecting a disc .....................................113Inserting a disc ....................................113
iPod........................................................ 119About iPod.......................................... 142Compatible models..............................142
iPod cover art..........................................123
L“Language”..............................................197Limitations of the navigation system ........ 66List screen................................................ 17
M“Map”.........................................................19Map icons................................................. 29
POI icons.............................................. 29Traffic messages .................................. 84
Map information ....................................... 68Map layout.................................................28Map screen .............................................. 25Map settings............................................. 61MP3.........................................................113MP3/WMA files........................................113
Playable bit rates .................................145Sampling frequency.............................145
Multicasting (only when listening to an HD Radio™ channel)..................105
“My Destinations” ................................33, 52
229
Display audio_U_2nd
N“Navigation” menu screen........................ 21Navigation operation................................. 20Navigation setting ..................................... 61Navigation system .................................... 19
O“Options” button........................................ 46Overview buttons and
“Applications” menu screen............ 20, 72Overview guidance screen ...................... 22
P“Phone” ................................................... 152Phone book............................................. 169Phone book data..................................... 157Phone settings ....................................... 213Picture slideshow..................................... 73
Displaying the pictures ......................... 73Playing picture slideshows ................... 74
“Pictures”...................................................73Play/Pause button.....................................96Playing a MP3/WMA disc........................116
Playing repeat and random order........118Selecting a desired file ........................117Selecting a desired folder....................117
Playing a USB memory/iPod...................120Repeat and random play functions......124Selecting a desired song .....................121
Playing an audio CD ...............................114Playing repeat and random order........116Selecting a desired track .....................115
Playing Bluetooth® audio ........................134Repeat and random play functions......136Selecting a desired song .....................134
“POI” .........................................................29POI call ...................................................172POI icon ....................................................29Presetting a channel ...............................109Presetting a station .................................102PWR VOL knob.........................................98
230
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Display audio_U_2nd
QQuick guide .................................................9
RRadio broadcast data system .................103Radio reception.......................................141
AM.......................................................141FM .......................................................141XM®.....................................................142
Rear view monitor system.......................217Recalculating the route by the
traffic messages ................................... 87Receiving on a Bluetooth® phone.......... 173Reconnecting the Bluetooth® phone...... 162Registering an entry......................... 52, 163
Displaying and editing the entry information................................ 56, 166
Registering an entry as “Speed Dials” ............................. 165
Registering a new entry................ 52, 163Sending stored contacts to a
USB memory .................................... 58Registering “Home”.................................. 52
Route guidance .........................................44Route guidance screen ............................ 44“Route Options”.........................................64Route preferences...............................43, 64Route settings .......................................... 64
SSatellite radio (SAT) ................................108Screens for general settings ...................197
Delete personal data ...........................199Selecting a language...........................198
“SEEK/TRACK” button ..............................96Selecting a channel.................................110Selecting a station...................................103Setting “Home” as the destination............ 33Setting the route....................................... 43Setup.......................................................195SETUP button .........................................196“Setup” screen........................................ 196Short message function ......................... 177
Checking received short messages.... 177Checking sent short messages .......... 178Sending a new short messages ......... 179
231
Display audio_U_2nd
Showing the tire pressure screen ........... 193SMS message ........................................ 177“Speed Dials” .................................. 165, 170Starting route guidance screen................ 42Steering switches.................................... 138Switching audio source............................. 99Switching to AUX mode .......................... 127Switching to Bluetooth® audio mode ...... 130Switching to CD mode ............................ 114Switching to radio mode ......................... 102Switching to satellite radio mode ............ 109Switching to USB or iPod mode.............. 120
TTalking on the Bluetooth® phone........... 174
Adjusting the receiver volume............ 175Dialing a second number ................... 175Incoming call waiting .......................... 173Sending tones .................................... 175
Telephone............................................... 151Telephone (hands-free system for
cellular phone).................................... 151About the phonebook
in this system.................................. 157Using the phone switch ...................... 156When you sell or dispose of the
vehicle ............................................ 157
Terms......................................................147ID3 tag.................................................147ISO 9660 format ..................................147m3u .....................................................147MP3.....................................................147Packet write.........................................147WMA....................................................147WMA tag..............................................147
To display map screen............................. 25Tone and balance ...................................101
Balance ...............................................101Tone ....................................................101
Traffic announcement .............................104Traffic message setting............................ 88“Traffic Messages” ....................................84“TUNE SCROLL” knob..............................99Turn off display .......................................200Turning the audio system on or off ...........98
UUSB memory...........................................143USB memory/iPod ................................. 119
Connecting a USB memory or iPod ... 119Playing a USB memory or iPod.......... 120Sound setting ............................. 100, 101Switching to USB or iPod mode ......... 120
Using the phone switch...........................156
232
ALPHABETICAL INDEX
Display audio_U_2nd
VVehicle information .................................189Voice command system......................... 183Voice guidance ........................................ 45Volume adjustment ...................45, 175, 197
W“Waypoint”.................................................49When you release your car .....................157WMA ...............................................116, 145
ZZoom in button..........................................27Zoom out button........................................27